Texas Instruments Aktienkurs
Insights zu Texas Instruments
Insights
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Jetzt kostenlos registrieren, um einen Alarm für die Texas Instruments Aktie zu aktivieren.
Aktiviere Alarme zum Aktienkurs, zur Dividendenrendite, zur Bewertung (z. B. KGV oder EV/Sales) oder zu Strategie-Scores und lehne Dich entspannt zurück.
aktien.guide Basis
Kennzahlen
📘 Marktkapitalisierung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Marktkapitalisierung zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen laut Börse aktuell wert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft Unternehmen in Größenklassen (Large, Mid, Small Cap) einzuordnen und gibt Hinweise auf Marktmacht und Stabilität.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Große Unternehmen gelten als stabiler, zahlen oft Dividenden, wachsen aber langsamer.
- Kleine Firmen können stärker wachsen, sind aber schwankungsanfälliger.
- Die Marktkapitalisierung ist ein guter Indikator für Unternehmensgröße, aber kein Maß für Unter- oder Überbewertung.
📘 Enterprise Value (Unternehmenswert)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Enterprise Value (EV) zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich kostet, wenn man es komplett übernehmen würde – inklusive Schulden und abzüglich Cash.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
(= Marktkapitalisierung + Nettoverschuldung)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der EV ist eine realistischere Bewertungsbasis als die Marktkapitalisierung, da er die Kapitalstruktur berücksichtigt. Er ist Grundlage für Kennzahlen wie EV/FCF oder EV/Sales.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Der Enterprise Value zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich wert ist – unabhängig davon, wie es finanziert ist.
- Er ist besonders wichtig für professionelle Investoren, da er eine objektivere Grundlage für Bewertungsvergleiche bietet als die Marktkapitalisierung allein.
- Ein Unternehmen mit hoher Verschuldung erscheint im EV teurer, eines mit viel Cash günstiger – auch wenn sie an der Börse gleich viel wert sind.
📘 Nettoverschuldung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettoverschuldung zeigt, wie viele Schulden nach Abzug des verfügbaren Cashs tatsächlich verbleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen von Fremdkapital abhängig ist – und wie gut es in der Lage ist, seine Schulden kurzfristig zu bedienen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige oder negative Nettoverschuldung bedeutet hohe finanzielle Stabilität.
- Unternehmen mit viel Cash und geringer Verschuldung sind besser gerüstet für Krisen.
- Eine hohe Nettoverschuldung erhöht das Risiko – besonders bei steigenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
📘 Cash
📈 Was ist das?
Der Cashbestand zeigt, wie viele liquide Mittel einem Unternehmen sofort zur Verfügung stehen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Er gibt Auskunft über die finanzielle Flexibilität: Ein hoher Cashbestand ermöglicht Investitionen, Rückkäufe oder Krisenresistenz.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Cashbestand zeigt finanzielle Stärke und Handlungsspielraum.
- Cash kann für Investitionen, Schuldentilgung oder Aktienrückkäufe genutzt werden.
- Allerdings: Zu viel ungenutztes Kapital kann auch auf mangelnde Investitionsideen hinweisen.
📘 Anzahl ausstehender Aktien
📈 Was ist das?
Die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien gibt an, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell im Umlauf sind und von Investoren gehalten werden.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die Grundlage für viele Kennzahlen wie Gewinn je Aktie (EPS), Marktkapitalisierung oder KGV.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Je weniger Aktien im Umlauf sind, desto höher fällt z. B. der Gewinn je Aktie aus – wichtig für Bewertung und Dividendenrendite.
- Aktienrückkäufe verringern die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien – und steigern den Wert je Aktie.
- Kapitalerhöhungen haben den gegenteiligen Effekt: mehr Aktien → Verwässerung der bestehenden Anteile.
📘 Kurs-Gewinn-Verhältnis (KGV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KGV zeigt, wie oft der Gewinn pro Aktie im aktuellen Aktienkurs enthalten ist – also wie „teuer“ eine Aktie im Verhältnis zum Gewinn ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KGV gehört zu den bekanntesten Bewertungskennzahlen. Es hilft Anlegern einzuschätzen, ob eine Aktie im Vergleich zu ihrem Gewinn eher günstig oder teuer erscheint.
🧮 Berechnung
📊 KGV (TTM) = bezogen auf den Gewinn der letzten 12 Monate (Trailing Twelve Months):🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KGV kann auf eine günstige Bewertung hindeuten – oder auf Probleme im Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein hohes KGV kann Wachstumserwartungen widerspiegeln – oder eine überbewertete Aktie.
📘 Kurs-Umsatz-Verhältnis (KUV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KUV zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen – unabhängig vom Gewinn.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KUV ist besonders bei wachstumsstarken oder noch nicht profitablen Unternehmen hilfreich. Es zeigt, wie hoch der Umsatz an der Börse bewertet wird.
🧮 Berechnung
Marktkapitalisierung = 266,73 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 18,44 Mrd. $
Marktkapitalisierung = 266,73 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 21,19 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KUV kann auf Unterbewertung hindeuten – oder auf schwache Margen.
- Ein hohes KUV kann hohe Erwartungen widerspiegeln – oder übermäßigen Optimismus.
- Besonders sinnvoll bei Wachstumsunternehmen, bei denen der Gewinn oder Free Cashflow (noch) keine Aussagekraft hat.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Umsatz (EV/Sales)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/Sales zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen, wenn man auch Schulden und Cash berücksichtigt – es ist eine kapitalstrukturbereinigte Version des KUV.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl eignet sich besonders für den Vergleich von Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Verschuldung – sie zeigt, wie teuer ein Unternehmen tatsächlich im Verhältnis zum Umsatz ist.
🧮 Berechnung
Enterprise Value = 275,68 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 18,44 Mrd. $
Enterprise Value = 275,68 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 21,19 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EV/Sales ist neutral gegenüber der Kapitalstruktur und eignet sich gut für Unternehmensvergleiche.
- Ein niedriges Verhältnis kann auf eine günstig bewertete Aktie hindeuten – ein hohes Verhältnis auf hohe Erwartungen oder Überbewertung.
- Besonders nützlich bei wachstumsstarken, noch nicht profitablen Firmen.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Free Cashflow (EV/FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/FCF zeigt, wie viele Jahre es dauern würde, bis ein Unternehmen seinen Unternehmenswert durch freien Cashflow „zurückverdient”.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Unternehmen auf Basis ihrer tatsächlichen Cash-Erträge zu bewerten – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder buchhalterischem Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges EV/FCF deutet auf eine günstige Bewertung bei starker Cashgenerierung hin.
- Ein hohes EV/FCF kann entweder auf Optimismus oder auf temporär schwachen Cashflow hindeuten.
- Besonders hilfreich bei reifen, profitablen Unternehmen mit stabilen Cashflows.
📘 Kurs-Buchwert-Verhältnis (KBV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KBV zeigt, wie hoch der Marktwert eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zu seinem bilanziellen Eigenkapital ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KBV ist besonders bei Substanzwerten (z. B. Banken, Industrie) relevant. Es hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob ein Unternehmen unter oder über seinem buchhalterischen Vermögen bewertet ist.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein KBV unter 1 kann auf Unterbewertung oder schwache Rentabilität hindeuten.
- Ein KBV über 1 zeigt, dass der Markt dem Unternehmen Mehrwert über den Buchwert hinaus zuschreibt (z. B. Marken, Patente, Wachstum).
- Das KBV eignet sich besonders gut für Unternehmen mit stabilen, materiellen Vermögenswerten.
📘 Dividende je Aktie
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividende je Aktie zeigt, wie viel Geld ein Unternehmen pro Aktie an seine Aktionäre ausschüttet – typischerweise jährlich oder quartalsweise.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die absolute Größe der Auszahlung je Aktie – wichtig für alle, die regelmäßige Erträge suchen oder Dividendenstrategien verfolgen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile oder wachsende Dividende je Aktie ist oft ein Zeichen für ein solides Geschäftsmodell.
- Die Dividende je Aktie allein sagt aber nichts über die Rendite – dafür ist auch der Aktienkurs relevant (→ Dividendenrendite).
- Langfristig steigende Dividenden sind oft ein sehr gutes Merkmal (z. B. Dividenden-Aristokraten).
📘 Dividendenrendite
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividendenrendite zeigt, wie hoch die Dividende eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zum Aktienkurs ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft dabei, Dividendenaktien vergleichbar zu machen – unabhängig vom absoluten Auszahlungsbetrag.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile Dividendenrendite kann auf verlässliche Ausschüttungen hinweisen.
- Ein Vergleich der 1J- und 5J-Rendite hilft zu erkennen, ob das Dividendenwachstum mit dem Kurswachstum Schritt hält.
- Eine niedrige Rendite ist nicht zwingend negativ – sie kann auf starkes Kurswachstum hindeuten.
📘 Dividendenwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Dividendenwachstum zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen seine Dividende je Aktie über die Zeit gesteigert hat.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
5J: durchschnittliche jährliche Wachstumsrate (CAGR)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Stetig steigende Dividenden gelten als Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und Aktionärsorientierung – besonders interessant für langfristige Investoren.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein stabiles Dividendenwachstum ist ein Zeichen nachhaltiger Ertragskraft.
- Ein hohes Dividendenwachstum kann ein erheblicher Hebel deiner Rendite sein:
- Wenn ein Unternehmen z. B. 1 € Dividende zahlt und diese über 5 Jahre jährlich um 15 % erhöht, bekommst du im 5. Jahr bereits 2 € je Aktie – doppelt so viel wie zu Beginn!
📘 Ausschüttungsquote (Payout)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Ausschüttungsquote zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Unternehmensgewinns (pro Aktie) als Dividende an die Aktionäre ausgeschüttet wird.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Quote hilft einzuschätzen, ob eine Dividende auf Dauer tragfähig ist – besonders im Verhältnis zum erzielten Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige Ausschüttungsquote bedeutet: Das Unternehmen behält einen größeren Teil des Gewinns für Investitionen – typisch für Wachstumsunternehmen.
- Eine moderate Quote (z. B. 25–50 %) steht oft für ein gesundes Gleichgewicht zwischen Ausschüttung und Zukunftsinvestitionen.
- Hohe Ausschüttungsquoten können attraktiv wirken, sind aber riskanter, wenn die Gewinne schwanken oder sinken.
📘 Dividendensteigerungen in Folge (Erhöhungen)
📈 Was ist das?
Diese Kennzahl zeigt, wie viele Jahre in Folge ein Unternehmen seine Dividende pro Aktie erhöht hat – ohne Kürzung oder Aussetzung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein langer Track Record kontinuierlicher Erhöhungen spricht für Verlässlichkeit, solide Finanzen und aktionärsfreundliche Unternehmenspolitik.
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein langer Zeitraum mit Dividendensteigerungen stärkt das Vertrauen – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Solche Unternehmen gelten als verlässlich und planbar für Einkommensinvestoren.
- Je länger die Serie, desto stärker das Commitment gegenüber den Aktionären.
📘 Umsatz
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen insgesamt mit seinen Produkten und Dienstleistungen verdient – also den Bruttoerlös vor Abzug von Kosten.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Umsatz ist eine der zentralen Kennzahlen zur Einschätzung der Unternehmensgröße, Marktstellung und Wachstumskraft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein wachsender Umsatz zeigt eine steigende Nachfrage und kann ein guter Frühindikator für Gewinnsteigerungen sein.
- Vergleiche von aktuellem und erwartetem Umsatz geben Hinweise auf das Marktumfeld und Analystenerwartungen.
- Wichtig: Starker Umsatz allein genügt nicht – auch Margen und Profitabilität zählen.
📘 EBITDA
📈 Was ist das?
EBITDA steht für „Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens, bereinigt um bilanztechnische und finanzierungsbedingte Effekte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBITDA ist eine verbreitete Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der operativen Leistungsfähigkeit – insbesondere bei kapitalintensiven Unternehmen oder im internationalen Vergleich.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes oder wachsendes EBITDA spricht für starke operative Erträge – unabhängig von Bilanzierung oder Steuerlast.
- EBITDA ist besonders nützlich, um Unternehmen branchenübergreifend zu vergleichen.
- Wichtig: EBITDA ist keine offizielle Gewinnkennzahl – Abschreibungen und Finanzierungskosten werden ausgeklammert.
📘 EBIT
📈 Was ist das?
EBIT steht für „Earnings Before Interest and Taxes“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen und Steuern. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Finanzierungs- und Steueraufwand.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBIT ist eine zentrale Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der Profitabilität aus dem Kerngeschäft – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder Steuersystem.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes EBIT deutet auf ein profitables Kerngeschäft hin – vor Zinslasten oder steuerlichen Effekten.
- Es erlaubt objektivere Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Finanzierung.
- Im Vergleich mit EBITDA zeigt EBIT bereits den Einfluss von Abschreibungen auf das operative Ergebnis.
📘 Nettogewinn
📈 Was ist das?
Der Nettogewinn ist der verbleibende Jahresüberschuss (oder -fehlbetrag) eines Unternehmens – nach Abzug aller Kosten, Steuern, Zinsen und Abschreibungen
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Nettogewinn ist die zentrale Erfolgskennzahl – er zeigt, wie profitabel ein Unternehmen nach allen Kosten tatsächlich arbeitet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein steigender Nettogewinn zeigt, dass das Unternehmen effizient wirtschaftet – trotz aller Kosten.
- Die Entwicklung des Gewinns beeinflusst z. B. direkt das KGV und weitere Kennzahlen.
- Im Zeitverlauf lässt sich ablesen, wie stabil und profitabel ein Geschäftsmodell wirklich ist.
📘 Free Cashflow (FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow gibt Aufschluss über die echte finanzielle Stärke eines Unternehmens – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln. Er zeigt, wie viel Spielraum für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldenabbau besteht.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
FCF reflects a company’s real financial strength – regardless of accounting profits. It shows how much flexibility a company has for dividends, share buybacks, or debt reduction.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow bedeutet, dass ein Unternehmen echte Finanzkraft besitzt – unabhängig vom bilanzierten Gewinn.
- Er ist oft die solideste Grundlage für nachhaltige Dividenden und Aktienrückkäufe.
- Sinkender FCF kann ein Warnsignal sein – auch wenn der Gewinn stabil aussieht.
📘 Umsatzwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Umsatzwachstum zeigt, wie stark sich die Erlöse eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert haben – tatsächlich (TTM) und auf Prognosebasis (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (Umsatz erwartet ÷ Umsatz Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein wachsender Umsatz ist ein zentrales Signal für steigende Nachfrage, Geschäftsausweitung und Marktanteilsgewinne – besonders bei Wachstumsunternehmen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachstum ist der Motor langfristiger Wertsteigerung – besonders bei Technologie- und Wachstumsaktien.
- Wichtig ist nicht nur das aktuelle Wachstum, sondern auch dessen Nachhaltigkeit.
- Prognosen zeigen, ob Analysten weiteres Potenzial erwarten – oder eine Verlangsamung.
📘 EBITDA-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBITDA-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBITDA ÷ EBITDA Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein steigendes EBITDA ist ein Zeichen für verbesserte operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Finanzierungsstruktur oder Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Starkes EBITDA-Wachstum signalisiert operative Effizienz und Skalierung – besonders relevant in Wachstumsphasen.
- EBITDA-Wachstum ist ein Frühindikator für Margen- und Gewinnentwicklung – sollte aber stets im Zusammenhang mit Umsatz und EBIT betrachtet werden.
📘 EBIT Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBIT-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens (nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern) im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gewachsen ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBIT ÷ EBIT Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein direkter Indikator für die wirtschaftliche Entwicklung des operativen Geschäfts – unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (Abschreibungen).
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Steigendes EBIT signalisiert wachsende operative Rentabilität – auch unter Berücksichtigung von Abschreibungen.
- Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein wichtiges Maß zur Beurteilung von Geschäftsmodellen mit hohen Investitionskosten.
- Im Zusammenspiel mit Umsatz- und EBITDA-Wachstum ergibt sich ein umfassendes Bild zur operativen Entwicklung.
📘 Nettogewinn-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Nettogewinn-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark der Jahresüberschuss eines Unternehmens gegenüber dem Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist – sowohl tatsächlich (TTM) als auch auf Basis von Prognosen (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwarteter Nettogewinn ÷ Nettogewinn Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Der erwartete Wert basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Gewinn ist die entscheidende Ergebnisgröße für ein Unternehmen. Ein wachsender Nettogewinn deutet auf steigende Effizienz, stabile Kostenkontrolle und nachhaltige Ertragskraft hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachsender Nettogewinn stärkt die Bewertung, Dividendenfähigkeit und Kursfantasie.
- Stagnierender oder rückläufiger Gewinn trotz Umsatzwachstum kann auf Margendruck hinweisen.
📘 Free Cashflow-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Free-Cashflow-Wachstum zeigt, wie sich der freie Mittelzufluss eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert hat – also der Betrag, der nach allen operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Free Cashflow ist der echte, verfügbare Geldzufluss. Wachstum in diesem Bereich ist ein Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und steigende Flexibilität bei Dividenden, Rückkäufen oder Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Sinkender Free Cashflow kann auf steigende Investitionen, höhere Kosten oder stagnierende operative Erträge hindeuten.
- Besonders bei Dividendenwerten ist das FCF-Wachstum wichtig – denn Dividenden werden letztlich aus dem verfügbaren Cash gezahlt.
- Ein negativer Trend sollte genauer analysiert werden – er ist nicht zwangsläufig schlecht, aber potenziell ein Warnsignal.
📘 Bruttomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Bruttomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellungskosten (Material, Produktion) als Bruttogewinn übrig bleibt – also der „Rohgewinn“ eines Unternehmens.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Auch: Bruttomarge = Bruttogewinn ÷ Umsatz × 100
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Bruttomarge gibt Aufschluss über die Profitabilität eines Produkts oder Geschäftsmodells vor Fixkosten, Steuern und Zinsen. Sie zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen produzieren oder einkaufen kann.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Bruttomarge deutet auf starke Preissetzungsmacht und effiziente Herstellung hin.
- Sinkende Bruttomargen können auf Kostensteigerungen oder Preisdruck hindeuten.
- Besonders im Vergleich zu Wettbewerbern liefert die Bruttomarge wertvolle Einblicke in die Geschäftsqualität.
📘 EBITDA-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBITDA-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz als operativer Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen (EBITDA) übrig bleibt. Sie misst die operative Effizienz – ohne Verzerrungen durch Finanzierung oder Buchwerte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBITDA-Marge hilft zu verstehen, wie viel operativer Gewinn ein Unternehmen aus jedem Euro Umsatz erzielt – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder steuerlichem Umfeld.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBITDA-Marge zeigt starke operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Bilanzierungseffekten.
- Die Marge ermöglicht gute Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen und Branchen.
- Ein stabiler oder wachsender Wert kann auf effiziente Kostenkontrolle und Skalierbarkeit hindeuten.
📘 EBIT-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBIT-Marge zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Umsatzes als operativer Gewinn nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern übrig bleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBIT-Marge misst die operative Ertragskraft eines Unternehmens unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (z. B. Maschinen, Anlagen). Sie eignet sich gut zum Vergleich von Geschäftsmodellen mit unterschiedlich hohen Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBIT-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen auch nach Abschreibungen effizient arbeitet.
- Sie ist besonders relevant in kapitalintensiven Branchen.
- Langfristig stabile oder steigende Margen sind ein Zeichen wirtschaftlicher Stärke und Preissetzungsmacht.
📘 Nettomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz am Ende als „Reingewinn“ übrig bleibt – also nach Abzug aller Kosten, Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Nettomarge gibt an, wie effizient ein Unternehmen über alle Stufen hinweg wirtschaftet. Sie zeigt, wie viel Gewinn tatsächlich je Euro Umsatz übrig bleibt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Nettomarge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nicht nur operativ stark ist, sondern auch seine Finanzierung und Steuerbelastung im Griff hat.
- Vergleiche mit Wettbewerbern geben Einblicke in die wirtschaftliche Qualität.
- Sinkende Nettomargen trotz Umsatzwachstum können ein Warnsignal sein – etwa für steigende Kosten oder sinkende Effizienz.
📘 Free Cashflow Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug aller operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen tatsächlich als freier Mittelzufluss übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Marge misst die echte Liquidität, die ein Unternehmen erwirtschaftet – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder Abschreibungen. Sie ist besonders relevant für Dividenden, Rückkäufe und Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nachhaltig liquide Mittel erwirtschaftet.
- Sie ist ein starkes Signal für finanzielle Stabilität und Ausschüttungspotenzial.
- Wichtig ist der langfristige Trend – sinkende Werte können auf steigende Investitionen oder rückläufige operative Effizienz hindeuten.
📘 Eigenkapitalquote
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalquote zeigt, wie hoch der Anteil des Eigenkapitals an der Bilanzsumme eines Unternehmens ist – also wie stark es sich aus eigenen Mitteln finanziert.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote steht für finanzielle Stabilität, Krisenfestigkeit und gute Bonität. Sie ist besonders relevant bei der Beurteilung der Verschuldung.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote signalisiert finanzielle Stabilität – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf ein höheres Risiko oder eine aggressive Verschuldung hinweisen.
- Wichtig: Die Eigenkapitalquote sollte immer gemeinsam mit der Eigenkapitalrendite betrachtet werden. Nur so lässt sich beurteilen, ob ein Unternehmen nicht nur solide, sondern auch effizient wirtschaftet.
📘 Eigenkapitalrendite (ROE)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen mit dem Kapital seiner Aktionäre arbeitet – also wie viel Gewinn es pro Euro Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite ist eine zentrale Rentabilitätskennzahl. Sie hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob das Unternehmen eine attraktive Verzinsung auf das eingesetzte Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalrendite spricht für ein starkes, effizientes Geschäftsmodell.
- Besonders interessant ist sie bei kapitalintensiven Firmen oder solchen mit hoher Eigenkapitalquote.
- Wichtig: Ein sehr hoher ROE kann auch auf hohe Schulden hinweisen – daher sollte sie immer im Kontext mit der Eigenkapitalquote betrachtet werden.
📘 Return on Capital Employed (ROCE)
📈 Was ist das?
ROCE misst die Gesamtrentabilität eines Unternehmens – also wie effizient es das eingesetzte Kapital (Eigen- und Fremdkapital) zur Gewinnerzielung nutzt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Das eingesetzte Kapital ist das gesamte betriebsnotwendige Kapital, unabhängig von der Finanzierungsquelle.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROCE eignet sich besonders gut für den Vergleich unterschiedlich finanzierter Unternehmen. Es zeigt, wie effektiv ein Unternehmen Kapital investiert – unabhängig von der Kapitalstruktur.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROCE zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen sein Kapital effizient einsetzt – unabhängig davon, ob es durch Eigen- oder Fremdkapital finanziert ist.
- Je höher der ROCE im Vergleich zu ähnlichen Unternehmen, desto mehr Wert schafft das Unternehmen mit seinem investierten Kapital.
- Besonders wichtig ist der ROCE bei Firmen mit hohen Investitionen – z. B. in Industrie, Energie oder Infrastruktur.
📘 Return on Invested Capital (ROIC)
📈 Was ist das?
ROIC zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen das Kapital investiert, das langfristig im operativen Geschäft gebunden ist – unabhängig davon, ob es aus Eigen- oder Fremdkapital stammt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
- NOPAT = „Net Operating Profit After Taxes“
- Investiertes Kapital = operatives Vermögen abzüglich nicht-verzinster Schulden
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROIC ist eine der präzisesten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung der Kapitalrendite – besonders im Vergleich zur Eigenkapitalrendite, weil es Verzerrungen durch Schulden vermeidet. Er zeigt, ob ein Unternehmen Mehrwert für alle Kapitalgeber schafft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROIC zeigt, wie gut ein Unternehmen mit dem tatsächlich investierten (betriebsnotwendigen) Kapital wirtschaftet.
- Im Unterschied zu ROCE wird nur Kapital betrachtet, das wirklich zur Finanzierung operativer Aktivitäten dient – und verzinst werden muss.
- Besonders hilfreich, um die Kapitalrendite von Unternehmen mit viel „überschüssigem“ Kapital oder zinsfreien Verbindlichkeiten realistisch zu vergleichen.
📘 Verschuldungsgrad (Leverage Ratio)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Verschuldungsgrad zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen durch verzinsliche Schulden (z. B. Kredite und Anleihen) im Verhältnis zum Eigenkapital finanziert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Kennzahl hilft, das finanzielle Risiko und die Abhängigkeit von Fremdkapital zu beurteilen. Ein hoher Verschuldungsgrad kann die Eigenkapitalrendite steigern – birgt aber auch erhöhte Risiken bei Zinsanstiegen oder Liquiditätsengpässen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Verschuldungsgrad steht für finanzielle Stabilität und Unabhängigkeit.
- Ein hoher Wert kann auf erhöhte Risiken hinweisen – insbesondere bei schwankenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
- Wichtig: Immer im Kontext zur Branche und Kapitalintensität bewerten.
📘 Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS)
📈 Was ist das?
Das Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS) zeigt, wie viel Gewinn auf eine einzelne Aktie entfällt – und ist eine der wichtigsten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung von Unternehmen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die verwässerte Aktienanzahl berücksichtigt auch potenzielle neue Aktien, etwa durch Optionen, Wandelanleihen oder andere Umtauschrechte.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EPS bildet die Basis für viele Bewertungskennzahlen wie KGV, PEG oder Payout Ratio. Es macht den Gewinn für Aktionäre vergleichbar – unabhängig von der Unternehmensgröße.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EPS hilft, die Profitabilität pro Aktie zu erfassen – und ist besonders wichtig im Zeitvergleich oder im Vergleich mit Analystenschätzungen.
- Steigendes EPS kann ein Zeichen für stabiles Wachstum oder Aktienrückkäufe sein.
- Wichtig: Verwende verwässertes EPS für realistische Bewertungen – besonders bei stark aktienbasierten Vergütungssystemen.
📘 Free Cashflow je Aktie (FCF je Aktie)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow je Aktie zeigt, wie viel freier Mittelzufluss einem Unternehmen pro Aktie zur Verfügung steht – nach Investitionen, aber vor Dividenden oder Schuldentilgung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der FCF je Aktie zeigt, wie viel liquide Mittel pro Aktie tatsächlich im Unternehmen verbleiben – wichtig für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldentilgung. Im Gegensatz zum Gewinn ist er schwerer manipulierbar und daher besonders aussagekräftig.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow je Aktie ist ein Zeichen für hohe finanzielle Flexibilität.
- Er zeigt, wie viel Kapital ein Unternehmen effektiv einsetzen oder ausschütten kann.
- Besonders relevant für dividendenstarke Unternehmen oder solche mit starker Kapitalrendite.
📘 Short Interest
📈 Was ist das?
Short Interest zeigt, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell leerverkauft wurden – also von Investoren geliehen und verkauft, in der Erwartung fallender Kurse.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Der Wert zeigt den Anteil der Aktien, der aktuell auf fallende Kurse spekuliert wird.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Short Interest dient als Stimmungsindikator: Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Skepsis oder negative Erwartungen gegenüber dem Unternehmen hin – kann aber auch zu einem „Short Squeeze“ führen, wenn der Kurs plötzlich steigt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Short Interest deutet auf Vertrauen in das Unternehmen hin.
- Ein hoher Wert kann ein Warnsignal sein – oder eine Chance, wenn sich die Stimmung dreht.
- Besonders spannend in volatilen Märkten oder vor wichtigen Quartalszahlen.
📘 Employees
📈 Was ist das?
Die Mitarbeiteranzahl zeigt, wie viele Personen ein Unternehmen weltweit beschäftigt – ein Indikator für Größe, Struktur und Geschäftsmodell.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft bei der Einschätzung von Skaleneffekten, Effizienz und Personalkosten. Zusammen mit Umsatz und Gewinn lassen sich Kennzahlen wie Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ableiten.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Viele Mitarbeiter bedeuten große operative Komplexität – aber auch hohes Umsatzpotenzial.
- Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ist ein wichtiger Indikator für Effizienz.
- Besonders spannend bei stark wachsenden Tech- oder Industrieunternehmen.
📘 Umsatz je Mitarbeiter
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz je Mitarbeiter zeigt, wie viel Erlös ein Unternehmen durchschnittlich pro Beschäftigtem erwirtschaftet – eine Kennzahl für Effizienz und Produktivität.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die Mitarbeiterzahl stammt in der Regel aus dem letzten verfügbaren Jahresbericht.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Geschäftsmodelle zu vergleichen – insbesondere zwischen arbeitsintensiven und technologiegetriebenen Unternehmen. Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Automatisierung, Effizienz oder hohen Wertschöpfungsanteil hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Umsatz je Mitarbeiter spricht für ein skalierbares und margenstarkes Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf arbeitsintensive Prozesse oder geringere Wertschöpfung hinweisen.
- Besonders hilfreich beim Vergleich von Tech- vs. Industrieunternehmen.
Texas Instruments Aktie Analyse
Analystenmeinungen
45 Analysten haben eine Texas Instruments Prognose abgegeben:
Analystenmeinungen
45 Analysten haben eine Texas Instruments Prognose abgegeben:
Beta Texas Instruments Events
🇩🇪 Neu: Alle Transkripte jetzt auch auf Deutsch verfügbar!
Abonniere Premium, um Transkripte und KI-Zusammenfassungen auf Deutsch zu lesen.
Vergangene Events
|
MAI
28
Bernstein 42nd Annual Strategic Decisions Conference
vor etwa einem Monat
|
|
APR
22
Q1 2026 Earnings Call
vor 2 Monaten
|
|
APR
16
Shareholder/Analyst Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
vor 3 Monaten
|
|
MÄR
4
Morgan Stanley Technology
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
FEB
24
Special Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
FEB
4
Silicon Laboratories Inc., Texas Instruments Incorporated - M&A Call
vor 5 Monaten
|
|
JAN
27
Q4 2025 Earnings Call
vor 5 Monaten
|
|
DEZ
2
UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
vor 7 Monaten
|
|
OKT
21
Q3 2025 Earnings Call
vor 9 Monaten
|
|
SEP
10
Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
SEP
4
Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
JUL
22
Q2 2025 Earnings Call
vor 12 Monaten
|
aktien.guide Basis
Texas Instruments — Bernstein 42nd Annual Strategic Decisions Conference
1. Question Answer
Good morning, almost afternoon, everyone. Thanks for coming. I'm Stacy Rasgon. I'm Bernstein's senior research analyst covering U.S. semiconductors and semi capital equipment. And it's my honor to welcome our guest here today, Haviv Ilan, the President and CEO of Texas Instruments.
Before I start, I want to mention if you have questions you'd like to have asked during the presentation, you should have a link to the Pigeonhole form. I think there's a QR code that you can scan. You can submit your questions there. We'll have time for Q&A at the end.
So Texas Instruments, TI. It used to be that they were sort of the boring semiconductor company. They're kind of proud of it. I think it's been a little less boring lately, both for TI as well as for the space overall. But TI over the last 4 or 5 years has embarked on a program of significant capacity expansion that at least temporarily sidelined cash flow and return, and this is for a company who sort of pioneered the whole idea of 100% free cash flow return.
But they always do think long term. And we're now at kind of the tail end of that investment strategy. The cash flow now seems ready to start coming through again. And now with a manufacturing footprint that they'll be left with that potentially leaves them increasingly advantaged maybe in a world that is growing increasingly decoupled.
I think more tactically, the post-COVID overhang, and it was pretty long, seems to now be behind us. At a minimum, we've got an industrial rebound now that's driving upside. And now coupled with an AI environment that's gone mainstream and sort of dragging everything along with it, there's a data center story that maybe becoming more of a primary growth driver for the company, which complements the traditional focus on industrial and auto. So I wouldn't say things are all that boring anymore. And to tell us about it, it's my great pleasure to welcome Haviv. So thank you so much for being with us here today.
Thank you. Thank you, Stacy. Great to be here. Thanks for having us.
You bet. And maybe to start off, like just on that CapEx strategy because that really has sort of been the defining thing element of the company over the last like half -- I can't believe it's been half a decade already, but it really has been. You're at the end of this like 5-year CapEx and investment cycle.
Maybe just talk to us about how that's -- like what was the driver of it? What was the impetus? Like how has it gone versus your expectations? Where are we now? And what do we expect going forward in terms of CapEx and cash flow and return and margins and all? Like how is the company now, I guess, on the other side of it, different from where it was and where it was before we went in? And how does that advance?
Sure, sure. First, thanks for the introduction. You touched more or less the executive summary. So I appreciate that.
I'd like to make it driving...
Yes. In general, you're right, somewhere at the back end of 2020 and 2021, we got together and decided that we are going to set the company and prepare it for the next 10 and 15 years. This was not about the next cycle, but more of a longer-term thinking that secular growth in semiconductors will continue, especially, as you mentioned, in industrial and automotive. We also thought that it's -- we need to be ahead because one of the areas that we've learned during the previous cycle that when you fall behind and can't supply the parts or the sockets you've won, that's just not a good place to be.
That kind of did bite you a little bit during COVID.
Yes. And our customers deserve that we can support them in every scenario. And then you want to model a set of scenarios. And we said, "Hey, what could be secular growth in semis? Does it accelerate or not?" The answer was yes. The second is, do we only want to grow with the market? Or do we want to have an opportunity to gain some market share and also support our customers through the cycle, not only at the middle of the trend line, but also at the peaks? And of course, that's very, very important.
And along the investment plan, there was all these geopolitical tensions that continue to rise, and we said, hey, having manufacturing in North America, but in general, a geopolitical dependable footprint that is broad is going to be very, very important. So that's what kind of derived our plan. As you mentioned it, it was a 6-year plan between '21 and '26. Yes, it is '26. It feels again a long time ago. We are now in the last year of our investment cycle...
It feels like it went like that. So...
Some days are longer than others, but it does fly by, yes. So we are in the sixth year, and we went through a more than $20 billion investment cycle. And we always said we want to be positioned for every scenario. I mean a couple of years ago, as the cycle deepened or the down cycle deepened and lengthened to your point before, it looked like, hey, are we on the right path?
But we always had the conviction that we are. And I think right now, coming into 2026 after a year of growth in 2025, but maybe growing demand driven by industrial and data center, as you mentioned, we are very pleased to be where we are because we have the capacity. We have inventory that can support short-term demand from customers or surge of demand. And we also have the clean room or the footprint, especially from a brick-and-mortar and clean room footprint to grow into even faster growth scenarios.
So that's a very good position to be in because if you are falling behind in a situation like that, you have to wait 4 to 5 years if you haven't made the investments. So we are excited to where we are. I think, as you said, free cash flow should grow as CapEx goes down and demand goes up. And from here on, we should be more on a steady state of supporting our growth with investments as needed. So very happy to be in that phase of the investment cycle. Yes.
It might be helpful if you could outline for us exactly what capacity have you actually put in place over the last 6 years? And where does it sit? And I know there's Richardson and there's Lehi in there...
Yes. So from a footprint location, we made investments mainly in North America of 300-millimeter wafer fabs that are not common, by the way, for our analog and embedded market. We are building a very modern fab, fully automated and the scale of TI allows us to do it. So we've built what we call the Richardson 2, that's our Fab 2. It's now almost in full production, almost fully utilized.
We also decided to build a new site in Sherman, Texas, that's north of Dallas. And over there, we are planning a mega site, almost 4 fabs that altogether we will be able to support by -- per fab about $10 billion of revenue...
Each?
Each. And also, by the way, the cost to build one is also similar to that. So think about it at that rate. And we've built 2 of them. So 2 shellrooms are built. The first one is partially equipped that Sherman 1, went into production. We had our inauguration date in Q4 of last year, ramping up very nicely, but we have a lot of clean room available over there that gives us the analog growth that we will need through this cycle that we are hopefully experiencing now.
Lehi is really focused on 2 types of parts, mainly the embedded processing business, is served by the Lehi fab. That was an acquisition actually of a fab we bought from Micron.
That was the Crosspoint facility.
Correct. And what we decided to do not only to retool the fab into an embedded processing type of products, but also expand the site with the second fab, it's called Lehi 2, which is a much larger facility that can support even more revenue per the factory, maybe think about $15 billion of capacity over there. So altogether, the plan is going well. Remember that the Lehi fab was not only to support growth, but also to support internalization.
That was my question actually...
Building -- actually built at the foundries, mainly in Taiwan into the U.S., very, very important to us to control our destiny, and we will grow into our fab. So if embedded used to be maybe 10% or 15% built internally, it will reverse. So by the end of the decade, we see embedded running more than 90% internally.
Where is it like right now? Is it still 15%, 20% internal?
No. So right now, we are almost at 50-50 already because we are transferring our 65-nanometer embedded processing nodes into the factory. By the way, there is also some analog, high-speed analog mixed signal solutions that are built over there. But you can think about it as 2/3, 1/3 embedded versus analog. And that's already moving. Our next step is to move up 45-nanometer node. It is happening this year. So by the end of the year, embedded will be predominantly built inside our own factory.
Which 45 do you have and below in your -- I can't imagine it to be that high, but maybe it's higher than I think it is.
So 45-nanometer, we have a node that really for non-embedded flash technology. So think about external memories for embedded, think about radar systems. That's the main thing that runs on that. But we are going a couple of steps forward. So right now, we are already sampling our test chips for 28-nanometer embedded flash systems. So we have several flavors, one more mixed-signal analog-based and one more embedded processing embedded flash based.
Our future MCUs, especially the larger one that has more memory footprint will be built there. And we can take it one more step forward into 22 nanometer. That's more or less the plan of this fab. We are not planning to build a FinFET technology in Lehi. But that gives us, I would say, the excitement, at least 10 or 15 years of runway to support our businesses. And in that sense, very unique. The fact that we have invested in our own technology that allows us right now to respond to developing -- to the developing situations across our markets, whether it's industrial, data center and hopefully, automotive comes back soon as well. And we are feeling very comfortable about that.
Okay. You also closed some other fabs, right? That was also part of the internalization.
Yes. So we decided through this down cycle to shut our last 6-inch fabs. One of them was in Dallas, one of them was then same land in Sherman, different...
That's done, right?
That's done. So we are now in the last -- also from an overhead perspective, Q2 will be the last quarter of any expense related to these fabs. We are setting them down. And that's good to be because 6-inch fabs, they ran for 50, 60 years, by the way. Beautiful ROIC. But it's hard to maintain them. So when a tool goes down, it's really hard to fix it. So we took the opportunity to transfer all that goodness of long-lived parts into our 300-millimeter wafer fabs.
So how does all this translate into gross margins then? Because I mean, you used to -- clearly, when you first embarked on the 300-millimeter, that was probably 15 years ago, like with the RFAB 1 and [indiscernible] and everything. I mean you were running 4% of CapEx to revenue for 10 years or whatever. And I think gross margins peaked at 70%, close to 70%.
Yes.
And then we knew as you embarked on this investment cycle, gross margins were to come. And you never hit that. And they came down. I can't remember where they bottomed like mid- to upper 50s. They're kind of creeping up now. I think -- I know you don't guide to gross margin, but my math suggests the implied gross margin for next quarter is right around 60%, so at least maybe starting with a 6 handle.
And a lot of the things that you're talking about, like in theory, should be good for gross margins. We're through the depreciation slug. Revenue and utilization, hopefully, are going up. You've moved stuff in, so like the cost structure gets better. Like where do I see those going? Like can that actually get back to where we used to run like back in the old days or...?
Yes.
This is always the big question everybody always has for TI...
I understand. And we respect it. You know we run...
I know you don't run the company...
Yes, we'll get there. But let's answer your question because I think it's a fair one. First, about Q2, I think you said it. I think -- yes, it's a good assumption. The more you wait, the better it gets. And the reason is, Stacy, that -- and that's just a math of depreciation and growth and internalization of wafers. So I just invite you, if you want to see it in action, one way to do it, we now -- I think by segment, you can see the reporting of margin -- of gross margin by segment. Look at the Embedded segment. So you will...
You put operating margin by segment, not gross margin...
No, gross margins.
Do you put gross?
Yes, that's in the rules. So you go to the 10-Q, you'll see there...
Really, I didn't even know that.
Yes, you see. So you always learn something new. So you can look at it and see the progression of embedded because what you're seeing there are wafers that are coming into Lehi. The reason Lehi is now at 50% utilization is that transition, and it continues every quarter because now our 45-nanometer wafers are moving in. And you'll see gross margins right now getting closer again to 50% on embedded used to be much lower. And you'll continue to see that moving.
That's one example of how you move a foundry wafer into TI. That's going to be accretive to your gross margins. Same is going to be in Sherman because -- but over there, you have to grow revenue into that wafer capacity. And I think both are happening right now. So -- to your question, can it get back to the areas of before? And again, we don't think that way.
The answer is yes, but that's not going to be satisfying for TI. We care about free cash flow per share growth. So you can have very nice margin in the high 60s and your free cash flow per share can do less than double-digit growth as we've done in the previous decade. So our eye is how do we get back to that trend line of this about 10% CAGR of free cash flow per share. And that's how I talk to the Board.
That's our commitment. And as you said, we'll take a big step forward in 2026. Why? Because we are seeing some revenue growth, okay? We are seeing internalization of Lehi to your point. And we are starting to see the CapEx levels going down. So the math just works together. And as I said, the more you wait, the better it gets. So that's kind of the plan. I'm always cautious, and we had an encounter last year where we were at the same point of time a year ago.
And I want to see the demand continuing. But so far, the indications that the environment is a little different. This is a more broad environment of demand. I see it across regions. I see it across markets to your point. Let's see how it develops. Of course, when we go out there in July, we will report further on the progress over there.
Yes. Let's maybe talk about some of those demand drivers in some of those end markets. Maybe start with industrial. And so this historically was the biggest piece of your business. And this was probably the peakiest during COVID, given the shortages and everything and it fell off the most. And I can't remember how much you were down...
Almost 50% down from peak on a quarterly basis.
Almost 50%. So I guess where are we now? Where are you seeing regarding the industrial recovery? Which areas are stronger or weaker? And where are we sitting today versus that prior because now...
Yes, that's a great point because I look at it all the time...
And I know you've been waiting -- you always draw this chart of like growth versus trend, and you've been making the point we've been below trend for, I don't know, multiple years, right?
So the beautiful thing is that we are still below our peaks, okay? And we are talking about 4 years later. So let's go and recap what happened first in Q1. I think it's just good to set the stage. Industrial did grow sequentially 20%. So very strong growth of almost a comeback, right? Year-over-year, close to 35%, somewhere between 30% and 35%, but closer to 35%. But still Stacy, 15% below peak.
1-5?
1-5, okay. Now it's catching up very quickly. So as I indicated in the call, the reason we see an above average growth in Q2 sequentially is driven by industrial and data center, which is a different story.
I get to data center.
We'll get there. I'm sure. I appreciate the fact that you haven't started there. That's great. But the fact that industrial is coming back is very visible for us. And by the way, some of it in sectors that are data center related. If you think about energy infrastructure as a sector, a big sector for TI, I think data center helps us there.
Test and measurement is a sector that is getting helped by it. So these sectors are growing faster, but aerospace and defense is coming in a big way. And we are starting to see -- this is my biggest excitement, factory automation or industrial automation and robotics coming back. And that's an area where last year, it was waiting to come back, but I think then with all the anxiety about tariffs, I think our customers took a breather of making the CapEx decisions.
And I think they're moving now, okay? So we are seeing this beautiful situation of industrial growing very fast on top of secular growth in data center. And if I may add, automotive is still hovering at nice levels, closer to the peak, but has not grown back to where I think it should be. So overall, we think we are in a good setup.
You sounded a little squishy on auto, I think, on the earnings.
No, because in automotive, if I look at the progression in the last 3 years, peaked in 2023, automotive never dipped like industrial, kind of stayed hovering around the same level. And I think that's what happens with content growth. I mean there was inventory correction, but content growth continues to only keep it flattish. So not the industrial story. But I think that also continues to grow.
There is secular growth in automotive continuing. And when that happens, my confidence level will be higher. So you're right, automotive was growing about mid-single digits year-over-year in Q1, but very close to peak levels, which is a better story. Hopefully, that gives you a picture about industrial.
It does. To go back to industrial. So any thoughts on how much of the strength we might be seeing might be customer restock given lean inventories versus actual like sort of fundamental underlying demand? And I guess, would you be able to tell?
Yes. First, you're right. We are trying to be very humble about we don't have that information. We just have anecdotes, right? I will say that I believe because we are 4 years further away from the peak, and because we are still 15% lower than the peak, I think it's very early in the -- hopefully, the recovery phase. And typically, in the early phase, customers are not building inventory. Typically, that happens towards the end of the cycle or closer to the peak.
Now the customers are sounding -- and I did visits in Asia, did visits in Europe actually this month. And it does sound that customers need more parts to really support ramps. We have seen also -- I've seen anecdotally, this is where the only way I can tell with data that there is, yes, I appreciate your 6 weeks lead time, but I need it now, meaning customers are not carrying inventory.
But that's always for 1 or 2 parts. That's not across the board. This is not close to what we've seen in the COVID cycle. But there is more -- there are more cases where TI need to solve a problem...
A little more...
Yes, yes. There is -- my inbox was very quiet for 3 years. So it's coming back right now. Let's see how it plays out, Stacy. I think we've seen industrial also picking up in the first half of last year, then it took that a little bit of a breather. I want to see it one more quarter in. So far, so good.
In general, your lead times are -- do you effectively still have 100% available, 100% of your parts or pretty close to it?
Yes, I'm saying 100%, then I get a call from a customer, hey, but you owe me that part. But in general, yes, our lead times are stable. Most of our portfolio, by the way, the general purpose portfolio is 6 weeks lead time. The more application-specific that are more unique and have less diversity, we usually keep them at 12 or 18 weeks of lead time, depends on the part, but mostly 12 weeks.
The average lead time is at around 12 weeks, okay, across our revenue footprint. And that has been very stable. And for a good reason. We have built inventory. We have capacity. So we have -- and I expect it to stay for the foreseeable future that way. Again, demand, I don't forecast right now. But as long as demand continues to be strong even at that level, we should be fine.
The only area where we've seen a little bit more work to do on our side is on the assembly and test side. So over there, the mix is changing sometimes because of demand signals that are coming in order to solve problems, as we just mentioned. And this is where you never know the mix upfront on this...
It's just like there is so many different types of package...
Correct. So many SKUs. We have thousands of SKUs on the assembly and test, and it's different bonders, different lead frames that you have to take care of. So we are putting a little bit of adjustment on our -- how we allocate CapEx in 2026. it's really towards more the assembly and test side. We also see the OSATs, the outside assembly test houses that we are still using, more compressed. So we are actually accelerating the internalization of our manufacturing into TI. We have the clean room...
I can't remember what the target was for like -- front end, I think it was something like 90% internal. Back end, was it similar?
Similar, at 2030. What you can -- what I can comment about, it's probably going to happen quicker because we are seeing tightness externally. We just have to qualify more technologies internally, and that's what we are doing right as we speak right now.
Are you guys holding like more die bank now because of this?
We do. We do hold more die bank. Again, it gives you that flexibility of what does the customer want. It's also a more -- financially, it's more effective way to hold inventory.
Got it. Got it. Let's talk about data center. And so you report...
28 minutes or 23 minutes in. I'm proud. That's amazing. Yes. That's good. Usually, it's the first question so I appreciate it.
We got to build to it. So let's talk about it. So you're reporting it as a segment now...
Correct.
As an end market. And your old segmentation, you had this like enterprise systems, which I think was primarily like more traditional servers and things like that. And it looked like to me, you took some of it out of the -- what used to be in industrial and some out of what used to be comm, put it all together and that's data center. And it's growing, I think, last quarter, grew 90% year-over-year, something like that, right? I guess the first question -- and it was -- I can't remember 9% of your revenue last year, so relatively small still, but growing at a very rapid rate.
I guess maybe the first one is just what is in that segment? What are you serving? And how much of it would you classify as like actually like AI-driven versus more traditional data center? And by the way, maybe those 2 things are the same thing now, like I don't -- just given the way the market is going. But like see if we can peel the onion back a little for us on what's exactly in that segment now.
No, I think it's -- let me take a moment to just set up the data center market for our type of chips because you guys spend so much time on.
[indiscernible] zillion things. I'm assuming.
No. But you're -- exactly. But you guys know logic and memory, you know the story over there, and that's not our area. We make what I like to call foundational chips that are analog and embedded chips and there are many of them, okay? I think even at the street level, people like to talk about a few sockets, but there are so many of them, really thousands and sometimes we count on tens of thousands per rack, okay?
So very broad opportunity in the sense of product diversity. Customer diversity is more narrow, but the product diversity is very high. Now in our case, we decided, as you said, to define the end market as data center because it was too -- I mean first, it was very small at the beginning, I would say, go 5 years ago. When we made our plans, I did not envision data center running at now in Q1, 12% of our revenue...
12% in Q1. Okay.
In Q1, 12%. Last year it was 9%, exactly as you said. And the definition for us, it's -- whatever is inside the walls of the data center, some people call the white zone unlike the energy infrastructure that sits in the gray zone where the dust is, right? So we are inside the wall.
Okay. So if you got like stuff like a turbine that's in a [indiscernible], you wouldn't count that...
SSTs or some of the UPS system, they sit outside. So that's not in our number. That would be in industrial...
And also still growing?
It's still growing. Yes. That's one of the sectors in industrial that I mentioned before was energy infrastructure. But go back to the walls, now you talk about 3 sectors. And it's really -- if you think about the rack, Stacy, there is the compute trays, and this is why I don't say CPU traditional -- today, on a compute node, you can have a CPU and 2 accelerators, right? So to me, it's compute. And I'm not trying to break it between AI and non-AI.
To me, it's all compute. There is networking that is larger than you would think. I'll actually give some numbers in a minute. And then there is what we call rack power and cooling. And the rack power is the traditional PSUs. AC comes in, DC comes out, that's -- there is also a change over there, as you might know. But overall, the market, if I quantify it last year, I call it in our area, $7.5 billion, less than 10% of our TAM, okay? That's growing.
That's the market. That's now you're right...
That's the market. That's the market. We've done $1.5 billion, so at about 20% share...
It feels low, like just given all the.
$1.5 billion? We like 20% share...
No, no $7.5 billion.
That's the numbers we are -- we've done our math, and it's not very far away from what we've seen. I call it this year, and you can check some of the analysts out there that we came in at a very similar numbers. I think it's $12.5 billion this year. So the growth rate is 65% or so. That's high. TI in Q1, just to complete the point, grew 90% year-over-year. And the run rate is right now above $2 billion. So it's close to somewhere between $550 million and $600 million. So that's just to set the stage.
Now why do we want to talk about it? Because of the growth rates as more power is added to data centers and power density also grows and architectures are changing. There is a very important and I think unique growth opportunities for our type of chips, sitting around power, sitting around communication, clocking, sensing, cooling, protection, you name it. And we want to play there. Our play in data center is across the rack. I would say when as architectures change from 480 volts AC to 800 or plus/minus 400 DC, our play is going to be in the entire rack. And I would segment it to 3 sectors, as I said. So I think half of the TAM is more or less in the compute side, power and signal chain..
This is like the analog and other stuff on...
Feeding the power to the consumers on the board. If you think about the compute trays, okay? But not only power sockets. There's also a lot of signal chain clocking, et cetera. Then there is networking about 35% and the rest is data center power and cooling. So that's kind of a percentage of footprint...
Repeat those percentages for me so that.
So 50% will be compute, compute trays; 35%, we count our estimation for networking. And networking includes also optical networking, the optical modules, et cetera.
It's only 15% on the power side.
Power delivery, I'm talking about the AC to DC node, okay? There is power also close to the GPU. That's part of the compute node, okay? So that's the way we think about it. Think about it as the end equipment is the tray, okay? That's the way we think about what's the content. And the beautiful thing is it's very rich. There are so many sockets per board, power, signal chain, clocking, protection, sensing.
And we play in all of them, Stacy. So our growth even last year was in all these sockets that no one likes to talk about. It's like the broad portfolio that we have, and we serve it very, very well. I love these type of sockets. They don't generate a lot of attention. They are not attacked every other day. But we also want to play, and that was my comment in the last call on the more application-specific one.
Some people will call it -- I like to call it multiphase power. That's what feeds that. You have to take, I don't know, 2,000 amps into a GPU. You don't do it in one wire. This is a heavy socket with multiple voltage regulators that are delivered in different phases of time. That's -- some people call it the Stage 2, we'll play over there. And over time, as architecture is growing into, let's call it, 800 volts or is 400, we also want to play there because we do have a GaN technology that we've invested in.
And that's a great technical solution to convert energy, convert power call it, from 800 volts all the way to 12 or 6. You can do it very nicely with GaN solutions. So that's the opportunity for TI. We can grow into more application-specific sockets, very competitive sockets. You have to win at multiple customers, but we're going to play there.
Is it fair to say that like on the application-specific stuff, that is where you have to compete for the socket, but the other stuff, you really don't have to compete as much. Like I said, it's more -- I don't -- I'm probably simplifying, but catalog....
I think competition is tougher for the application-specific also because they are defined by the customer as multi -- usually, they will define the footprint. And if you want to serve the socket, you're not doing it alone. This is not only yours, right? So you have to compete with other players. Plus the revenue concentration, we talked about it last year. Revenue concentration of the socket is high. Every win or lose is a lot, okay? So obviously, there is more competition there. Now our supply footprint, the fact that we have such a broad portfolio serves very well the general purpose sockets. And they are maybe on average, $0.20 or $0.30 per socket, but they add up.
How do we think about content like per rack for you guys?
Yes. So we -- you can do all kind of math, but I will say it's in the tens of thousands of dollars per rack, okay?
Actual content or opportunity.
Opportunity. Our win rate last year or our share last year was 20%. Do we want to grow market share? We do. So look, I called the TAM at about 65% growth. So far, 1 quarter, we grew 90%. Can we keep it up at that clip? Or can we outgrow the market? We'll have to wait a year and see, but that's always our intention to outgrow the market.
I mean auto and industrial, clearly your biggest segments...
Correct. like 1/3, 1/3, and now we are talking about 12%.
Does data center become -- does it overtake the other ones at some point?
I don't know if it overtakes the other one, but I think it overtakes consumer or PE over time just because of the clip of growth rate. If you think about...
Where is PE now, 20%?
PE is now 20 -- low 20s, I would say, but it doesn't grow fast, Stacy. Again, you've probably talked with people who are saying there's going to be new personal electronics, I don't know, wearables or whatever. I have not seen that market develop yet, but that could also change. But right now, this market has been growing at the low single digits. So when you grow a market at the 60s, you can come -- it can become our third market -- third largest market very quickly, yes.
I mean maybe to touch on PE, just and I get it, it's not a driver, and it's not that big, but I'm a little worried about PE just into the back half on memory pricing and everything else. What are you seeing there?
No, I think that's also part of the reason I want to see one more quarter before I call the second half. To me...
I don't think you should call the second half. I think it's better...
Call the third quarter. I will give you a third quarter forecast, right? So I don't want to talk about it right now. But to me, our second quarter, I mentioned 8% sequential growth, nice year-over-year growth. Let's see it play out. But as I said, so far, we are on plan. If I had something to report, I would let you know.
To me, the PE is one of the question marks because I think memory is a constraint. I think they would want to build more end equipment, but they can't. So how -- and it's still 21%, 22% of our business. So that could change the number. So we want to see it play out.
Are there memory impacts on anything else besides PE?
I specifically have not seen it, but I know our customers are busy around that, and they have to really -- I heard it's supply limitations, also the costs are higher. But luckily, I guess, we don't build memory anymore and we are focused on our stuff.
Yes. That's right. How are costs in general trending for you guys? I mean we're clearly in another inflationary environment and you got other like -- I mean maybe if you're in-sourcing, you're a little more protected from foundry pricing but foundry pricing going up in memory and other things. And there's been -- I don't even know if it's a rumor. I mean you guys have been taking up price along with many of your other peers in this environment. I guess how do we think about -- maybe the right question is how do we think about your pricing actions, both in the wake of cost increasing as well as the potential to capture more value for yourselves?
No, I think you set it up correctly. There is -- we are experiencing inflation, especially when you think about energy in Asia. For example, we have all of our assembly and test -- cost of resin. So you think about what's coming inside the package and the fillers or the mold compound, that's all higher. Cost of metals are higher. So yes, that's part of what we are seeing. But pricing environment is better than last year.
So if you think about the COVID cycle where prices went up all the way into 2022, we have seen 3 years of our model coming through like '23, '24, '25, this low single-digit price effect, if you will, like-for-like didn't materialize in the last 3 years. But as I commented on the call, in the first half of this year, we expect pricing to be flat, which is good news for us because usually, when you start the year, prices are usually because of price negotiations does fall down a couple of percentage points.
So that is flattish. But yes, we have started discussion with our customers to talk about costs and what -- and the supply-demand situation. And I think the second half of the year, prices could be a little higher. And we will be a follower here, Stacy. We are not trying to set the market price, but we are watching the market environment. And right now, you're right, market prices are going higher.
I just find it interesting because I look at the equipment guys, like lagging edge equipment demand has not been great. I know we're seeing maybe a recovery now in some of the end demand for some of these, but the end demand in some of the trailing nodes stuff has not been great. And like usually, you see price increases when supply in these markets is really tight. I'm not exactly convinced that in some of the markets that you play the supply is like incredibly tight, and we have been seeing pricing coming. So is that just a function of like we saw during COVID, it is inflationary and you do have the ability to at least pass those costs along without the customers...
I think it's a fair question. But again, this is why we have to be cautious because it's only a couple of quarters in. But you're seeing what's happening in industrial, you've seen the data center market becoming strong. And I just came back from Taiwan. I was there last week, really focused on more data center customers and their supply chain, if you will, is heavily there. And I think we are starting to see areas of supply and demand mismatch even in our areas. So especially on the analog side, Stacy, we do see that.
So the discussion I had with customers last week was all about, hey, make sure you continue your lead times as they are, make sure that you can upside if we need to. And I always tell them we have parts. We have capacity, we have inventory, bring it on. But it's not -- I think we are a little bit different than average there. I have seen -- and you can see it also in lead times. Our lead times you asked before, are stable. It's out there that lead times have been increasing, especially on the analog side, sometimes to a year, okay?
So I think TI is uniquely positioned. And we are not surprised. I think we have been disciplined in adding capacity through the down cycles, we are unique there, okay? And it sets us up. We always said to every scenario, the scenario is still getting built as we speak. And you and I will watch it together. But I think if it wants to continue to be strong in the second half, we will be ready. If it wants to continue into '27, we'll be ready.
So that's where we are, and I love where we are because if you fall behind and we saw it in the previous cycle, and you said, okay, I want to chase it now. You count 4 years. From the minute you move there to substantial output from your fab, it's 4 years. So you're not talking about current cycle anymore. So in that sense, TI doesn't have that lead time issue, okay? We are very well prepared.
Got it. Talk to me about the SLAB deal. You guys sat out of M&A, while the industry was consolidating for a long time and I don't know what it was. It wasn't -- there wasn't a strategic fit. So the returns on the valuations weren't there and why now?
Yes. So first, you sat out in making a decision, but we don't sit out on making..
No, I understand you evaluated all. I get it...
We have a quarterly process, okay? So that's ongoing. And you've seen that. We've done a big one in the early 2000s. We've done a big one in the early 2010, yes. And we did another one. So on average, it's 10 to 15 years. So we are on the cadence, right? Now why this one? And that's, I think -- let me set up a little bit of embedded because it's an embedded-centric acquisition.
And this is where there is a change. I would say 10 years ago, we would not consider it because we are not sure about our embedded business. And we were very -- I mean, Rich was very open about it. We come from -- you look 10, 15 years ago, custom business, more than 50%, big logic DSPs, very digital, mainly built externally. That's the embedded business we are building today. So 5, 6, 7 years ago, we said, okay, let's retool our embedded business towards our competitive advantages.
Let's bring it in. Let's create a broad portfolio, meaning less big processors and more MCUs with some analog periphery, some application-specific MCU for power conversion, for motor drive, connectivity solutions, radar systems. These are the type which are also part of a DSP investment that we have. So these are the kind of investments we are making right now in embedded.
So number of parts we build every year is higher. We are going to build them all internally, and embedded is going to be more than 90% internal by the end of the decade. Now when you come into Si Labs, this is where we had an opportunity to give ourselves a step function in our portfolio because we have some connectivity parts, but they are mainly serving very well the automotive market. This is where we are winning and expanding.
Our industrial portfolio is slowly growing, and that's a onetime -- we saw a onetime chance to really increase our portfolio in a step function. If you think about our competitive advantages, Stacy, it's a beautiful -- there are 4 elements, but they bring in 2, we add 2. So we talk about manufacturing and technology and building it internally in our technology. We talk about the broad product portfolio. We talk about a very strong channel position or advantage, both ti.com, but also our very large, largest in the industry of sales team and the position of diversity and longevity.
What do they bring in? They bring in a broad portfolio, a broad industrial portfolio and a good position in terms of diversity and longevity. 90% of their business is industrial. You look at the revenue by socket, very, very broad. I think you can see it on our website. So they bring in 2 elements. You add to that the fact that you can bring inside our Lehi fab and build it internally and control your destiny in terms of technology and manufacturing.
And also the field and the ti.com that can really sell beyond that connectivity chip, they have a very narrow portfolio in that sense from a technology perspective. You get into the Excel sheet works, okay? So that doesn't happen every day. Many times we look stuff, it looks good strategically, but we can't make sense of the price. And look, if you ask me, would I do this deal today, it will be harder. Look at what happened to market prices of assets in the last 3 or 4 months.
So in that sense, I think the stars aligned, and we made the acquisition. Very pleased about it, very pleased with the progress towards completing the deal in the next, I would say, 3 to 4 quarters by the first half of next year. And I think it will be a great addition to our embedded business. So that's a story over there. You want to do this deal 10 years ago, you don't have Lehi, you don't have conviction that can be successful with our portfolio. Our confidence level is higher, and that's kind of the way we'll think about it moving forward.
Got it. So you wouldn't have had confidence in the business and you would...
[indiscernible] business...
You wouldn't have anywhere to put it even if you...
And the synergies will not come in because these guys are using mainly TSMC and...
How long will that take you to internalize their product? And how difficult is that...?
So luckily, we have been doing it ourselves many times, including right now as we speak on bringing stuff from the foundries into Lehi on our portfolio. But they've done a great job, and this is very rare in a company on an embedded field, very, very well organized platform operationally, very well invested. It's only somewhere between 10 and 15 different dies, which is...
Plus how many different products, you said?
2,000 products. So they have done a very good job on doing this platform approach that you can build 10 to 15 dies and then approach many, many products out there. So that would take not too long, okay? It will be mostly completed by the end of the decade. We will start...
End of the decade?
Yes, it's going to take 2 to 3 years. But we're going to start immediately after close. We are -- and that's the way we've modeled the synergies. Now internally, I want the team always to move faster. But as you saw the $450 million of synergies that we described, they are mainly supported through the COGS, and it's almost fully in by the end of the decade.
Got it. So that also means that it's harder to buy somebody that sells 10,000 different products...
There you go. There you go. And most companies, especially on the embedded side, the breadth of the portfolio is so high. It's hard to do. It's hard to do. It's hard to bring in the synergies when you buy a fabless company. Now in the case of National, they have their own fabs. So it's a different story. But this is why these things are not trivial. They're not easy to do. That's why you see us doing it rarely. But I can tell you, nothing has changed on the strategy. We'll continue to look at assets. And I think this one was a unique one.
Got it. Talk to me about China. So clearly, you guys have made a bet on the U.S., and I get it. And I understand the whole concept of geographically, geopolitically attractive capacity. At the same time, I know it's an investment controversy. I don't know how real it is, but it's an investment controversy about your position in China. And I was joking, Texas Instruments has Texas right in the name. And most players in China, there has to be some sort of a China for China strategy, whether it's working with local partners or making it directly in the region or whatever. How do we think about TI's competitiveness over time in China relative to some of the local players given the trends that we're seeing on the geopolitical spectrum right now?
Yes. Let me break it. Thanks. I think it's an important topic. Let me break it down to 2 parts. The first one you mentioned is kind of we bet on the U.S. maybe on manufacturing or new manufacturing footprint, not on the market only. The market-wise, we are a global company, okay? So -- and the fact that we are investing in the U.S., it doesn't mean that we don't know how to solve China from China.
We have a factory in China. We have a fab. We are still -- we have a big assembly and test house. So we can support China manufacturing-wise. I think the challenge in China is actually how do you compete in the market. And especially when you are not a Chinese supplier, I think that's more interesting. And first, we want to play there. Why? China is, what, 20% of world GDP, more or less...
Most of your revenue, I guess, by headquarters...
Our revenue by headquarter is in last year was about 20%, okay. More importantly, China has some very important customers, let's take automotive that are technology leaders. You even go into data centers, optical links. China is a big player there in terms of headquarters company. And we also see areas in industrial where China robotics, for example, China is a big player. So you don't want to exclude yourself from China. You want to compete. It is harder. It is harder because of what you said.
There is a growing industry of a very hungry supplier base that is always expanding. I have my own China index. I review with my team every quarter a set of 25 competitors, 25 that together add up to about half of TI, but they are doing well. I mean they are competing, but TI can compete. And the reason we can compete is that we have some competitive advantages that are very, very important to our China customers.
The portfolio. The portfolio is very attractive. If I want to solve a problem on the board, do I bring in 25 suppliers? Some of them are start-up companies that are just trying to breathe versus an established player like TI that has good solution.
Now the portfolio is not enough. Cost competitiveness is key. But can TI play that game? Yes, we are vertically integrated. As much as the foundries in China are serving these local competitors, they still don't work for free.
And they also -- if you look at the utilization rates over there, they're also not -- they're not underutilized, let's say that. So we can compete by supply and also cost structure. A very strong channel or sales team that is entrenched over there and built relationship with customers for years. And a customer base, Stacy, I mentioned data center, but that's not the only case that is continuously wanting to diversify their markets, wanting to go into non-China markets.
It's actually where they make most of their profit. So that game has played well for TI. And the reason I say played well, just go to 2025. We report our China business. We grew close to 25%. The index I just mentioned grew slower, okay? And we are watching this every quarter. Q1 is now being reported. We are holding our share, okay? So you can argue that last year, we gained share in China in an impossible environment. This year, I think our odds are even better because of the supply-demand mismatch, usually, everything starts in China. That's not an outlier this year.
So over there, our capacity, our footprint, our cost competitiveness and our broad portfolio and channel advantages are playing on. And the risk I have about China, don't fall asleep. Don't be complacent. Don't say these guys are commodity players. We expect them, but also don't be scared to fight the fight. So we take the fight to Shenzhen, to Shanghai. Our customers over there appreciate us. And by the way, every time there is a tie, we lose a socket. So we always have to be a little bit better than the local competition. Hopefully, that covers China.
No, that does. That does. Two minutes left in the lightning round.
Whatever it means, I don't know.
We got a few audience questions. Robotics, humanoid or general drones or autonomous vehicles is a driver of growth for you going forward. When do you expect it to show up meaningfully in the top line?
I'll tell you, look, humanoid content is astonishingly high for TI, not only the TAM. So we are talking about content for TI higher than a car, higher than automotive. Think about $1,000 per humanoid. That's the content that -- now you tell me the number of humanoids that are going to be built. It depends who you listen to. But I think we are starting to see it, and I'm excited about it. I don't think it's as soon as people say, but I can see why humanoids like robotics will be one day walking around our factories, especially assembly and test and providing value. So I'm excited about that, yes.
Got it. We've got 1 minute left. So I'm going to finish this up the way I always do with everybody. We've got a whole room -- full room of folks here. Why should they buy TI stock?
Yes. So again, I think part of your introduction helped me. But Stacy, as you discussed, we have been preparing for an opportunity for a long time. It's been a long journey. I even kind of wake myself up why it's been 6 years, but we have done the hard work for being prepared.
Now tell me what the scenario will be. I think we are seeing more and more evidence that this is going to be a good time to be in semis. There is a secular growth in the data center market that is really not negligible anymore. TI is in a great position. There is industrial coming back in a nice way. And I think automotive is around the corner. So you put all these 3 together, you can envision a very strong demand environment. We are well positioned to support it. We have the inventory. We have the capacity. We can grow into it, allowing hopefully share gains for the company. So thank you, Stacy. I appreciate being here, and thanks for the time.
I appreciate having you here. Thank you so much.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Bernstein 42nd Annual Strategic Decisions Conference
Texas Instruments — Bernstein 42nd Annual Strategic Decisions Conference
TI sieht das Ende eines >$20 Mrd. Ausbauzyklus, baut eigene 300‑mm‑Fabs aus, setzt auf Datenzentrum und industrielle Erholung für freies Cashflow‑Wachstum.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
TI ist laut CEO am Ende eines sechsjährigen, mehr als 20 Mrd. Dollar teuren Investitionszyklus; das Management erwartet, dass sinkende CapEx, steigende Auslastung und verstärkte Internaliserung der Fertigung (Lehi, Richardson, Sherman) den freien Cashflow pro Aktie wieder spürbar antreiben.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- 300‑mm‑Fabs: Neue, vorwiegend nordamerikanische Fertigung (Richardson2, Sherman‑Mega‑Site) für höhere Versorgungssicherheit und Skalenvorteile.
- Internalisierung: Lehi bereits ~50% intern für Embedded; Ziel >90% Embedded‑Fertigung intern bis Ende Dekade; 28nm/45nm Sampling geplant.
- M&A‑Schritt: Übernahme von Silicon‑Labs‑ähnlichem Ziel (SLAB) zur Stärken des Embedded‑Connectivity‑Portfolios; Synergien ~450 Mio. USD bis Ende Dekade.
🔎 Neue Informationen
- Data Center: Als eigenes Endmarkt‑Segment: Q1 ~12% des Umsatzes, +90% YoY, Run‑Rate >$2 Mrd.; TI schätzt Markt schnell wachsend.
- Margen/Timing: Management signalisiert implizite Bruttomargen‑Verbesserung (Q2‑Implied ~60%) und Preisumfeld H1 flach, H2 potenziell leicht positiv.
- Fertigungsstatus: Sherman und Lehi rampen; Abschaltung alter 6‑inch Fabs abgeschlossen, letzte Aufwände Q2.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Industrie‑Erholung: Debate über Restocking versus nachhaltige Endnachfrage; Management sieht frühe, breite Erholung, aber will weitere Quartale beobachten.
- Margen & Cashflow: Rückkehr zu früheren Bruttomargen möglich, Fokus liegt aber auf freiem Cashflow pro Aktie (~10% CAGR Ziel) statt reiner Margenkennzahlen.
- Produkträume & Engpässe: Assembly & Test als kurzfristige Engpassquelle; verstärkte Internaliserung der Backend‑Fertigung geplant.
⚡ Bottom Line
TI positioniert sich als weniger zyklischer, stärker manufakturintern aufgestellter Analog/Embedded‑Player: sinkendes CapEx plus wachsende Auslastung und ein sich schnell entwickelndes Data‑Center‑Segment könnten Free‑Cashflow und Aktienrendite stützen. Risiken bleiben: Nachfragepersistenz, Backend‑Engpässe, intensiver Wettbewerb in China und Integrationsrisiken der Akquisition.
Texas Instruments — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Welcome to the Texas Instruments First Quarter 2026 Earnings Conference Call. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined by our Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan, and our Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi. For any of you who missed the release, you can find it on our website at ti.com/ir.
This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website. This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in the earnings release published today as well as TI's most recent SEC filings for a more complete description.
Today, we'll provide the following updates. First, Haviv will start with a quick overview of the quarter. Next, he will provide insight into first quarter revenue results with some details on what we're seeing with respect to our end markets. Lastly, Rafael will cover the financial results, give an update on capital management as well as share the guidance for second quarter of 2026.
With that, let me turn it over to Haviv.
Thanks, Mike. Before I go into the results, I want to highlight that in the first quarter, we announced an agreement for TI to acquire Silicon Labs. This transaction enhances our global leadership in embedded wireless connectivity, expands TI's portfolio and leverages TI's internally owned technology and manufacturing and reach of market channels. We expect the transaction to close in the first half of 2027, subject to necessary approvals.
Now let me provide a quick overview of the first quarter. Revenue was $4.8 billion, an increase of 9% sequentially and an increase of 19% year-over-year. Analog and Embedded, both grew sequentially and year-on-year. Analog revenue grew 22% year-on-year and Embedded Processing grew 12%. Our Other segment declined 16% from the year ago quarter.
Let me provide a few comments about the current market environment. In the first quarter, revenue came in above the top of the range as we saw continued acceleration in industrial and data center. The overall semiconductor market recovery is continuing, and we remain well positioned with inventory and capacity that allows us to support our customers with competitive lead times through the cycle.
Now I'll share some additional insights into first quarter revenue by end market. First, industrial increased more than 30% year-on-year and was up more than 20% sequentially, growing broadly across all sectors and regions. Automotive increased mid-single digits year-on-year and was about flat sequentially. Data center grew about 90% year-on-year and grew more than 25% sequentially. Personal Electronics was flat year-on-year and grew low single digits sequentially. And lastly, communications equipment grew about 25% year-on-year and grew more than 30% sequentially.
With that, let me turn it over to Rafael to review profitability and capital management.
Thanks, Haviv, and good afternoon, everyone. As Avid mentioned, first quarter revenue was $4.8 billion. Gross profit in the quarter was $2.8 billion or 58% of revenue. Sequentially, gross profit margin increased 210 basis points. Operating expenses in the quarter were [ $974 million ], about as expected. On a trailing 12-month basis, operating expenses were $3.9 billion or 21% of revenue. Operating profit was $1.8 billion in the quarter or 37% of revenue and was up 37% from the year ago quarter. Net income in the quarter was $1.5 billion or $1.68 per share. Earnings per share included a $0.05 benefit for items not in our original guidance, primarily due to discrete tax benefits.
Let me now comment on our capital management results, starting with our cash generation. Cash flow from operation was $1.5 billion in the quarter and $7.8 billion on a trailing 12-month basis. Capital expenditures were $676 million in the quarter and $4.1 billion over the last 12 months. Free cash flow on a trailing 12-month basis was $4.4 billion, up from $1.7 billion in the first quarter of 2025, trending up as growth returns and CapEx begins to moderate.
Free cash flow in the trailing 12 months includes $965 million of CHIPS Act incentives. This includes a $555 million payment received in the first quarter as part of our direct funding agreement, related to the start of production at our newest 300-millimeter wafer fab in Sherman, Texas. In the quarter, we paid $1.3 billion in dividends and repurchased $158 million of our stock. In total, we returned $6 billion to our owners in the past 12 months. Our balance sheet remains strong with $5.1 billion of cash and short-term investments at the end of the first quarter.
Total debt outstanding is $14 billion with a weighted average coupon of 4%. Inventory at the end of the quarter was $4.7 billion, down $109 million from the prior quarter, and these were 209, down 13 days sequentially.
Turning to our outlook for the second quarter. We expect TI's revenue in the range of $5 billion to $5.4 billion and earnings per share to be in the range of $1.77 to $2.05. We expect our effective tax rate to be about 13% in the second quarter. In closing, we will stay focused in the areas that add value in the long term. We continue to invest in our competitive advantages, which are manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, reach of our channels and diverse and long-lived positions. We will continue to strengthen these advantages through disciplined capital allocation and by focusing on the best opportunities, which we believe will enable us to continue to deliver free cash flow per share growth over the long term.
With that, let me turn it back to Mike.
Operator, you can now open the line for questions. In order to provide as many of you as possible an opportunity to ask your questions, please limit yourself to a single question. After our response, we'll provide you an opportunity for an additional follow-up. Operator?
[Operator Instructions]. Our first question is from Tim Arcuri with UBS.
2. Question Answer
I wonder if you can comment just on the behavior of customers. I know you're guiding up a little better than seasonal off of a number in March that was very strong. So it sounds like it's mostly industrial, but can you comment kind of on -- I know we're seeing signs of price increases and things like that. So is this impacting the customers' behavior?
Yes. Thanks, Dave. In general, I think Q1 was a continuation of what we saw in Q4, very similar behavior, meaning growth coming from 2 main areas, led by industrial, as you mentioned. And also supported by the data center market that we've seen a secular growth over there for the last couple of years. This was the eighth quarter of sequential growth. off of a higher number. So that also helps the overall growth of the company. I will say that the industrial signal was a little bit broader this time.
So I would say all sectors, all geographies grew sequentially. And it continued to accelerate through the quarter. So if you think about January, February, and then you always want to see how the exit from the Lunar or the Chinese New Year break is going to look like, but it continued in March. So just a continuation, I would say it's now 5 or 6 months of continued growth in industrial. We want to keep watching it, but I would say that what guides our forecast into the second quarter.
Mike, anything to add on that?
Yes, I think I just want to be mindful to just the overall macro backdrop and want to see how sustainable the growth is, and that was factored into the guide.
Tim, do you have a follow-up?
I do. Yes, Mike, maybe you can comment on -- I know typically you don't break the guidance down by segment, but just given how different it was in March. And given that we're hearing some choppiness in autos, particularly in China, I mean I would think that most of the sequential growth will be in industrial. But can you give any comments for what is being thought of the mid-June guidance for those two.
Let me take that, Tim. I think I can help you a little on the automotive side. But first, I think, as you said, we are not seeing a change from the previous quarter. So I expect growth to be led by industrial and data center. I won't break it out between the 2, but we see strength in both. Regarding automotive, you're right that Q1 was -- it's always the same in Q1 in China. China was -- the overall quarter was flat sequentially. But China was down. The rest of the world was up. I want to see automotive and see how it develops in Q2. It's too soon to call it.
I will remind us though that during the COVID cycle even automotive was last to join in and also the last 2 peaks, right? So I'm not surprised by the behavior of this market. I will say that secular growth in automotive continues for the foreseeable future. And that's what -- that is my encouragement. We are seeing cars adding features. We are seeing more content added to vehicles across the powertrains whether it's BEV or I or the hybrids.
Anything to add on that, Mike, in terms of the guide?
No, I think you characterized it well. And as you know, auto has been steady at an elevated level for some time. It didn't really have that steep correction that we saw in the other end markets. So I think as you called it out, these markets have been in the past have been transitioning out of phase, I don't think it's unrealistic to assume that could happen again. So we'll have to see how it plays out.
Yes. I think it's an important point as Mike said, Q1 was kind of a flat quarter, but very close to peak levels, maybe a point or 2 below its peak. So it's holding very nicely at a high level.
All right, we'll move on to our next caller.
Our next question is from Vivek Arya with Bank of America.
I mean, on this industrial growth up 30%. I think you said year-on-year, this is obviously well above the long-term trend line. Could you help us dissect which applications, which end markets are driving this? Is this -- is it still inventory replenishment? Is this pricing? Is it share gains? Just what kind of checks and balances do you have in place that this isn't any kind of double ordering or hoarding of your product?
No, I don't see that. At least I don't have the evidence to show that, Vivek. But remember, industrial, you said, yes, for 1 quarter, that's a lot of growth. But if you look at the long-term trend line, we are still below the trend line. If I just did the math. In Q1, our industrial, we had a very good quarter in Industrial, growing at the rates that you've mentioned, but still 15% lower than the peak that was back in 2022.
And as I say many times, there is a secular growth continuing in industrial. So we deserve a higher peak, right, 4 years later. So I think there is a lot of room to grow. The encouragement I would have on industrial this time is that I see it at a broader application. So all of them, not only the data center related, the energy infrastructure or power delivery, not only aerospace and defense, we know the geopolitical tensions in the market is establishing new peaks every quarter. I saw it across all sectors in industrial and also across all customers in terms of regions, but also the size of customers. It's the first quarter where we saw the broad market, as we call it, the tail starting to wake up again after a long hibernation period, I would call it.
So I am encouraged about the fact that we are seeing growth over there, but I think there is -- I mean I would like to see a secular growth in industrial continuing and then higher peaks establishing in 2026 or later versus the 2022 peak. So in that sense, trend line are suggesting we still have room to go. Hopefully, that helps.
Do you have a follow up, Vivek?
Yes. So last year, we saw the overall Analog industry do very well in the first half, and then there were some level of deceleration in the second half. I realize every year is different. And I know you're not guiding to the second half, but from what you see today, what are the puts and takes as you look at the second half versus the first half? Is there anything that could be different just given right all the macro trends, memory price inflation and whatnot. And as part of that, if Rafael could also help chime in with how you're managing fab loadings as you look towards the rest of the year.
Yes. Let me start, and Rafael will follow. So first, Vivek, you spot on, right? We had a similar, let's say, strong beginning of the year, last year, maybe the year-over-year growth last year was a little lower, but it was still in the teens, and it looks like it was getting stronger. But it was, whatever you want to call it, a head-fake fall start or whatever. We had a good year in Analog, but it did not accelerate in second half, it actually slowed down a little bit, right? So I think we need to be cautious. I think Mike mentioned it. There is geopolitics. There is a macro that we are watching.
On the other hand, there is secular growth in our market. So in the long term, I'm still very optimistic. We want to play it quarter-by-quarter. That's part of the way we have guided $5.2 billion in the midpoint. Let's 2Q play out, and we'll call it as we see it. I remind you that the way we support our customers with the way we go to market, we go -- we serve our customers direct. We have very friendly customer terms.
So we see the buildup of demand as we go almost through time. And I want to see -- let 2Q play out and see if this growth is sustainable. That's the biggest question I have for myself for the second half. But at least the fact that industrial is still trending below previous peaks and the secular growth in data center and of course, the content growth in automotive makes me feel optimistic about the long-term. Rafael, can you comment about loading?
Yes. I just said that we have the capacity and the inventory that we're well positioned on both of those to handle a wide range of scenarios in this upturn.
Our next question is Joe Moore with Morgan Stanley.
On the topic of fab loading, can you talk about what's going to happen with inventory over the course of Q2? Are you seeing incremental gross margin off of Q1 that are sort of better than normal, worse the normal, just normal? Just what are the dynamics around that transition?
Yes. Again, we're well positioned on inventory. The objective of inventories to customer service, keep lead times short and stable and we are accomplishing that. So we feel very good as to where those are, and we'll continue to determine what makes sense from a loading and inventory standpoint throughout the quarter to handle any range of scenarios.
And Joe, just to add on that, you and I talked a month ago, we saw a rapid growth in Q1, and inventory served us well, right? We've depleted some of it -- we've served our customers real time according to their demand. And we just don't want to see how sustainable that would be. But as Rafael said, if the market wants to have a very rapid growth and maybe catch up to trend line even quicker, we are well positioned. Of course, we are in this Phase 3 on the fabs, and we can modulate more start the -- we have the capacity.
We may make some incremental investments on the ATs because we are seeing on the assembly and test side, a little bit of a tighter environment, at least externally. So as you know, we've brought most of our supply internally, and we have that not as well. We are very excited about the fact that we are prepared. If the market wants to grow at the same rate of Q1, we mentioned 19% year-over-year, we are ready. If it wants to accelerate, we are already as well.
All right. Joe, you have a follow-up?
Well, just on the -- just my question was also on the gross margin aspect. Do you -- is the incremental gross margin going to look normal? Or is there some part of inventory management that makes it less or more?
Yes. No, the fall-through that you should expect is in the 75% to 85% that we have guided, that's excluding depreciation over a long term. But on a year-on-year basis, if you look at our midpoint on EPS and revenue and make the right assumptions on OpEx and other lines, you should get to a good a reasonable assumption on gross margins, and it's -- and it will be in that fault that we have guided.
Our next question is from Stacy Rasgon with Bernstein Research.
Maybe just to dig into that gross margin point, if I sort of -- I mean, I typically think of your OpEx is up at a couple of points in Q2. I come up with a gross margin implicit in the guidance, maybe low to mid 59%, up from 58% and it's up, I don't know, 100 or 150 bps year-over-year on a pretty material revenue growth. Like part of you would almost expect it the incremental gross margin to be higher given the revenue growth. But maybe is the differential just like the increase in depreciation? Or like how should I be thinking about the different drivers of gross margin in the Q2 -- not quantitatively, if you don't want to give us a quantitative.
Yes. So Stacy, to help you out a little bit, your OpEx assumption was not a bad one. So you should expect some growth in OpEx first to second. Maybe what you're missing is the acquisition charges line, you should expect to continue to have charges there every quarter at the tune of what we just reported in first quarter. We should continue -- we'll continue having those there every quarter until we close, at which time, there'll be a lot higher at close and then they'll be steady after that for a number of years.
But for now, for second quarter, just assume somewhere in the range of what we just reported on the acquisition line. When you do that, you'll get a gross margin assumption that should make sense.
All right, do you have a follow up?
I do think -- maybe to ask about the acquisition itself, not the deals, but I know you've talked about it being accretive. You guys are like one of the few, if not maybe the only company in my coverage, certainly that still does a pure GAAP earnings. And I even remember when you bought NAT Semi, you did pro forma for a little while and kind of said this is stupid. We're going back to GAAP. You guys make whatever adjustments you want to make. What are your intentions for how you're going to report once you do close a slab because I have a hard time getting it accretive on a GAAP basis. Are you going to be going to a pro forma? Or how should we be thinking about that?
Thinking right now is we will do GAAP, but we'll give you all the pieces that you need to do your own non-GAAP in whichever way you want to do that. So we'll have the acquisition charges line, for example, you can take that out, if you like, and not count it. Once we're on a run rate basis, all those will be noncash. But initially, there are actually -- some of those are cash charges, right? The charges to cost to the bankers, the lawyers, the regulatory fees, et cetera. There'll be other things like the first quarter will have some weird transitions in gross margins and inventory as we write up the inventory that we're buying. So we'll give you all those pieces that way you can do the non-GAAP analysis result.
Our next question is from Ross Seymore with Deutsche Bank.
I guess the first one is, given the strength that you saw, I guess, what was the biggest surprise versus the midpoint of your guide in the first quarter? And was pricing part of the strength in either the quarter or the guide?
Yes. Let me start maybe with pricing, then we can chat a little bit more about what happened in the quarter. I think we answered it, but I'll repeat the same messages. The of pricing, I think we said in the last quarter, we don't expect pricing to help the growth, at least not sequential or year-over-year, and that was the case. But it was better than our model. Like usually, Q1 pricing is a couple of points down, call it, the low single digits down year-over-year and also sequentially because usually, the price agreement, they kick in, in the beginning of the year.
So the quarter behaved a little better. We had -- pricing was stable, flat, if you will, like-for-like, both sequentially, Q4 to Q1, and also year-on-year, 1Q '26 versus 1Q '25. So that helped a little bit. And I expect Q2 to be very similar, Ross. Just the way we work with our customers, these are discussions that are not happening immediately. We serve them direct. And I will mention that as I look at the year, if demand. And right now, the demand signals are strong. If demand continues to be strong. And we are monitoring the market price, and there is definitely at least an average price increase in the last several months across the Analog market. I think it's likely that prices may go up in the second half of the year. Again, this is going to be a case-by-case discussion in our case, but that's a pricing environment as I see it right now. And again, it's always a function of supply and demand and the unknown for me right now is the sustainability of demand. So I want to see it playing out one more quarter, and then we'll figure out for the second half.
So high level, not immediate support on growth, both sequentially and year-over-year on pricing. Now what we have seen is just breadth of demand, right, what I said before, multiple sectors or all sectors, all regions, all type of customers, small, large -- and supported by a data center market where we do pretty well. I think our portfolio is growing. I believe we are fulfilling customer demand at the highest level we have no shortages.
And it allows us, I believe, to over time, at least take market share over there. So that's, I think, what drove Q1, I expect a similar behavior in Q2 and the second half of the year is still unknown. We are seeing as I mentioned before, a higher tension on the Analog side. I think we see strength over there. And I think we are unique in the setup in the sense that we have the capacity we have in inventory and we are well positioned to support customers at the highest level.
Do you have a follow-up, Ross?
Yes, I do. One of the concerns people have, and it doesn't sound like in the strong reporting guide that you guys are seeing it, but one of the concerns people had was more consumer-oriented and marketing demand destruction with higher memory costs, memory availability, those sorts of things. Are you seeing any evidence of that? Your personal electronics segment seemed like better than normal seasonal in the first quarter. I suspect that's where it would arise if it were to arise. And so I just wondered if you guys have seen any evidence of that across your business.
High level, we have not, although customers are very aware of it, but I think they are doing well preparing themselves. And I'll let Mike comment about the personal electronics market.
Yes. I think it's also important to remember that fourth quarter last year was a pretty easy compare for the sequential transition for PE. And on a year-on-year it's about flat. So again, if that was happening, I don't know if you could point to those results as evidence of that. But again, you can't rule that out, actually, I think moving on to our next caller. Thank you, Ross.
Our next question is from Tore Svanberg with Stifel.
Congrats on the strong results. Haviv, I was hoping to zoom in on data center and specifically power. It's a great market, great opportunity. It's also very competitive. And I'm just wondering if you could talk a little bit more about some of the moats here as we go into the next few years that TI has I do assume your manufacturing footprint will be an important element of that. But any other color you could add on TI's positioning in power semis, especially with data center in the next 2 years?
Yes. Tore, I think, look, power in general is very important to data centers, as we know, and specifity power density. And we talk about both the just Think about the amount of power or the energy to drive into these systems, you need a lot of silicon to withstand it, right? So that implies on the importance of power electronics and TI is well positioned.
What I like about our position is this combination. And that's, by the way, it's true for every market. But in data center, I think there is a lot of attention to the -- what I call application-specific sockets, you can call it Stage 1, Stage 2, the VRN, the last -- the Vcore that these GPUs they need power delivery at the highest level, very complex parts, multiphase power delivery, et cetera. And there is also a lot -- a lot of general purpose parts in Iraq.
I would say, tens of thousands of them, lots of different SKUs. And this is where our general purpose portfolio is amazing. We can fulfill, I would say, almost every Analog socket on these racks. And I think we are very unique in that point, not only because of the breadth of the portfolio also because of our ability to supply. I think we have seen cases where our customers did help because they had supply shortages from their other suppliers and we come in and solve the problem. I think that's part of the reason our growth has been so high. I mentioned 90% year-over-year. And I'm very excited about the future there. So that combination of a broad portfolio and the ability to support customers with capacity and inventory is unique.
The second point, which I think I've touched upon in many calls or conferences. We are also investing more and more R&D in data center, and we are going to be one of the competitors on the application-specific socket whether it's VRM in Stage 2, whether it's high voltage, 800 to 12 or 6 at Stage 1 and we are well positioned there as well, both with the GaN technologies that we've invested in, in the past 15 years. but also on our very advanced BCD nodes that not only has the capacity needed, but also it's built in North America here in Texas and customers care a lot about it.
So I think that combination of broad portfolio, both on general purpose and ASSPs, ability to support the rec, not only the Board and ability to supply at scale with the tonnage, if you will, or the volume that this market demand is very, very unique. Not to mention that it's come from a geopolitically dependable location. So all of that is a unique combination. And that's part of what we like to talk about our competitive advantages. Maybe 1 of them is easy to replicate, but trying to replicate all in this case, all 3 is not easy. And this is why I'm very encouraged about our opportunity to continue to grow in this market. I will just add that our application-specific sockets are seeing momentum as well on the design-in phase right now. And I do expect that they'll kick in more in the second half of the year and into 2027, so my bar for the team and my expectations are high here.
Thanks, Tore, do you have a follow-up?
Yes, that's great color. And then as my follow-up. Just thinking about, obviously, now we're in another new up cycle in Analog. And just comparing this to the last one. I mean the last one, capacity got tight pretty quickly. Leak started extending pretty quickly. I know it's a different cycle, right? But I'm just curious now that you've made all the CapEx investments you've got the big manufacturing footprint. Are you starting to see share gains sort of pop up in your design wins since you are much better positioned with capacity now versus back then?
I believe we are, yes. And we have gained share, of course, in Analog in 2025, but I think we have a lot of room to go. We are still below previous peaks. And -- to me, the question, Tore, is can we do it quickly, meaning the demand -- or does the strong demand continue or it's going to take us more time.
From our perspective, we hope the demand -- we have the answer to customers. And in many cases, we are unique. I gave a minute ago the data center example, but we are starting to see other areas where our supply, our availability is allowing us to win back market share. So I mentioned pricing before. We are -- our pricing is very competitive. I think we have an opportunity there as well for the second half of the year. So it all depends on the sustainability of demand. I think Vivek mentioned before, we had a very unique 2025 where it started stronger and then it took a breather. I want to see it playing out Obviously, if it continues, our opportunity just grows.
Maybe I'll just add that we spent the last several years preparing with capacity and inventory, as you know, and our lead times have been stable over the last several years and especially the last several months, really happy with the delivery performance. And so as we look at what the future holds here, I want to make sure we can service our customers need also their growth as well across a broad customer base. And then we're really happy with the systems we have in place to allow that.
Our next question is from Matthew Prisco with Cantor Fitzgerald.
So you previously talked about spending about $2 billion to $3 billion CapEx in 2026. First, is that still the right number? And as we think about the modular build outs within its ongoing recovery, can you maybe help walk us through when you would need to start to add the incremental equipment? And how you're thinking of strategically about your capacity today as we're starting to see some foundry capacity custom mature nodes and now Tier 2 foundry pricing increases?
Yes, I'll start. First, the answer to your question is yes. We're looking at $2 billion to $3 billion of CapEx for this year. And in that number, there are -- there's capacity for what we call Phase III, which is incremental capacity that maybe you're alluding to. That's both for the -- in the fab side, but also in the assembly test side. And that is where a growing proportion of our CapEx is going to in the assembly test side to address growth.
Beyond that, what I would tell you for CapEx beyond '26 is think of the 1.2x rate that we have talked about before for the long-term needs of the long-term CapEx intensity. So for example, if you -- to make a number easy, 5% growth, would translate into 6% CapEx as a percent of revenue, and that's how you would want to model it.
Matthew, just one more point. I think Rafael touched upon it. So again, 2 to 3 very valid. But remember, we gave a framework that is still very valid. I think it was a couple of years back during capital management on kind of revenue scenarios and CapEx. I think these are also very, very valid. I will say that, as Rafael alluded to, we are seeing right now, even at the midpoint of the second quarter, and again, I want to see how it plays out. But we're looking at this, I don't know, 17%, 18% growth year-over-year for the first half of the year, that's stronger than last year. So of course, we want to be prepared in case it continues. We -- no one tells us what the future will be. We just have to support a range of scenarios.
So in that sense, we are taking the opportunity to divert some of the -- because we have enough that the thing about wafer capacity, I think we are well positioned with our 300-millimeter wafer fabs. We have the brick and mortar. We have to install equipment. But on the AT side, I think there is an opportunity, and we are very happy that we've internalized our supply because we are seeing more and more bottlenecks in the market that are popping up. And the fact that we control our destiny here and we can move more stuff internally as a benefit. So some of this $2 billion to $3 billion of CapEx that you're seeing this year, some of that is going to support faster internalization of our back end into our own assembly in test, and that allows us to support customers at a higher level.
Do you have a follow-up, Matt?
Yes, it's helpful. I guess just following, is there any update to your messaging around depreciation expectations versus 3 months ago? And then maybe how to think about timing of when CI will remain -- will receive the remaining ships direct funding?
Yes. I'll take that. No change to depreciation expectations for this year, 2.2 to 2.4. And then for 2027, continued upward pressure, but likely at a slower at a slower rate. On the chip side, first, I will tell you the more interesting one with ITC. We've been talking about that one. That's the one that's going to give us more money over the long term and that's a 35% of qualified manufacturing investments. We have been getting that ITC and then we'll continue to get ITC. But on the direct funding, we just received over $500 million in total, what received in fourth quarter is $630 million out of the up to $1.6 billion of direct funding. And the remaining, we should get that over the coming years as we continue fulfilling the various milestones stipulated in the contract.
Our next question is from Joe Quatrochi with Wells Fargo.
Yes. I was curious if you could maybe just help us understand, given the resegmentation of revenue, especially on the industrial side, what is normal seasonality now for the June quarter?
So if you can probably look back and model out what our revenue has done over history, and I don't have a buy end market specific, what the percentage is. But overall, what you'll typically see is the second and third quarter or stronger quarters. and fourth and first are typically lower compared to second and third. Do you have a follow-up?
I'll just add on that, just on seasonality. Look, our guide is -- I would describe it as a little bit above seasonal, right? I think we guided at what 8% sequential. So that's a little bit. And again, the combination of the market is changing. Data center, as we know, is now a bigger part of our revenue. But overall, my view on 2Q is it's slightly above seasonal guide. Hopefully, that helps.
Joe, do you have a follow-up?
Yes, as a follow-up, we had a really strong quarter in the first quarter out of the gate for free cash flow and just even cash flow from operations. Just any update on just how to think about free cash flow per share for this year. Any change there?
Yes. I think I mentioned, Joe, during the capital management call that as long as revenue is growing mid- to high single digits, that $8 of free cash flow per share is very probable, highly probable, okay? Now as I said before, first half of the year at the midpoint is somewhere between 15% and 20% growth, right? So there's definitely an upside. I'm not going to say what the number is, but go back to our framework that we provided back in the capital management call. You'll see, I think, I think at $20 billion we had in 8 to 9 and 22, we had 9 to 10. So it gives you kind of how every extra $1 billion of revenue is doing what -- how it helps free cash flow per share. It gives you a very high-level framework. But right now, assuming we don't have another full start, I think there is a very high -- very likely, we will be that will easily be that $8 free cash per share for 2026. Again, we need to see how the year continues, but I would say the probability is probably high.
Thank you, Joe. Let's move on to our last caller.
Our last question is from Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
First question will be about fab loadings. And given what appears to be a strong start to the year. What are your plans for fab loadings? And what do you expect to do with inventory as we go through the year? I know you've been building inventory in order to be responsive to customers, do you expect to keep inventories at these levels or might that dip a bit?
Yes. So we feel very comfortable with our position with both capacity and inventory. And inventories there to support customer satisfaction, cubic time short and stable. So we'll continue to do that, and we'll adjust load-ins throughout the quarter to handle whatever comes at us in a number of scenarios in this upturn.
Just to add on that, Chris, we talked about all these phases of our investment, right, Phase I, Phase II, Phase III. So right now, the surge of demand is in analog, right? And in analog, we are in Phase III. So we are modulating start. We have the capacity we are moderating starts real time. We are just looking at the daily consumption, if you will, and this is where Rafael team of to start wafers. So of course, we have the opportunity.
Now in terms of inventory, it all depends on the rate of consumption. Meaning, if demand continues to be very, very strong, we'll continue to deplete inventory. Obviously, it takes time to build these parts, right? Some of the parts get built in 3 months, some of them can take 6 to 9 months. So Overall, that's why we have inventory. Inventory allows us a quick surge of customer support if they have a strong demand, that's what happened in Q1. We have a strong guide for Q2 in the midpoint, it's 8% sequential. It's above seasonal, as I mentioned. So I think inventory will play a role there. But then the machine catches up.
So to me, all these questions are related to what the second half of the year of demand will do. And based on the macro environment and based on what happened last year in terms of the market jittery, as I called it before, I want to see it play out. The good news is that we are prepared every scenario that will be presented to us.
Yes, let me just add a -- taking a longer picture and just the next quarter, when you think of our range of inventory days 150 to 250, during an upturn, we should be draining that number. It should be -- right now, we're at 209 should shift the drift towards the lower end. And then during the downturn, that's when we build inventory. And then it moves upward, right? So high level in an ideal scenario, that's what you would see in terms of days of inventory.
Chris, do you have a follow-up?
I do. And for my follow-up, I want to return to some of your comments about pricing. And we've heard from some others in the space who were a little more explicit on what they were doing with pricing. And is TI simply following the market right now on what's happened with your comments of potentially some better pricing in the second half? And then as a follow-on to that, to what extent are your customers -- what percentage of your customers would be on sort of annual price contracts such that if there was a reset in pricing, that would more likely happen towards the end of the year into next year?
Yes. I think, Chris, I think it's a good question. And I think we touched on was -- just to clarify, the TI follows, yes, because we want to see sustainability, right? We don't want to be changing prices every quarter. Of course, prices go up and down every quarter. It depends on the portfolio and where our customers need more demand and work supplies, et cetera. But let's look at 2025. In 2025, our pricing behaved as we expected. It was down this low single-digit number. That was the actual number in 2025.
In the first quarter of '26, it was stable. It was a good start of the year. I think if demand continues to behave like that and we see stronger and stronger requests from our customers, that opens up a discussion, and that's what we are going through right now. We are definitely seeing. If you go back to the -- you said the supply agreements or price agreements we've done, they were agreed upon last year, some the demand environment was very different then. We are seeing higher numbers in terms of demand. We will have to invest in our capacity. I mentioned back-end capacity investment to support all of that. There is a tightness on the OSAT world. So of course, it's a discussion. And I think customers are very thoughtful and most important for them is not to have a $0.30 part stopping their production. They need to have a high level of customer support, and that's what we are that's what we are offering. So not only supporting the part we promise them but also sometimes solving problems they have with other suppliers. That's the opportunity we have in 2026. But again, it all depends on the sustainability of the demand signal. So we'll continue to watch it. We are discussing with our customers as we speak. And we'll report back during the July call.
Thanks, Chris. Haviv, do you want to close this out?
Yes. So let me wrap up with what we've said previously. At our core, we are engineers and technology is the foundation of our company. But ultimately, our objective and the best metric to measure progress and generate value to owners is the long-term growth of free cash flow per share. Thank you all, and have a good evening.
This concludes today's conference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you again for your participation.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $4,8 Mrd. (+19% YoY, +9% qoq; über Top der Range)
- Segmenttreiber: Analog +22% YoY; Embedded +12% YoY; Sonstiges −16% YoY
- Profitabilität: Bruttomarge 58% (+210 bp qoq); Operatives Ergebnis $1,8 Mrd. (37% Marge); EPS $1,68 (inkl. $0,05 Steuerbenefit)
- Cashflow & CapEx: Operativer CF Q1 $1,5 Mrd.; FCF (TTM) $4,4 Mrd.; CapEx Q1 $676 Mio.; CHIPS‑Zahlung $555 Mio. in Q1
- Bilanz: Cash $5,1 Mrd.; Schulden $14 Mrd.; Inventar $4,7 Mrd. (209 Tage, −13 Tage qoq)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Akquisition: Übernahme von Silicon Labs angekündigt; Close erwartet H1 2027; Ziel: Führungsposition in embedded wireless connectivity stärken
- Wettbewerbsvorteile: Fokus auf eigene Fertigung, breites Portfolio und zunehmende Internaliserung von Assembly/Test als Differenzierer
- Marktfokus: Intensive R&D‑Investitionen für Data‑Center‑Power (inkl. GaN, BCD) und Ausrichtung auf langfristiges Free‑Cash‑Flow‑Wachstum je Aktie
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Q2‑Guidance: Umsatz $5,0–5,4 Mrd.; EPS $1,77–2,05; effektiver Steuersatz ≈13%
- Wachstumstreiber: Management sieht Q2 über Saison (Midpoint ≈ +8% qoq), getragen von Industrie und Data Center; Automotive stabil, mid‑single digits YoY
- Risiken: Nachhaltigkeit der Nachfrage unklar; Pricing stabil in Q1, mögliche Preis‑upside H2; AT‑Kapazität kann Engpass werden
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachfragequalität: Analysten hinterfragten, ob Industrie‑Wachstum (≈+30% YoY) Replenishment, Preis oder echte Endnachfrage ist; Management sieht breite, nicht‑hortende Erholung
- Marge & Pricing: Diskussion um inkrementelle Gross‑Margin‑Fallthrough; Management verweist auf akquisitionsbedingte Belastungen und 75–85% Fallthrough‑Rahmen
- Kapazität & Inventar: Fragen zu Fab‑Loading, Phase‑III‑Starts und Inventartagen (akt. 209 Tage); Antwort: genügend Kapazität, Fokus auf Assembly/Test‑Investitionen und dynamisches Loading
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Starker Start ins Jahr mit Beat, hoher Cash‑Generierung und klarer Fertigungs‑/Portfolio‑Strategie; kurzfristig positiv für Aktionäre, langfristiger Mehrwert hängt von Nachhaltigkeit der Industrie/Data‑Center‑Nachfrage, Pricingentwicklung und Integration von Silicon Labs ab.
Texas Instruments — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
1. Management Discussion
Good morning. The 2026 Annual Meeting of Stockholders of Texas Instruments, Inc. is hereby called to order. I'm Haviv Ilan, Chairman of the Board of Directors. Our meeting today will focus on business items outlined in our proxy statement. Holders of greater than 85% of the outstanding common stock are represented at the meeting in person or by proxy. We have a quorum. The polls are now open for voting. The right to vote is limited to stockholders of record and proxy holders. Please raise your hand if you need a ballot.
Today's vote is on 3 company proposals, including director nominees and 1 stockholder proposal if it is properly presented. The full text of these proposals and the company's position on each matter is available in our proxy statement.
The first company proposal on the ballot is the vote to elect director nominees. All nominees for election to the TI Board are with us today this morning. All were elected at last year's annual meeting and their qualifications are listed in the proxy statement.
Two other proposals are on the ballot, an advisory vote on named executive officer compensation, and a vote to ratify appointment of Ernst & Young as the company's independent registered public accounting firm for 2026.
Also on the ballot for today's meeting is 1 stockholder proposal. The stockholder proposal is on the ballot for today's meeting was submitted by John Chevedden and will be presented by his representative. Mr. Chevedden's representative will have 3 minutes for remarks regarding the proposal. Please step up to the microphone to begin your remarks.
Good morning. Proposal 4, shareholder right to act by written consent sponsored by John Chevedden. Shareholders request that the Board of Directors take the necessary steps to permit written consent by the shareholders entitled to cast the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize an action at a meeting at which all shareholders entitled to vote thereon were present and voting without any discrimination or restriction based on length of stock ownership.
This includes shareholders' ability to initiate any appropriate topic for written consent. This proposal topic won an outstanding 78% Texas Instruments' shareholder support at the 2021 Texas Instruments Annual Meeting without any special effort by the proponent. According to State Law, Texas Instruments' shareholders can have the right to act by written consent and the right to call for a special shareholder meeting. Both rights allow shareholders to take action between annual meetings. [ Chairman ] Texas Instruments was suggesting that its shareholders limit themselves to 1 shareholder right when Texas Instruments shareholders are entitled to 2 shareholder rights under State Law.
It is especially important for Texas Instruments shareholders to have the right to act by written consent because Texas Instruments' shareholders have only an unattainable right to call for a special shareholder meeting. Texas Instruments requires the backing of 25% of all shares outstanding to call for a special shareholder meeting. The reason that the 25% figure is too high is that more than 100 companies have had an opportunity to give 1 example of a special shareholder meeting ever taking place at any company whatsoever that required 25% of shares to call for a special shareholder meeting. Not one of these 100 companies has ever cited even one example of the special shareholder meeting actually taking place where the requirement was 25% of shares.
Companies such as Texas Instruments,like the 25% figure because they know the 25% figure is a safe figure and a special shareholder meeting will never take place. Please vote for a shareholder right to act by written consent, Proposal 4 because Texas Instruments' shareholders do not have an attainable right to call for a special shareholder meeting. Thank you.
Thank you. I will now open the floor to questions about the ballot items. The polls are now closed. Votes submitted prior to the start of the meeting have already been counted. We have the preliminary results of the voting and according to our independent inspector, all company proposals have passed and the stockholder proposal did not pass.
With that, the annual meeting is adjourned. Thank you for coming today.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
Texas Instruments — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Versammlung: Ordentliche Hauptversammlung 2026 mit >85% der Stammaktien in Präsenz oder per Proxy; Beschlüsse betrafen ausschließlich Governance- und Prüfungsfragen.
- Ergebnis: Alle Unternehmensvorschläge (Wahl der Direktoren, Beratung zur Vergütung der Führungskräfte, Bestätigung von Ernst & Young als Abschlussprüfer) wurden nach vorläufiger Zählung angenommen; der Aktionärsantrag zum schriftlichen Zustimmungsrecht wurde abgelehnt.
- Inhalt: Keine operativen, finanzwirtschaftlichen oder kapitalallokationsbezogenen Ankündigungen durch das Management.
⚙️ Strategische Highlights
- Vorstandszusammensetzung: Alle nominierten Direktoren waren anwesend und wurden bestätigt; das Board bleibt damit im bisherigen Mandat bestätigt.
- Corporate Governance: Company-Positionen zu den Abstimmungsgegenständen sind im Proxy Statement dargelegt; es wurden keine Zugeständnisse an die Forderung nach schriftlicher Zustimmung gemacht.
- Prüfung: Ernst & Young wurde für 2026 als unabhängige Wirtschaftsprüfungsgesellschaft ratifiziert, was Kontinuität in der Prüfungsbeziehung bedeutet.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Neuheit: Keine neuen finanziellen Guidance-Änderungen, strategischen Produktankündigungen oder Kapitalmaßnahmen; einzig formale, vorläufige Abstimmungsergebnisse wurden mitgeteilt.
- Aktionärsantrag: Der Antrag von John Chevedden zum Recht auf schriftliche Zustimmung wurde präsentiert, erhielt aber nicht die bei der Abstimmung notwendige Unterstützung.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Die HV bestätigt den Status quo: Vorstand und Prüfer bleiben, Governance-Positionen unverändert. Für Aktionäre gibt es keine unmittelbaren operativen Signale oder Guidance-Änderungen; relevant ist vor allem, dass der Versuch, ein einfacheres schriftliches Zustimmungsrecht einzuführen, gescheitert ist, wodurch Aktionärsrechte zwischen Jahreshauptversammlungen unverändert restriktiver bleiben.
Texas Instruments — Morgan Stanley Technology
1. Question Answer
All right. I think people are still filtering in, but we'll go ahead and kick it off. I'm Joe Moore from the Morgan Stanley Semiconductor team, and we're very happy to have back at our conference, CEO of Texas Instruments, Haviv Ilan. Haviv, thanks so much for being here again.
Good morning, Joe. Thanks for having us.
So you just came off of your capital management call. I know that's a sort of focus for you guys every year where you update us on your priorities. Can you maybe give us some of the bigger picture takeaways from that call?
Yes. I think that happened exactly a week ago, and not a lot of change. We are excited about where we are. We are in the last year of a 6-year investment cycle that was executed well. On budget, on schedule, actually ahead, and very pleased to be in that position.
But also wanted to go back to what we talk about every year, our competitive advantages, which is manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, the channel advantage and a strong position in the market in the sense of diversity, of longevity of the business. We went into that. Also talked about our market. This year, we have provided a little bit more -- a change in our -- on our market. We've reorganized our market segments. We've added data center simply because the size of it and the importance in our economy is higher.
The economy, we just heard from.
Yes, we just heard about it. And we now have industrial, automotive, data center, personal electronics and communications, gave a little bit of visibility into that. But more important, very happy with our position in these 3 markets that we care about. I think they carry the most growth for the foreseeable future. Industrial, automotive, data center, 75% of our business there. And an improving portfolio, Joe. This is something that we've been working on for many, many years. I am excited about where we are.
And to finish with that, we -- remember, our objective is to grow free cash flow per share for the long term. We've given a little bit of an update of how we go closer to the trend line with a very good probability to hit at least $8 of free cash flow per share in 2026 with a lot of opportunity for upside.
Great. And you mentioned a lot of continuity over the years with the way you've approached capital management with different strategies along the way, but a very clear focus on optimization of cash flow. But one thing that is a little different, the M&A, the Silicon Labs deal. Maybe give us an overview of that deal, and then maybe we can delve into what that tells us about your priorities?
From a high level, strategic thinking about M&A has not changed, same framework. And we are doing them very rarely, right? We've done some in the beginning of 2000s with Burr-Brown. We've did another one with National in the beginning of the previous decade and last month, announced a plan to acquire Silicon Labs. We always said the markets that we like are analog, are industrial and automotive. In this case, a very industrial business for Silicon Labs.
The focus will be on analog and mixed signal. And I see Silicon Labs as a great mixed-signal asset. I think they also are a great fit or potential fit for our competitive advantages. So if you think about what they bring into the mix in TI, it's a very nice broad portfolio on the wireless connectivity side. People like to call it IoT. That's the way I think about it. And also a great position in terms of diversity and longevity. A very, very broad customer base, very sticky business, long design cycles, which we like.
What we want to bring into the mix is, of course, our manufacturing and technology capability. We are now -- we've invested since 2021 in this mixed-signal asset in terms of the Lehi fab we have. We think we can transition the portfolio over there. And also our channel advantage. I don't think we have quantified revenue synergies and actually assumed them at 0. But I think there are also revenue synergies that can come up as we put these products in the hands of our very capable field force.
And also ti.com with e-commerce, with the capabilities we have there, I think that can also accelerate revenue growth. So very excited about the opportunity. Of course, we have to execute through the plan, and we are expecting to close that transaction in the first half of 2027.
Great. Well -- and we cover Silicon Labs and like the fit a lot. I like the business a lot. I guess, just a couple of questions though about what it tells us about how you think of your business. We used to write about IoT 6, 7 years ago, and Rich Templeton was sort of saying we're serving that market through our catalog business. And I think a lot of that was when investors kind of focus on individual little product cycles and things like that. But it was very much -- we're not looking at IoT as a vertical. It's much more of a catalog. We're going to have these solutions.
SLAB is almost the antithesis of that, right, that they have looked at it as a vertical. And a lot of the kind of core strength of the company is that kind of tying everything together, having multiprotocols back like that. Does that say that TI is less catalog-focused and a little bit more vertical-focused? Or is that more something unique to this asset?
No, I actually agree with Rich. I don't think IoT is a vertical. So the way I think about verticals or it's markets, right? And the way I think about IoT is technology and the product portfolio and a line in the breadth of portfolio of analog, mixed signal and embedded products. It's just a very important line. It has secular growth because as people want to connect, especially with IoT, with AI and data. IoT or wireless connectivity is a great way to add connectivity capabilities to an already existing system, right? You don't have the wires, you add that feature. But it's a very broad business across multiple end equipment, very catalog-ish, in my view. And that's what we like about it. So in that sense, I agree with Rich.
We think that the unique opportunity with Silicon Labs, you don't see it many times in a young company that they have the persistence to build their business in medical, in health care, in metering, in enterprise automation, very rare to see early phase companies going after that. You'll see them mainly usually in very fast-growing verticals, to your point, whether it's communication or personal electronics or even data center. To me, that is exactly the opposite in Silicon Labs. Very broad portfolio, very sticky, a great fit to our company, especially as we internalize the portfolio into our own factories.
And how do you think about that dynamic between having the best catalog, having parts that sort of solve these analog problems versus thinking about verticals and thinking, okay, automotive needs these things and they need to interoperate with each other and industrial needs these things. How do you see the balance between those?
I think both are very important. And even in our capital management call last week, we talked about the 3 markets that we put more emphasis on, especially from an R&D perspective, industrial, automotive, data center, is that you have to play the general purpose play. You call it catalog, but a very broad, not application-specific type of socket. But also the application-specific type of socket. Why? Because it's a big part of the TAM. It's not a good idea to ignore it.
But I see the foundation of our business as this general purpose business. We love these type of sockets because revenue per socket or revenue concentration per socket is low. You can command high margins. The stickiness of the sockets are very high, simply because not a lot of people are looking at them. So once you've earned your position on the board, it gets reused again and again and again for multiple generations. You still have to have that discipline, Joe, to always make sure that your portfolio is current, meaning best size, best power, best cost structure. And I think TI over the last 15 years have worked very, very -- in a very high level of discipline to create exactly that.
On top of it -- and this is an end game -- you add the application-specific sockets. And especially with the markets we care about. So you won't see TI going after huge sockets on the communication market. If you think about base stations, you won't see us going and putting a lot of attention on personal electronics, although we do it, but we are very selective over there. In industrial, in automotive, in data center, you will see us playing in both roles. And this is a muscle that we are continuing to build. And I'm excited about this end game, have a foundation of general purpose business and on top of it, build the verticals that you think present the highest growth for the company.
Yes. I mean, they're both great parts of the business.
Correct.
Yes. Okay. That's helpful. And then with the Silicon Labs deal, you sort of said -- and you talked about it, it's not a fab filler. [indiscernible] But I guess, how do you think about having a lot of capacity, having at the moment, somewhat lower utilization of that, that you can actually add value through manufacturing by buying assets and bringing them into those fabs? Is that part of the benefit of having that capacity that you have? Or are you still much more focused on that as a strategic reserve?
No. To me, the way I think about an acquisition, or in the case of Silicon Labs, is the portfolio and the market position, and we cover that. In the sense of the fab, I think it's very important. And I think we say it, and I think people kind of okay, brush off it, but we say, especially this year, we are prepared for a range of scenarios. And it's related to that strategic position that you just talked about.
I think it's very, very important to be prepared. Right now, in the last few years, the market has started to recover, at least in 2025. And I want to be ready for any scenario in 2026. If the market wants to continue at the same rate of recovery, I think that's going to be not a lot of stretch for the company, and we'll be ready for that. But TI wants to be ready of what happens if industrial does want to go back to trend line quickly. What happens if data center continues to grow very, very fast as it has. What happens if the secular growth in automotive are actually getting -- continuing to generate momentum in '26 and beyond. We want to be ready for the opportunity.
And in that sense, we've put a lot of discipline on having enough capacity, but also in the short term, have enough inventory, whether in die bank or finished goods, to serve the surge as it comes. So far, look at 2025, we grew double digits at 13%, but it's not been a very, very strong recovery. But '26 is not done yet. I know a lot of people, you guys are spending one time of what it could be, but I want to be ready for each and every opportunity.
The excitement I have is that two things are continuing to happen in a meaningful way. One, data center is becoming a bigger part of our business and the growth rate is very, very high. I did not envision that 5 years ago. I think the CapEx investment over there and the need for energy -- for power density, the need for more connectivity, the need for more sensing and more control is growing. So that's been -- it's now -- we left the year at 10% or 11% of our business, but growing at 70% year-over-year. So that's a big part of the business now.
And on top of it, industrial is so far away from trend line. Yes, there are some sectors, in our case, it's aerospace and defense that are unfortunately generating new highs every quarter, but that's almost the outlier. The rest of the sectors -- and we have about 10 of them -- are way below trend line. And we are 4 years after the previous peak, right? So that is a market that has a secular growth. That is a market that has content addition from generation to generation, but still trending 25% below its peak. So I think it's due to a correction, and we want to be ready for that opportunity.
Great. So I want to ask you questions about a lot of things that you just said. Maybe start CapEx and inventory. On the CapEx side, you've talked about a business that could have maintenance CapEx of 4% to 5% going forward. So we'll start getting more cash flow relative to the levels that we've had if you sort of stay in that mode.
I guess, how do you think about that level of spending now? Do -- if we have a more robust recovery, would you spend more than that? And I guess maybe the question is, how do you optimize long-term utilization? It doesn't seem like maybe in the past, you thought about, let's be 100% at peak and lower trough. You're probably trying to optimize around a lower level than that, which makes a lot of sense given the economics of your business.
Correct, Joe, I think you touched upon it. But first on the maintenance side, look, every company, especially in IDM, that now we are more and more -- we are internalizing our capacity more and more. We'll finish the decade at above 95% of the front end and above 90% on the back end. That's a big change. If you go back, especially to the back end, it used to be about 60% or 55%. So that's a big change. We want to control our destiny across the front end and the back end.
And when you run your operations, even if you don't grow rapidly, there are always areas in your portfolio that are growing faster than others, right? So you always have to -- I call it maintenance, but you also want to stay current. If a certain part of the data center market needs a little bit more capacity, you make an investment. The same with certain packaging type. So that is where the 4% is coming from. And that would be at a low level if revenue doesn't want to grow. But I think revenue has an opportunity to grow way beyond that, and this is where we will modulate up our CapEx.
Right now -- and I think I mentioned it last week. As long as growth is very similar to last year, either this year or even next, we don't need to add a lot of capacity because we've gotten ahead. And we are internalizing right now, our -- at least our Embedded business from external fabs into the internal one. However, if the opportunity presents itself, we will happily equip the clean rooms and get a little bit of more spare.
And you're right, you never want to run at 100%. The factory cannot run at 100% utilization. This is where the efficiency of the factory drops. And you're just building [ WIP ], right? So operating at that somewhere around 80% to 90% is a sweet spot because we also want to have a surge of demand. And this is where inventory comes in. We want to carry more inventory. And this is something that we've learned back in COVID. It serves you very well in the short term. If there is a surge of demand, for whatever reason you can envision, that the inventory is the first aid to serve customers. And we've seen some of it in small cases. Tariff was an example a year ago. There was one company that ran out because of geopolitical tensions, could not ship in Q4. So this is where TI showed up for the game very comfortably and solved customers' problem.
Yes. I think the strategy there makes a lot of sense. I think it's a lot of inventory that you're talking about, 150 to 250 days. But when you think about the life cycle of the products that you have in inventory, it's actually a pretty low risk around that. So just -- how do you view that trade-off? I mean, it was -- I sort of understood why it was a high level. You went to a little bit of a higher level around the Capital Management Day. Just what's the calculus of what's -- I understand the logic of holding more. It makes a lot of sense to me. What gives you to the number, to the 150 to 250?
I think first, tactically, I think Rafael answered that question a week ago, the 150 to 250 is because we are now -- look, we are fully internalizing our capacity. So think about it, when you run foundry wafers, that [ WIP ] doesn't sit on your books, right? The same as on the [ AT ]. So when you go 90%, 95% internal, that's one reason you see a little bit of a higher inventory.
The second thing is the more strategic view, and this is where you have to be very careful on what parts you build ahead. So we will build a part that has the diversity and longevity phenomena or traits. You don't want to build a custom part inventory because that's how you get in trouble and scrap that inventory later on. So we are very intentional about looking at our portfolio and choosing the right part, the right wafers to build ahead. And because our business has a high level of general purpose parts, a high level of industrial and automotive, that longevity and diversity phenomena is there.
The second point is you see a range. Why do you see a range? If there is a very high surge of demand, your inventory will deplete. Your 250 will go down to 150. You don't want to go lower than that because that means that we are starting to be short and cannot serve the customer well during that up cycle. And you have to model your up cycle. So you have to model the slope of the demand. We have modeled several scenarios, taking our information from previous examples. And we want -- at least if the history repeats itself, we want to be a great supplier through even the upturn.
And of course, once you -- the cycle peaks, this is a great opportunity to go and replenish your inventory to prepare to the next one. This is where you see inventory probably climb to the higher level of the range. But that's a theory. Of course, no cycle is perfect, and every one of them behaves differently. But this is where we have to have the discipline to prepare for a range of scenarios, very, very important.
Yes. I think that's a really important point is that you guys -- more than a lot of companies have -- understand the inherent unpredictability of markets, and you're prepared for that range of scenarios. I guess in that context, how do you think about 2026? Most companies at the conference are seeing what you described, strength in data center, strength in aerospace, defense. Everything else getting a little bit better over time, but like maybe the pace of that is a little disappointing. What are the things that might make that change as you move through the year?
Yes. I would say a small -- in general, I agree. So far, it's more or less what you described. Very strong data center, but now it's a more meaningful part of the business. So that's very important to remember. Now it can move the needle on your overall demand.
I would be a little bit more -- I would not say optimistic, but we are seeing maybe a different change in industrial versus a year ago because the breadth of the growth in Q4. I look at Q4, we grew close to 20% year-on-year in industrial. Finally, we are starting to see a very broad demand signal, not only aerospace and defense, not only energy infrastructure that are kind of AI-related. You're starting to see the traditional industrial automation, of medical, of building automation starting to show strength again. I think they are due because they are so much below trend line.
And we've seen also -- what I was, I would say, encouraged by is that it improved every month. And we are now 2 months into the first quarter. And so far, so good, meaning we are seeing that signal continuing. So let's see how Q1 plays out. There is still March, and we just came out of Lunar New Year a week ago. But I think industrial is due for a correction.
Actually, I didn't break it out a week ago during the CAGR of TI growing in industrial, automotive and data center together from 40% of revenue to 75%, but the CAGR is 8%. That's a healthy CAGR even when '25 is not a great year, to your point, slow recovery. But if you look at the industrial market for TI, it was actually below 5%. It's automotive and data center that grew 12%. So I think industrial has more gain. And I would like to see it quarter-by-quarter. We had a couple of head fakes last year. Let's see what it wants to do. But I actually feel that that's the opportunity in 2026. And industrial is a big part of the TAM. It's 35%, 40% of the TAM.
So we have to be ready for that opportunity, not only that customers are getting back to their patterns of ordering, but also delivering new equipment with more content. And maybe if they want to build some inventory -- they're not doing it right now, but if they want to build some, we want to support them. We don't want to tell them no. So we want to prepare for that, and let's let '26 play out.
And I guess when you frame that, we're still so far below the peak of several years ago now. And the industrial activity in the economy has grown over that time.
Correct.
But obviously, at the peak, there's always some overshipment as well.
Correct.
So where are we do you think now relative to the level? Are you shipping to end demand? Clearly, there's not much replenishment. Is there still some pockets of reduction? Just -- are you still shipping below end demand, do you think?
No, I think we ship to end demand, but what is happening is that we are 4 years forward. So we are starting to see the new systems coming in. And customers, I don't think they are building inventory. I agree with your assessment. Of course, they don't tell us, but that's my view right now. I don't think they are building inventory. And there is also not anxiety in the market. This is just a healthy broad demand on the industrial side.
But who knows? We've seen some other markets where shortages generated a lot of demand. And we don't want to be short this time, we want to be ready for that. So that's what drives our decision, Joe. And again, let's look at it quarter-by-quarter and call it out as we see it.
Okay. Okay. And then automotive, kind of a very different shape of a cycle. You're at peak, but it never really came down that much, and it's grown. But there seems like there's still pretty strong underlying growth. And I think I'm bullish. I don't know if that's playing out or not like the last few months has been a question, but it feels like there's indications that inventories are low. You've seen disruption around some of the geopolitical stuff that you mentioned. Are we ready for automotive to start a more meaningful recovery, do you think? Or is it demand dependent? How are you thinking about the automotive market?
I think high level strategically -- and let's talk about the next 5 to 10 years -- I totally agree with you, Joe. I think content addition is still ongoing. A lot of people get hung out -- hung up about the powertrain. But we see growth in all sectors of the automotive, including ADAS, which is at the early innings of additions, especially across the portfolio of cars. The body, electronics with more comfort inside the car, more infotainment inside the car. And even the safety systems that are being redesigned with brake-by-wire and other actuators that are coming into the car. Chassis control, that is a cool application. And I think early innings of these additions. So at least for the next 5 to 10 years, I think content addition continues to grow. And this is why we've seen a 12% CAGR for TI in automotive for the last 12 years. And you're right, it never corrected down. It kind of plateaued at the peak.
I think what you're talking about is more tactical. So China, yes, there was a very strong 2025. Q4 was our peak quarter in automotive in China ever, okay? But the incentives are going away, and maybe there is a small correction. They built some inventory. I think it's a bump in the road. I think there is a lot of opportunity ahead for the foreseeable future. Now you take it decades from now, it will plateau because of saturation of content. But by that time, we have so many other end equipment like robotics. I think data center continues. So in general, these 3 markets have a lot of opportunity ahead.
And within automotive, China is becoming so important. A lot of the innovation is there at this point. And you do have domestic competition that at least, there's a lot of concern that investors have. Can you talk about competing in China in the automotive space?
Yes. First, in China, this is where we have had a little challenge during the COVID cycle because of supply shortage. That's actually driven some of our decisions to divert or to bias our supply into the industrial, automotive, data center market. So if I talk about TI, 75% of our revenue is in these 3 markets. In China, it's actually higher. It's more than 85% in these 3 markets because we were not supporting well, the PE market.
But I will say that the competition in China is intensifying, and it's a function of really, the customer base. The customer base is very fast moving. The demand for speed and urgency is high, but also the demand for a broad portfolio and quality and high performance. So we compete.
What I'm proud about -- and you can see our results even in 2025, TI has grown share in China. If you look at our growth in China, about 25% in 2025, and automotive was a big part of it. That was faster even than the local competition. And I think the way you compete in China is first with your competitive advantages. You can argue that there is a very competitive price point you have to compete in China, but we have our internal manufacturing where we don't have to share the profit with anyone, not with the foundries and not with the OSATs, right? That's one advantage.
The broad portfolio is crucial, especially in the markets I've mentioned. Instead of solving the problem with 15 different companies, which is the case of the local competition, you can solve it with 1 company, TI. And in the markets of industrial, automotive, data center, performance and quality, especially on the automotive market, is very important. You need to have the stomach and the quality discipline to compete in automotive, even in China and especially as they are exporting more and more of their vehicles across the world, if it's in South America, if it's Southeast Asia and Europe. So I think TI held its own, if not gained, and I'm excited about that.
Now having said that, we are highly respectful of the competition. We are studying them every quarter as they release their results. We look at their parts they release to market every time there is a new part, and we learn. And we've learned that these competitors are fast moving like their customers, like our customers in China and cannot be ignored.
Okay. That's helpful. And then -- so for a decade, you've been pretty consistent that the focus areas for TI are industrial and automotive. Now you've added data center to that. And I think everybody would agree with that prioritization given everything that's going on. But what -- as a CEO, what does that mean? Like what -- when you say that's a third priority area now, how are you focusing around opportunities in data center?
Yes. I think it's a couple of points. First, it's really allocation of capital. And number one and foremost is R&D. In data center, we have identified the trend of higher power density, higher power consumption that needed us to work on our technology, actually, our process technology and package technology. And that is a journey that we've embarked upon 5, 6 years back. We've identified that as a priority then. And luckily, these investments are coming to fruition, whether if it's in a BCD node for VRM and serving the last inch of feeding or delivering power to that GPU or ASIC or CPU. And also going to higher voltages. So we've invested in GaN 15 years ago, but to support the GaN requirements in data center, we had to update and accelerate actually our R&D, and we've done that.
The second thing is the product portfolio, build a portfolio, both general purpose and application-specific. I've mentioned that on general purpose, we've done very well. A predominant footprint of TI right now in 2025 and before is on our general purpose business. We have hundreds of sockets we can fulfill on a board and sometimes thousands, different sockets on a rack. But we want to add to it, the more application-specific that needed this new technology. So this is almost a one-two punch for us. We are we have done that very well.
On the industrial and automotive, I remember discussions in TI back in 2010 when we were very heavily based in phones and in base stations and in ASICs. And we said that's not our future, our future is industrial and automotive. This is where the acquisition of National helped us to accelerate into automotive. But moreover, the portfolio has strengthened tremendously. And we've now been at it for 15 years. The broad portfolio we see is, I think, second to none in these markets in our area of Analog and Embedded, and very pleased with where we are right now.
Great. So we have 4 minutes left. Let me see if we have questions from the audience.
[indiscernible].
Yes. You can find it on our website.
Other questions? I think -- maybe if no, I'd love to ask about your microcontroller strategy. I know you haven't been happy with Embedded performance, but there are some elements of pulling away from some of the base stations and things like that. How do you feel now about your direction in microcontrollers and your ability to outgrow the embedded markets from here?
Yes. First, just -- not happy is not the right decision. I would say proud, but not satisfied. So I am very proud of the inroads we've made into the embedded market and specifically to the, call it, the more broad MCU -- catalog MCU market and also more application-specific.
What we have said -- and I said it also on the -- someone asked about Silicon Labs before during the acquisition call -- is that I think the right way to do it is build it organically. Because when you look at the pure MCU companies, the number of architectures and portfolio permutations they have is so broad that it's very, very hard to internalize it. I think Silicon Labs was very unique in the sense that they had a very efficient platform discipline, and that was something that we find very rarely.
In the case of the MCU market, I think we have to build it ourselves. And I see a lot of momentum here. Our portfolio is broadening quickly. Our portfolio is now entirely running internally. It used to run -- 2 years ago, our [ F65 ] or embedded flash 65-nanometer controllers were all running in the foundries. They are now all internalized at high yields and very high performance. And that is the plan moving forward as we move into 28-nanometer. And this is where we can start to build a more sophisticated MCU with higher memory footprint and higher content per chip.
Very excited about that, but a lot of room to go. The opportunity in Embedded is very, very similar in terms of the growth of the Analog one. Our portfolio is the one that has to be built, and we'll stay very persistent in continuing to build it.
Okay. Yes, there's been a lot of good feedback on the product families and the new -- we did some survey work that showed TI at the top of the list.
A lot of work to do.
But when I said unhappy, the market share has come down.
Market share has to -- I mean, this is part of the "difficult." That's what we like. The moat of this market, nothing happens quickly. It's almost like a delayed gratification type of work. You do the work now, you'll see the results -- sometimes we say we are building a business for our kids and grandkids. But we are starting to see results coming in. I think we've started to nudge market share up in the last year, and we have more room to go. I see a question in the [ end ] over there, Joe, if you want to take it.
Yes.
I was curious, just -- obviously, at the Capital Markets Day, you have quite a bit of capacity and ability to gain share. But how are you feeling about that relative to industry capacity, which seems to maybe be reaching peak? Not peak, but high utilization rates like we've seen from GlobalFoundries and some of your peers as well as on the packaging side as we move forward?
Again, I think your question relates to what I described before. And I don't want to call out 2026, but I think the setup is very appealing in the sense of -- yes, you go and some of the foundries in China are reporting utilization, they are up there. We are starting to see hotspots. Not in TI, but areas in the market that we can fulfill. And right now, the way I think about it strategically, let's gain share, okay? Let's use that opportunity to get on the board and to increase our footprint. Later on, market price will do what it needs to do, but I think that's an opportunity.
The last point, I invite you to check a little bit what's going on in the biggest foundry in the world in Taiwan and what they have done with their legacy supply or fabs. I mean, there is a lot of conversion into advanced packaging houses, and that's also something that presents an opportunity for TI. So we'll have to wait and see. It hasn't come to fruition yet. I don't see anxiety in the market like we see in other parts of the market in different types of semiconductors. But I can promise you one thing. If the opportunity presents itself, we will be ready, both with capacity, to your point, but also with inventory.
And with that, we'll wrap it up there. Thank you so much, everyone. Thanks, Haviv.
Thank you, Joe.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Morgan Stanley Technology
Texas Instruments — Morgan Stanley Technology
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Investitionszyklus: TI befindet sich im letzten Jahr eines gut ausgeführten sechsjährigen Investitionszyklus und betont Kapitaldisziplin und Cash‑Optimierung.
- Fokusegmente: Industrial, Automotive und Data Center machen ~75% des Geschäfts; Data Center wächst schnell und wurde als eigenes Marktsegment ergänzt.
- Finanzziel: Management sieht eine hohe Wahrscheinlichkeit, mindestens $8 Free Cash Flow je Aktie in 2026 zu erreichen.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- M&A‑Ansatz: Seltene, strategische Käufe; Übernahme von Silicon Labs (Mixed‑Signal, Wireless) soll Portfolio und Kundenbreite stärken; Abschluss erwartet H1 2027.
- Fertigung: Internalisierung vorangetrieben (Front‑End >95%, Back‑End >90%) als Wettbewerbsvorteil gegenüber Foundries/OSATs.
- Technologie & R&D: Priorität für Data Center (Prozess-, Package‑Technik, GaN) plus Ausbau von application‑specific und general‑purpose Produkten.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Marktsegment: Data Center offiziell als eigenes Segment ergänzt; trägt inzwischen zweistellige Prozentanteile und hohes Wachstum.
- Inventarstrategie: Zielbestand 150–250 Tage, selektiv auf langlebige, breite Teile ausgerichtet, um Nachfragespitzen zu bedienen.
- Synergieannahmen: Für Silicon Labs wurden in der Guidance keine Umsatzsynergien angesetzt (angenommen 0), Upside möglich durch Channel und e‑Commerce.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Produkt‑Fokus: Hinterfragt wurde, ob Silicon Labs eine Abkehr vom „Katalog“-Ansatz bedeutet; Management bleibt bei breit‑zweckiger Basis plus selektiven vertikalen Ergänzungen.
- Kapazitätsnutzung: Wie Fertigungskapazität und Inventory genutzt werden, um Nachfrage‑Szenarien 2026 zu bedienen; Management betont Bereitschaft zum Hochfahren bei Bedarf.
- Embedded & MCU: Nachfrage nach Details zur Microcontroller‑Strategie; Ziel ist organischer Ausbau, Internaliserung auf 65nm→28nm, Marktanteile sollen Stück für Stück verbessert werden.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: TI setzt auf eine konservative, aber wachstumsfähige Mischung aus Fertigungsstärke, selektiven Zukäufen (Silicon Labs) und Lagerhaltung, um Free‑Cash‑Flow‑Ziele zu erreichen; entscheidend sind Execution bei der Integration und die tatsächliche Makro‑/Endkundennachfrage 2026.
Texas Instruments — Special Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
1. Management Discussion
Good morning, and welcome to the Texas Instruments 2026 Capital Management Call. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined by our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan; and our Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi.
This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website at ti.com/ir. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website, along with the complete presentation and prepared remarks for your convenience.
This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in our most recent earnings release as well as our most recent SEC filings for a more complete description.
With that, let me turn it over to Haviv.
Thanks, Mike. Let me start by welcoming you to our 2026 Capital Management call. During today's presentation, we'll share more detail on our approach to capital allocation and our investments. We'll begin with a recap of our objective, strategy and business model that is built on our competitive advantages. We will review our scorecard for 2025 and update for 2026 as well as a historical view of our capital allocation. Then I will provide additional insight into our growth expectations, where we continue to see excellent opportunities across all of our end markets and especially in industrial, automotive and data center. Next, we will provide a brief update on our progress in strengthening our competitive advantages. And lastly, we will review our free cash flow per share performance and wrap up with a review of our cash returns. If you haven't already, I encourage you to read our investor overview, which provides insight into our business model and competitive advantages. It is available on our Investor Relations website at ti.com/ir.
The following guiding principles will help frame our discussion today. At TI, we run the company with a mindset of being a long-term owner. We believe that growth of free cash flow per share is the primary driver of long-term value. Our ambitions and values are integral to how we build TI stronger. When we are successful in achieving these ambitions, our employees, our customers, communities and shareholders all win. Our strategy is comprised of a great business model, a disciplined approach to capital allocation and a focus on efficiency.
Our business model is built around four sustainable competitive advantages: manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, reach of our market channels and diverse and long-lived positions. After investments in the business to grow free cash flow for the long term, the remaining cash will be returned over time via dividends and share repurchases. With that as a framework, our objective is to maximize long-term growth of free cash flow per share. We believe this is the best metric to judge our performance and generates long-term value for the owners of the company.
Our strategy to achieve this objective has three elements: first, a great business model that is focused on analog and embedded processing products and built around four sustainable competitive advantages, advantages that we continue to invest in and make even stronger. Second, discipline in allocating capital to the best opportunities. This spans how we select R&D projects, develop new capabilities, invest in manufacturing capacity or how we think about acquisitions and returning cash to our owners. And third, striving to constantly increase our efficiency, which is about achieving more output for every dollar of input.
Our strategy is designed around four sustainable competitive advantages that, in combination, provide tangible benefits and are difficult to replicate. First, at the bottom of this slide, we start with the foundation of manufacturing and technology. This provides us with lower costs and greater control of our supply chain and provides our customers with geopolitically dependable capacity. Our second competitive advantage is a broad portfolio of analog and embedded processing products. These products provide us more opportunities per customer and more value for our investments. Third, the reach of our market channels, including our sales team and ti.com. This provides us access to more customers, projects, socket per project and insight into their needs. And lastly, we have diverse and long-lived positions, resulting in less single point dependency and longer returns on our investments.
With that, I'll turn it over to Rafael, and he'll review our approach to capital management and the scorecard.
Thanks, Haviv. We have shared our capital management scorecard with you since 2013. You can see that the scorecard includes descriptions for our long-term objectives for each metric as well as the target range. The long-term objective provides insight into how we make decisions and run the business as opposed to only a number or a range.
In 2025, we again met our objectives. Capital expenditures were about $4.6 billion and cash return was about $6.5 billion, which is a reflection of our continued commitment to returning all free cash flow via dividends and repurchases over time. We are pleased with the consistency of these results over time that have been enabled by our business model, discipline in allocating capital and constantly striving to increase our efficiency.
For our 2026 scorecard, we have updated our CapEx targets. We expect CapEx in 2026 to be in the range of $2 billion to $3 billion. For 2027 and beyond, CapEx will continue to depend on revenue and expected growth. Our long-term objective remains the same: to support new technology development, revenue growth and extend our low-cost manufacturing advantage. We have also updated our inventory days target to 150 to 250 days, which allows us to meet our objectives of high levels of customer service through a range of market conditions by providing competitive and stable lead times while minimizing inventory obsolescence.
Turning to cash management and debt. Our objectives are unchanged. We plan to fund the recently announced acquisition of Silicon Labs through a combination of cash on hand as well as debt financing that we will arrange prior to closing. Silicon Labs will enhance our leadership in embedded wireless connectivity solutions, and we expect it to close in the first half of 2027. Our commitment to return all of our free cash flow over time is unchanged, which includes a sustainable and growing dividend as well as repurchases when it is accretive to future free cash flow for long-term owners.
In the 10-year period spanning 2016 to 2025, we have allocated about $109 billion of capital. Given that magnitude, you can appreciate why capital allocation is a job we take quite seriously and one that has a significant impact on owner returns. Our largest category of capital allocation, about half of the total, has been investments in critical areas that drive organic growth such as R&D, sales and marketing, capital expenditures and inventory. For reference, R&D and capital expenditures have accounted for the majority of our investments over this 10-year period. As we previously mentioned, we have long had a commitment to return all free cash flow to owners over time via dividends and repurchases. And finally, potential acquisitions are evaluated through two primary factors. There must be a strategic match, and they must meet certain financial objectives. These factors remain unchanged. For simplicity, we have not included changes in net debt, which over this 10-year period increased about $8.3 billion.
Now I would like to turn it back over to Haviv to share additional insight into our growth expectations.
Thanks, Rafael. First, let me make a few comments about the overall market environment. This slide, which we have shared for the last few years, shows all semiconductor units shipped, excluding memory on a trailing 12-month basis over the past 30 years as reported by WSTS. You can see here that market recovery is continuing, though the slope of recovery is more modest when compared to previous upturns, with units shipped still below the historical trend line shown in gray. This historical trend line, which grows consistently over time, guides us as secular content growth continues and our confidence in the strategic opportunity remains high.
During the last decade, we have worked hard to focus our product portfolio on analog and embedded products and strengthen our position in large growing markets. This includes investments in process technology, package technology and the expansion of our product portfolio.
As we discussed in our earnings call a few weeks ago, we reorganized our end markets to include data center. We see opportunities in all of our markets. However, we place additional emphasis on industrial, automotive and data center. In combination, these growing markets made up around 75% of our revenue in 2025 and are gaining momentum.
I would like to expand a bit on our broad portfolio of general purpose and application-specific analog and embedded processing products are well positioned to serve the industrial, automotive and data center markets. Starting with automotive, we are continuing to see growing opportunities across our automotive sectors where subsystems with higher content are becoming standard features in more vehicles. We are seeing content expansion across all vehicle types, battery electric, hybrid and internal combustion engines. As a result, our exposure in automotive is broad with growing opportunities across customers and geographies.
Turning to industrial. Our positions are diverse and long-lived. We see content growing across many sectors as increased automation, more sensing requirements and increased energy efficiency are expected to continue for the foreseeable future. Our general purpose products and ASSPs are able to serve a broad array of sockets in the industrial end market with many designs lasting for decades.
Lastly, I'd like to spend a moment describing our position in the growing data center end market. This end market is comprised of sectors found within the walls of the data center, which includes data center compute, data center networking as well as infrastructure related to rack power and thermal management. This end market is supported by a broad set of products from TI. For example, DC to DC voltage regulators, clocks, hot swap controllers, current sensors, interface products and point-of-load controllers are just a few of the many general purpose products and ASSPs that are enabling data center growth. These products are used throughout the data center, including the entire power tree from high-voltage AC to DC conversion to the intermediate bus, all the way down to the multiphase controllers and power stages. Our product will also play an important role in the long-term transition to 800-volt DC architectures where our GaN technology will drive higher power density per rack.
To summarize, we're exposed to the best markets. Our revenue has grown from about 43% to about 75% in industrial, automotive and data center, which will be excellent market for our long-term growth. Second, we have a stronger product portfolio. The breadth of our analog and embedded processing products, which span both general purpose and application-specific, combined with our investments in process and package technologies have strengthened our portfolio offering. As a result, our exposure to large, fast-growing markets and our strong product portfolio positions us for growth.
Next, I'd like to spend some time discussing our progress in strengthening our competitive advantages. To start, I'll update you on our manufacturing and technology competitive advantage. I mentioned earlier that for each of our competitive advantages, we work to ensure that they provide tangible benefits and are difficult to replicate. Our investments in manufacturing and technology helped to extend our cost advantage and give us greater control of our supply chain.
Today, we will provide a recap of the progress towards our capacity road map that will support growth over the long term. Before we do that, I'd like to provide some insight into the benefits of owning and controlling our supply chain and the benefits of 300-millimeter. There are several benefits to owning and controlling our supply chain. First, these investments provide the capacity necessary to support growth. Second, we have more control of our supply chain as more than 90% of our wafers and assembly will be manufactured internally. Third, our process technologies, which are focused on 28-nanometer to 130-nanometer, are optimized for analog and embedded processing products. Lastly, we have a structural cost advantage because of our increasing 300-millimeter wafer fab footprint.
All of these benefits allow us to deliver geopolitically dependable capacity with equipment and process technologies that last for decades. This example, which we have shared for many years, is an illustration of the cost benefit of internal 300-millimeter wafer production. In addition to the benefits of moving to 300-millimeter, we also continue to benefit from moving externally sourced products to our internal manufacturing, which are more cost effective. The combination of internal manufacturing along with 300-millimeter wafer production provides lower cost, and we will be increasing both our percentage of wafers produced internally and on 300-millimeter over the next several years.
Now let me remind you of the phases we outlined for our 300-millimeter capacity investments. The focus of Phase 1 was to support 300-millimeter transfers and incremental growth by equipping RFAB2 and LFAB1. Phase 2 was focused on new fab preparation and primarily included long lead time work that spans several years before a fab can produce a single wafer. This is what allows us to be in a position of modular capacity expansion or Phase 3. In Phase 3, we will equip and ramp fabs according to customer demand without any requalifications. We have executed well on this road map, delivering on time, on budget with high levels of efficiency and have transitioned into Phase II across the majority of our manufacturing sites. This will allow us to scale CapEx according to demand and deliver free cash flow per share growth across a range of market conditions.
Our 300-millimeter wafer fab manufacturing investment spans across three sites in Richardson, Lehi and Sherman. Here, you can see more information about each fab. In RFAB2, we completed transfers from our 150-millimeter fabs and RFAB2 is ramping towards full build-out, more than doubling the capacity of RFAB1. LFAB1 continues to ramp with new products in 45-nanometer to 65-nanometer process technologies as well as transfers from external foundries. In addition, qualification of our latest 28-nanometer process technology is underway. As a reminder, in the future, LFAB will play an important role in manufacturing products from Silicon Labs following closing of the acquisition. Lastly, the SM1 clean room is complete with production underway. It will ramp according to customer demand. The SM2 shell is also complete, which eliminates construction lead time for future expansion. This 300-millimeter footprint in combination with our existing 200-millimeter wafer fabs and back-end assembly and test facilities provides our customers with geopolitically dependable capacity.
Our CapEx investments over the last several years have been important to position the company for growth. As we are nearing completion of our 300-millimeter capacity expansions, we are reducing our CapEx and expect to spend about $2 billion to $3 billion in 2026. As a reminder, these CapEx figures do not include CHIPS Act benefits. To date, we have received $630 million in direct funding, including $555 million this quarter based on completion of milestones related to our U.S.-based capacity expansions. In 2027 and beyond, CapEx will be determined based on revenue levels and expected revenue growth.
Finally, at the bottom of the slide, we have highlighted several key metrics that this road map is already beginning to deliver, which will continue through the end of the decade. In 2025, we continue to make progress on growing the percentage of wafers and assembly manufactured internally. By 2030, we expect more than 95% of our wafers to be sourced internally with more than 80% on 300-millimeter. We also expect to assemble more than 90% internally. Overall, this will provide us with lower costs and greater control of our supply chain and provides our customers with geopolitically dependable capacity.
Now I'd like to make a few comments about R&D. We allocate our R&D investments to growth opportunities to strengthen our technology and product portfolio while improving diversity and longevity. On this slide, we summarize the current direction of our R&D investments and our revenue breakdown by end market. For the revenue breakdown, we have provided data for 2013, 2024 and 2025, so you can get a sense of how the portfolio has changed over the longer term as well as compared to last year. We can find great investment opportunities in all of these markets.
As shown in the second column, the direction of our R&D investments is consistent with prior years. Our investments in R&D are biased towards industrial, automotive and the data center end markets and continue to be up broadly. This reflects our belief that these end markets will be large and fast growing due to semiconductor content growth in industrial and automotive and the overall investments and growth in the data center market. Personal electronics and communications investments remained steady.
Here, you can see the strategic progress we have made in industrial, automotive and data center. In 2025, those markets combined represented about 75% of TI's revenue compared to just 43% back in 2013. Success in these 3 markets require a long-term commitment and the willingness to invest broadly across sectors and product categories, both of which we have done and continue to do.
I'll now turn it over to Rafael to discuss free cash flow per share growth and cash returns.
Thanks, Haviv. First, it is helpful to consider how our operating cash flows are enabling our long-term investments. Specifically, operating cash flow in 2025 was $7.2 billion, an increase of about 13% from last year as we began to see recovery across our end markets. At the same time, CapEx was $4.6 billion or 26% of revenue. As shared previously, in 2026, we are reducing CapEx as we near completion of our capacity expansions. We have often said that the best measure to judge a company's performance over time is the growth of free cash flow per share as that is what drives long-term value for our owners.
Here, we are showing our 2004 to 2022 free cash flow per share trend line continuing at the same rate through the end of the decade. In 2025, free cash flow was $3.23 per share, an increase of 97% from 2024. As you can see, free cash flow per share is trending up and beginning to approach the trend line in 2026 as growth returns and CapEx begins to moderate. We are on track to deliver more than $8 per share of free cash flow in 2026. After 2026, free cash flow per share growth will be driven by revenue growth and our CapEx strategy. This underscores the strength of our business model, including the scalability of CapEx with modular capacity. This will allow us to deliver free cash flow per share growth aligned with the long-term trend line. And finally, long-term free cash flow per share growth will continue to guide our capital allocation decisions. As mentioned before, our long-term objective is to provide a sustainable and growing dividend to appeal to a broad set of owners.
For 22 consecutive years, we have steadily increased our dividend, including a 4% increase in 4Q 2025. These increases represent 8% for five-year and 15% for 10-year compound annual growth rates. As of February 20, 2026, the dividend yield was 2.58%. Our objective in repurchasing shares is the accretive capture of future free cash flow for long-term owners. While the ultimate assessment of return on investment of these purchases depends on the future cash flow stream, the track record of this approach is encouraging. We have reduced shares outstanding 47% since 2004. We ended 2025 with about $20 billion in open authorizations, having bought back about $1.5 billion worth of stock in 2025, a 59% increase from the prior year.
With respect to cash returns, in 2025, we returned $7.13 per share. Over the last 10 years, we have returned a total of 130% of free cash flow. Returns have grown at 13% since 2004. The strength of our balance sheet will allow us to maintain our commitment and track record of returning all free cash flow over time. It may be helpful to frame our performance versus others in the S&P 500. Our free cash flow generation puts TI in the 52nd percentile and is a reflection of our decisions to invest to make the company stronger for the long term. Underlying this is our operating cash generation as a percent of revenue, where we rank in the 87th percentile. Our cash returns puts us in the 94th percentile and return on invested capital in the 70th percentile when compared to the S&P 500.
We believe our performance versus the S&P 500 is a reflection of our focus on growing free cash flow per share over the long term and the three elements of our strategy. First, a great business model that is built on our four competitive advantages, advantages in which we are continuing to invest and make even stronger. Second, discipline in how we allocate our resources, focusing on the best product opportunities as well as areas that strengthen and leverage our competitive advantages. And third, striving to constantly increase our efficiency, which is about achieving more output for every dollar of input. We believe if we can continue to do these three things well, we should be able to grow free cash flow per share for a long time into the future.
With that, let me turn it back over to Haviv.
Thanks, Rafael. Let me wrap up my prepared remarks with a few summary comments. As engineers, it's a privilege to get to pursue our passion of creating a better world by making electronics more affordable through semiconductors. We were fortunate that our founders had the foresight to know that passion alone was not enough. Building a great company required a special culture to thrive for the long term, and we continue to build this culture stronger every day. We will remain focused on the belief that long-term growth of free cash flow per share is the ultimate measure to generate value. We will invest to strengthen our competitive advantages, be disciplined in capital allocation and stay diligent in our pursuit of efficiencies.
You can count on us to stay true to our ambitions to think like owners for the long term, adapt and succeed in a world that's ever changing and behave in a way that makes us and our stakeholders proud. When we are successful, our employees, customers, communities and shareholders all win.
Thank you. With that, I'll turn it over to Mike.
Thanks, Haviv. Operator, you can now open the line for questions. In order to provide as many of you as possible an opportunity to ask your questions, please limit yourself to a single question. After our response, we will provide you with an opportunity for an additional follow-up. Operator?
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of James Schneider with Goldman Sachs.
2. Question Answer
I was wondering if you could maybe talk a little bit about how you're expecting 2026 to shape up from both a free cash flow and inventory perspective beyond what you commented on the slides. I think you talked about at least $8 in free cash flow in 2026 at the current revenue consensus. I think your slide sort of shows a wider range extending to $11 or $12 at the top end. Maybe just kind of frame how you're thinking about sort of the low and high end of that and your confidence in achieving over $8 this year.
Thanks, Jim. I'll start, and Rafael, maybe can provide a little bit more color. First, the -- at a very high level, it depends on revenue. And we are not going to call the revenue for the year. We are one quarter at a time. We gave the guidance for Q1. And I think in Q1, the year-over-year growth is about 10% at the midpoint. And of course, we need to let it play out. We are just out of Chinese New Year, and we'll have more visibility as we go into March.
Having said that, as we put it on the slide, our confidence is high. The company needs to grow, obviously, to reach $8 of free cash flow per share in 2026, but it doesn't need to grow a lot. Once you get into this kind of mid- to single-digit growth to maybe 10%, we should be in that range. But we also are prepared for other scenarios. If the market wants to really grow fast in 2026, and we'll have to see how it develops, we can react to that and then free cash flow per share will be higher.
On the CapEx side, and again, this is where Rafael can provide more color. As long as the growth is similar to last year, I would say it should be more on the lower side, maybe close to $2 billion for 2026. But if we see high growth developing during the year, we would, of course, want to be ready, and we will take it to the higher level, maybe closer to the $3 billion. So that's why you see a range over there.
Rafael, anything else to add?
Just beyond that, that $8 that we talked about in the prepared remarks that is based on revenue on consensus for the year. So you can do the math if you want to model higher or lower, just use 75% to 85% fall-through on revenue to do that, and then you can model that away.
You mentioned -- Haviv already addressed CapEx. You also mentioned inventory. We're pleased with our inventory position, and we'll just continue to adjust that depending on expectations for demand.
James, do you have a follow-up?
Yes. Just a clarification on Rafael, what you just said. Just in terms of the inventory range now being 250 days at the high end. I believe last quarter, you sort of indicated that you wanted to take factory loadings down a little bit. I think your inventory is around 208 days, if I recall correctly. So I'm kind of curious, under what circumstances would you want to run sort of at the higher end of the range if you thought 208 days was a little bit too much.
Yes. Just to clarify, that comment that you attributed to me, that was two quarters ago. That was the October call. And in the last call, we said we're comfortable with our inventory position, and we'll continue to operate there.
And to try to answer your question, the days, that's probably more of a function of when you're in -- where you are in the cycle, whether you're in the upturn, the downturn, the peak or the trough, and that kind of drives your inventory days more than anything else.
All right. Jim, thanks for the question. We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
Thanks for hosting this call. Haviv, with the renewed focus on embedded over the past sort of five to six years, you obviously added to that embedded capability with the recent acquisition of Silicon Labs. But as you've expanded your mass market strategy embedded, what's been TI's recent track record of attaching analog and power management products to new embedded opportunities and vice versa, right? Any way to quantify analog and power dollar content attached to new embedded opportunities?
Yes. I will provide, Harlan, a similar answer to the one I provided during the call we had earlier this month related to the Silicon Labs acquisition. It's always good to start from the embedded processing socket, whether it's a wireless connectivity solution, whether it's an MCU, a low-power MCU or a very advanced high-performing MCU all the way to low-power processors and DSPs, right?
So, as I mentioned, customers always like to start with the center of the board. And in many cases of our applications across the analog and embedded market, that is the embedded processor. And we are seeing definitely with the growing portfolio of our embedded processing parts, and we are just releasing to market every year more and more parts. I think we are now at a 6x rate versus six years ago. We are seeing more opportunities to attach the periphery, mainly analog parts, whether it's power or signal chain around that, what I call Alpha socket, right? So we are seeing this opportunity. We are seeing this on our assigned accounts, where usually the first discussion with the customer is around that embedded processing socket.
But also on ti.com, we are seeing more and more looks into our system solutions that are displayed over there. We also have some -- a whole product portfolio that provides software, application code, sometimes even the whole module or board that we provide to our customers, and we are seeing an uptick there. I will also say to me, it's only the beginning, right? Our embedded processing strategy has pivoted 6 years ago, but we have so much work to do. I mean the backlog here, the creative backlog we have in front of us is very, very broad. And we are getting our machine to become more and more efficient to go after it.
Do you have a follow-up, Harlan? We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Yes. So with SM1 cleanroom complete, Qs complete, early ramp this year, SM2 shell complete, LFAB2 clean room continued build-out, you're obviously executing to a number of CHIPS Act milestones, right? You've got the CHIPS Act ITC, which is 35%, still have $1.6 billion in direct funding or grants to capture. I think last year, you guys captured about $335 million of CHIPS Act incentives. If you hit your build-out and ramp targets for this year, how much in CHIPS Act incentives do you target to capture in calendar '26?
We don't have a forecast per se for '26, but let me first kind of review the actuals, what I can tell you. In '25, we received cash benefits of about $670 million. That is primarily ITC. There was some direct funding there, about $75 million of direct funding and direct funding meaning the grant. Moving forward, we expect -- we continue to expect ITC now at 35% because last year and the years prior to that was 25%. So now it's 35%. And the remaining up to $1.6 billion in direct funding, including what we released in the most recent 10-K that we just received $555 million this quarter, in first quarter from the grants. So, beyond that, what I could tell you is going to depend on CapEx, and U.S. CapEx. So the ITC is 35% of U.S. CapEx, and then the direct funding, the remaining of the $1.6 billion minus the $75 million and $555 million that we already received.
Thanks for the question, Harlan. We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Stacy Rasgon with Bernstein Research.
Haviv, you talked about thresholds or criteria for acquisitions, strategic as well as financial. I was wondering if you could go into a little bit into those financial conditions. I guess, how do they compare now versus what you used to talk about those in the past? I have to assume that the returns that you're willing to live with today are lower than they were before. And I guess how does SLAB like fit into those financial criteria? Like what is it about SLAB that actually meets those?
Yes. First, just I would say that the threshold has not changed. I think the position of the company has changed, Stacy. And we always said from our point of view, acquisitions will be centered around analog and mixed signal. I would put Si Labs in the mixed-signal bucket. And first, it has to make sense strategically. And as we discussed earlier this month, we love the portfolio that we saw from Si Labs. We love the position they have. Both market position, 85% in industrial across many, many end equipment. And at a very nice rate of growth of 15% at the market that I believe is still in early phases of adopting this technology. There is a secular growth around wireless connectivity as people are adding more and more information into their system. And the best way to deliver that information on already installed infrastructure is wirelessly, as you know.
We also love the assets in terms of the technology. I mean, the engineers, the offering across hardware, software, application code tools, which is something that we wanted always to augment in our embedded processing.
Now this is where Rafael keeps us very honest on every acquisition we look at, it has to make sense financially, and it was hard to make the numbers work five years ago when we had to keep these wafers running out of the foundries in Taiwan. So, in that sense, that's the main change that happened in the last few years. I have been, again, looking at Silicon Labs for many years. but it didn't make sense before. And now when you add OpEx efficiencies to the OpEx efficiencies, the COGS efficiencies, the number just add up.
And I'll let Rafael comment a little bit more on that.
Yes. I'll just add that we have always looked at an acquisition on the financial side from a lens of return on cost of capital and that it's accretive to cost of capital. So, within three to five years, and that is the case here. And return accretive to cost of capital, very simply, our weighted average cost of capital is about 10%. If the acquisition is $100, can we get $10 of free cash flow on a consistent basis starting on year three, four, five. And that is the case here with our expectations that we will get at and above and then above our cost of capital within that time frame.
Do you have a follow-up, Stacy? Stacy, do you have a follow-up?
Apologies. Yes. I wanted to just clarify just so I know -- have a good feeling where the loadings are. So, RFAB2, I guess, is now in full production given the 150-millimeter transition. It sounds like LFAB1 is in full production and Sherman 1, the shell is done and you've got pilot production and everything else is shells, I guess, LFAB2 and Sherman 2 and everything else. Can you just clarify, do I just have that right?
Not exactly. Maybe at full production to the installed 2, okay? If you go to RFAB2, we've installed, I think, more than 75% of it, close to 80% or 85%, but we still have a little bit of clean room over there, Stacy. And this is where we are in Phase III between RFAB2 and then SM1. We have the clean room, and we will install tools as demand picks up, okay? So that's on the RFAB2 case.
On LFAB1, we are still in the process. We have a big chunk of our revenue is in 45-nanometer, okay? So over there, there is actually more clean room available for us. And I think you know our 45-nanometer footprint is mainly on automotive, ADAS, high functional safety type of product. It just takes longer. That work is moving well and is scheduled to complete by the end of the year. So that allows us to continue to fill the clean room in LFAB1 according to demand. And just when we do that, and it depends, of course, on demand, LFAB2, shell is going to be ready towards the end of this year, beginning of next. And then we can build into it without further qualification. So that would put Lehi in Phase 3 as well. Hopefully, that helps.
Thanks, Stacy. We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Vivek Arya with Bank of America.
So, let's say, if you grow sales 10% this year and 10% in '27, what is conceptually the CapEx for '27?
Yes. I think I've answered it for 2026, Vivek, and it's going to be very close to that $2 billion number, as I mentioned, simply because we have always some -- we don't run the fabs at 100%, and I mentioned some of the clean room available. So -- that would be the lower number.
Again, if you look at 10% this year and even 10% next year, that's not a huge load on our company in terms of capacity expansion. Some of it maybe we will have to go into the back-end factories where we are more tight because the lead times on the back end are always lower to get tools. But in terms of the fabs, I think it's still going to be probably at similar levels in 2027 and maybe even lower. I think we'd have to leave that for next year's discussion.
Do you have a follow-up, Vivek?
Yes. And second question is, what is your inventory optimization strategy? Is the goal to keep inventory kind of at this constant, I think, $4.8 billion or so and then the days are -- whatever the days are. And then as demand increases, you push up utilization, but you still kind of keep at this $4.8 billion. You raised the target number, so I understand the goal is to be prepared for any kind of growth. But still $4.8 billion is a lot of inventory to have. So, I'm curious, are you targeting days? Or are you trying to make sure that you always have about this $4.8 billion of inventory on the balance sheet?
Let me start. I think Rafael touched upon it, and just from a high level, and Rafael can be maybe more precise than me.
But in general, we think about it as days rather than revenue first. And the second thing I would say you see a range. And again, nothing -- no cycle is a perfect sign wave going into -- up into the right, right, Vivek. But the way I think about it high level, you build inventory on the down cycle to a higher level of days just because you want to prepare for the future. And then as demand ramps, now it depends on the slope, you deplete it. You deplete because there is cycle time on the fab that is like three to six, sometimes nine months to get the chip out.
So the inventory serves for the surge of demand. As I reminded so far, the -- if you go back to the trough in 2024, it's not been a very strong recovery. It's moderate, right? So right now, we are not challenged, and you still see the days high, but who knows what 2026 needs to do. So this is why you see the 150 to 250, and I'll let Rafael provide more color on the mechanics.
Yes. I'll just add a couple of things. Remember, the key is our inventory objectives, which are to maintain high levels of customer service, keep lead times stable and minimize obsolescence. Keep in mind that we're a different company than we were a few years ago. We have more industrial, automotive and data center. We have more direct business, and we have now more internal loadings, right? So all of that supports higher levels of inventory, everything else being equal. So we're very comfortable with the levels of inventory that we have now.
Thanks for the question, Vivek. We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Joshua Buchalter with TD Cowen.
Appreciate you guys hosting the call. I wanted to start with a big picture one. So you've posted the metrics on Slide 10 a few years in a row now. Can you maybe just walk us through why you think this recovery has been more gradual than others? And what sort of signals that you guys are looking for and we should be looking for of when we would get that sharper recovery where shipments can actually start hitting that trend line?
Yes. I think the why is related to what happened before the recovery, right? Think about the cycle of COVID, probably the most pronounced or a very strong rate of demand growth in the -- coming out of COVID with a trough in 2019 and then a boom in '21, '22. Then a very -- customers got anxious, built a lot of inventory and I guess, more than we even thought originally, although they all swore that it's not double ordered and they did it for real products. We saw a very large and prolonged inventory correction. That's just the size of it is historic. The second thing is the asynchronous nature. We all talked about it. It's a very unique cycle because markets behave differently simply because the way we consumed electronics during COVID, that's kind of dispersed the behavior. I think that's what makes everything longer and more moderate.
And where we are right now, high level, we are, in essence, industrial automotive, data center company. That's our focus is 75% of revenue. As we said, although automotive was late to the cycle, there is so much content growth in automotive. the peak to trough was single digits, if you will, high single digits. And we already hit the level of the previous peak back in, I think, Q3 of 2023 -- sorry, 2025. And it's just doing well. Of course, we'll have to see how 2026 behaves, but we are continuing -- as I said in my prepared remarks, we are continuing to see generation to generation, just more features per vehicle. It doesn't matter what the powertrain is. We're just seeing that secular growth continues, and I think it still has a lot of runway in front of us. That's on the automotive side.
Industrial is a big unknown. It's a big unknown because it's still with all the -- it grew nicely in 2025, I think double-digit growth, about 12%. It grew nicely in Q4, close to 20%, but I think it has a lot of room to go, okay? We are still trending about 25% from the peak. And in our case, other than -- we have about 10 sectors other than aerospace and defense, they are all like 30%, 35% away from the peak. So, to me, there is -- that's the big opportunity, if you will, in 2026. And I think we said it also in January. We are seeing some of it coming in, right? Our booking accelerated in Q4. So far, Q1 trended as expected on the industrial side. So I think there is a lot of opportunity here because, again, secular growth in industrial is continuing and maybe in early innings.
The last one, I would say, data center is unique in the sense of it's just growing, right? I don't think we need to think about the cycle here. This is a secular growth because of the investment in data centers. As long as CapEx continues to grow and customers care about just the energy and energy efficiency and energy density, you will start -- you will continue to see a big opportunity there. We left Q4 with data center running at about $450 million, about 10% of our revenue, but the pace is very high. So I think this continues into the foreseeable future as long as AI and what it can bring in terms of efficiency to the economy continues, I see that as that trend continues. Hopefully, that helps. Mike, anything else on this one or...
Josh, do you have a follow-up?
Yes, please. Thank you for all the color there, Haviv. As we get out of Phase 2, I was hoping you could maybe comment on what's a reasonable floor for CapEx. So if I look back from 2015 to 2020, your average CapEx per year was around below $750 million. I mean, obviously, costs have gone up. But if we got into an environment where growth was slower than you guys anticipated and you didn't need to put in incremental capacity for Phase 3, what's a reasonable floor for how low CapEx could get in that environment as we think about a floor for free cash flow?
Yes. Again, first, Rafael, I think, made some important points about how much we've internalized our capacity, right? This is not only on the front end, also on the back end. And I call it maintenance CapEx. But even when you don't grow your overall revenue, there is always a mix change. And there is always one package you need more and the other package, you have what you need. So that is why I call it, there's always going to be some sort of a floor of CapEx. I kind of said I think 4% to 5% is a good number of revenue, but you don't need to grow just because you have to maintain your tools. You continue of course to go after packages and specific wafers that you are a little short about. There is always hotspots in our operations. And in general, we do -- we are going to do more than 90% internally. I think 95% or more on the wafers and probably a similar number on the assembly and test. So this is why you will see us running at probably that "floor".
Rafael, anything else to add here?
No, I agree.
All right. Thanks.
Thank you, Josh. We'll move on to our next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Tore Svanberg with Stifel.
Thank you for hosting the call. Maybe to follow up on the last question instead of perhaps dialing into a specific number, I think in the past, you've talked about maybe CapEx being around 3% to 5% of total revenues. I assume maintenance CapEx is kind of what that means, right, in relation to your revenue. So is that kind of the ballpark number we should think about, about 3% to 5% of revenues per year, obviously, starting in '27?
No, I think just to clarify, again, when I talked about, let's call it, 4% of revenue is when you don't need to support your growth, right? When we need to support the growth, I will let Rafael -- I think there is almost an equation that we can give you when you think about long-term growth and what CapEx needs to do. Rafael will comment on that.
But when you just have to run your factories, because we are now more -- running more of our capacity internally, we kind of modeled it internally at 4%. It could be, as you said, maybe a little higher, maybe a little lower. We'll have to see. Just because you have to maintain customer support, there is always areas where customers need more of certain parts, certain technologies, certain package types, modules, whatever you can think about the different permutations of our portfolio. And we will have to serve it. And of course, you have to maintain your factories to operate at a high level and some of it is just replacement and maintenance.
And Rafael, can you talk about what -- how to model long-term growth on the related CapEx?
Yes. So, as we've said before, over time, as we run in Phase 3, the modularity phase, what -- the way you should model our CapEx is taking our growth rate, long-term growth rate over years and multiply that times 1.2 to get your CapEx as a percent of revenue. So, for example, 10% growth rate would equate with 12% CapEx as a percent of revenue. And now keep in mind that, that 12% in that example, that is gross CapEx before ITC benefits and before DFA.
And just to remind everyone, this is not a math, right? There is always lumpy, but it gives you -- if you put it over the long term, that's what you will get, Josh, okay?
Thanks, Tore. Do you have a follow-up?
Yes. No, that was very helpful. And as my follow-up, could you just square the circle with your segments? I think you pulled some percentages out of communications to sort of adjust for the enterprise system versus data center. Was that kind of more communications exclusively related to data center infrastructure?
Yes, absolutely. And there is a Slide 11 that shows that for you, so you can actually see the -- from two, okay, slide. But in general, when you think about comms equipment, it was all about optical communication within the walls of the data center. People can choose how to define it. We define data center that everything within the building, okay? The same we do for automotive inside the car, there is communication technology also going as we know, right? But the way we define the new market is the clarity is whatever goes inside the data center, okay?
So comms, it used to be 5%, now it's 3%. That's a move on the optical communication technology moving into data center. You see industrial "losing a point". This is because of power delivery. The power supplies that we used to have under industrial in power delivery are now very unique for the data center. and they're not general purpose PSUs, and this is why it's smart to move it inside there.
And the last one was enterprise, right? Most of the data center revenue was already in enterprise. Most of it was what we call enterprise compute. But now you see data center at 9% of revenue simply because of the contribution from comms and industrial. Hopefully, that makes sense.
I would just add that there was a small portion that moved out of enterprise. There was multifunction printer, enterprise machine projectors that moved into personal electronics, which is why you see it went up a little bit.
Tore, thank you for the questions. We move on to next caller, please.
Our next question comes from the line of Matthew Prisco with Cantor Fitzgerald.
I guess to open, I would like to start on your thoughts on evolving customer relationships, potentially shifting to more system-level solutions versus historically more discrete kind of as you talked about with your ti.com and what you're seeing. TI, obviously, great product breadth. But how do you think about the ability to provide those more full stack solutions, including the software and tools where you can work with customers to actually solve a problem? And are there any changes in R&D focus that we should be thinking about around this dynamic?
We will always -- there is no change here because we've been always selling a complete solution. I think the evolvement of our portfolio is very helpful. We've talked about it around the embedded processing question before. It's always good to start from the big socket, right? If you have a processor, if you have a DSP, if you have a wireless connectivity solution, if you have an MCU, that's always a good start.
But I also would caution all of us that you need to have the best parts. Everybody can talk about solutions, but customers will take the best part for the socket. Even if you have the complete solution, they are not looking for -- to cut their R&D. They want to add value, and they will always select the best socket. Even in general purpose parts, if you don't have the right interface part at the lower size at the lowest power at a very affordable cost, customers will take you out of the solution. So I always caution my team that we cannot just rely on system selling. We do have to refresh our general purpose parts.
Of course, they usually get refreshed not as often, but you want to have the best in terms of size, power, cost. And the same on the application specific. The fact that you have a complete board doesn't mean that you get selected. The best part still wins. So that's the way we think about it almost in three vectors: customer, part, system. And that's the way we go after business in TI. That's been the case for more than 10 or 15 years now.
Do you have a follow-up, Matt?
Yes. Last quarter, you talked about depreciation being higher year-over-year. It would be great to hear if you have any quantification you can offer there. And then as we just think a little bit longer term, I mean, I think you have a roll-off of the RFAB2 and LFAB1 equipment, the initial installs there. But at the same time, you're bringing on new capacity. So does depreciation -- does that become a tailwind to margins at some point in the near term as we kind of see those dynamics play out?
Yes. So I'll -- let me restate what I said at the last earnings call, it's the same. No change in that guidance, but it's -- our actual for 2025 came in at $1.9 billion, about as expected. For 2026, we expect $2.2 billion to $2.4 billion. That range. That range is lower than what we had told you before, but it's what I mentioned in January. And then for 2027, we expect upward pressure on that number, but at a lower rate of increase. So $1.9 billion going up to $2.2 billion to $2.4 billion, take that midpoint, that $2.3 billion, that's a $400 million increase. We expect another increase, but at a lower rate than that going into 2027. And beyond that, it's going to depend on CapEx, right? So it depends the more CapEx we spend, then there will be more depreciation. But of course, we will spend that CapEx only to support longer-term revenue growth.
Matt, thanks for the questions. We'll move on to our last caller.
Our last question comes from the line of William Stein with Truist Securities.
First question is about the M&A strategy. Of course, that's a very important use of CapEx that we've seen come up recently with the Silicon Labs deal. The question I'd like to ask about it, someone asked earlier about the financial hurdles and how they might have changed, and I think you said they haven't. But in terms of the strategic hurdles, I'd really like to understand how potential deals enter the funnel because it's my understanding that this deal came about after another company bid on Silicon Labs and that triggered TI's involvement, which I found sort of odd considering the very long duration between this deal and the prior one. Maybe talk about how TI strategically thinks about deals and the process through which they get into your funnel of potential deals? And then I have a follow-up, if I can.
Yes. So, again, I think I mentioned before, and I'll let Silicon Labs disclose what exactly happened in this case. I don't want to comment about that. I would just say that I've been looking at this asset for a while, and the interest was growing over time as we brought our own wireless connectivity and MCUs internally into Lehi and really like the results. And the asset, as we said, is a very high quality.
Now regarding timing, you can never be -- it's never perfect, right? So it's something that you have to look at each opportunity case by case. And you if it makes sense strategically and to the owners of the company in terms of the financial impact. So, both criteria were met, and this is why we decided to make the deal.
Will, do you have a follow-up?
Yes, please. On another topic, you talk about investments in R&D, and that's very helpful. But one area that we haven't heard very much about is how TI could use artificial intelligence to either accelerate revenue growth or reduce costs. For example, I could imagine in product development where analog is known to be sort of talent constrained. Can you perhaps highlight for us how you're using AI internally at TI to improve your business?
Yes. I think -- again, I think we mentioned it maybe in previous calls, but I will just give you the three big ones that we -- I'm running at my level. Of course, there are many, many other smaller projects in the company. But I think the most interesting one for us is the top line growth, right? We have a very broad portfolio, and we call directly on less than 2,000 customers. So we have about 200,000 other customers that we never see. And this is where think about the technology that we have, the data, think about ti.com, the amount of just actions and people coming on our website and looking for parts to make sense of all of it, you really need these AI tools.
I think it has been done in many, many other industries before semis, but I think we have the scale to exactly do that. That's part of the reason we've offered all these e-commerce capabilities in the last several years. It gives us more, I call it, golden data that you can act upon. So we are already running projects here, and we are seeing a clear ROI, if you will, on this investment on product recommenders and how you can do system selling for the customers you don't call upon.
Now you can argue that over time, they can also do a better job than your sales team. But so far, it's not there, okay? So far, when we call on a customer, we do a great job. I would like the agents, if you will, to get to at least to show an improvement, and I think we are seeing that. So early phases of that, that's top line growth.
The second one is related to CapEx efficiency. Look, there is so much data collected in our fabs and ATs that we couldn't act upon many years ago, just too much information. And we are seeing already how you route the fab, how you do your start plans, how you maintain machines. Let's just quantify it. If you spend $5 billion a year on CapEx and now you get a throughput improvement of 10%, that's $500 million a year in terms of CapEx cost reduction, right? So we are seeing that these projects are coming to fruition.
I think we also alluded to it in one of our calls. We used to talk about 1.5x ratio between revenue growth and CapEx in terms of percentage of revenue. We are now talking about 1.2x. Rafael mentioned it before. That's really because of the efficiency we are gaining from the modern tools and the data that you can feed them. And I will say also that we are still seeing opportunities here. We are in the beginning of our learning cycle. We are seeing results, but more to come.
The last one is related to OpEx. To me, the way I look at it, very high level. Look, there is a certain level of OpEx and R&D you can afford. So our creative backlog is always large and interesting. So if I can get more output from the same, call it, R&D, that's very, very interesting, right? So we are looking at that. We're already seeing it in software design, a little bit on the RTL, but still not on the analog side.
On the analog side, we haven't seen great throughput improvement, but I think we are in early phases. I don't think the AI agent replaces a design engineer in the foreseeable future, but can we get more throughput from our dollar invested related to our efficiency, if you will, part of our strategy. That's something we always strive to achieve. I think there is something there.
On the SG&A side, I think we can -- we have a great service. Can we do it for less money? That's always an interesting area for us. So we are in early phases there. And I think that's also something that could be interesting. So think about top line growth, CapEx efficiency and OpEx. These are the three big projects that we are looking at the company right now.
Thanks for the questions, Will. So, before we wrap up, Haviv, do you want to make a few comments?
Yes. To finish the call, I want to thank all of you for taking time today to go through our capital management update. Let me emphasize a few points. First, we remain focused on consistent execution of how we manage capital. Our disciplined allocation of R&D is delivering growth from the best general purpose and application-specific products in analog and embedded processing. Our manufacturing strategy is a unique advantage and will continue to benefit TI for the long term. And lastly, we remain committed to returning all free cash flow over time to our owners. Mike?
Thank you all for joining us today. A replay of this call will be available on our website as well as the slides that were used on this call. Have a great day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Special Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
Texas Instruments — Special Call - Texas Instruments Incorporated
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Fokus: TI misst Erfolg am Wachstum des Free Cash Flow je Aktie; Kapitalallokation dient oberhalb aller Dinge diesem Ziel.
- 2026-Plan: CapEx gesenkt auf $2–3 Mrd, Ziel für 2026: >$8 Free Cash Flow pro Aktie (auf Konsensumsatzbasis).
- Märkte: Industrie, Automotive und Data Center machen ~75% des Umsatzes und sind zentrale Wachstumstreiber.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Fertigung: Ausbau 300‑mm‑Footprint (Richardson, Lehi, Sherman) zur Kostensenkung und geopolitisch verlässlicher Kapazität; Ziel bis 2030: >95% interne Wafer, >80% 300‑mm.
- Produktportfolio: Stärkere Gewichtung auf Analog und Embedded Processing; R&D-Bias zugunsten Industrial, Automotive und Data Center.
- Kapitalrückfluss: Kontinuität in Dividendensteigerungen (22 Jahre) und Rückkäufen; 2025 Rückgaben ~ $6.5–7.13 pro Aktie.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- CapEx‑Update: 2026 jetzt explizit $2–3 Mrd; 2027+ richtet sich an Umsatzwachstum.
- Inventarziel: Neuer Zielbereich 150–250 Tage (aktueller Bereich rund ~208 Tage wurde diskutiert).
- Fördermittel & M&A: Bis dato $630 Mio direkte CHIPS-Förderung (inkl. $555 Mio im letzten Quartal); ITC nun 35%. Silicon Labs wird mit Barmitteln und Fremdkapital finanziert; erwarteter Close H1 2027.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- FCF‑Sensitivität: Management: FCF je Aktie für 2026 abhängig vom Umsatz; zur Modellierung 75–85% Fall‑through von Umsatzänderungen verwenden.
- CapEx‑Modell: Floor bei ~4% Umsatz als Erhaltungs‑CapEx; langfristig gilt Faustregel: CapEx% ≈ Wachstum% × 1.2 (brutto, vor ITC).
- Fertigung & Ramp: Status RFAB2 ~75–85% installiert, LFAB1 weiter im Ramp‑Up, SM1 in Produktion; SM2 Shell fertig – modulares Hochfahren je nach Nachfrage.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Relevanz: Call bestätigt, dass TI auf FCF‑Wachstum setzt: geringerer CapEx 2026 schafft Cash für Dividenden, Rückkäufe und strategische Akquisitionen (SiLabs). Hauptrisiken bleiben Umsatzpfad, Inventarzyklen und Abschluss/Integration von M&A.
Texas Instruments — Silicon Laboratories Inc., Texas Instruments Incorporated - M&A Call
1. Management Discussion
Good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us today to discuss TI's acquisition of Silicon Labs. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations for Texas Instruments, and I'm joined by TI's Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan; Silicon Labs' President and Chief Executive Officer, Matt Johnson; and TI's Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi.
For any of you who have not yet read the press release, you can find it on our website at ti.com/ir. This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website, along with the presentation and transcript for your convenience.
This call will include forward-looking statements, including expectations or predictions of financial and business performance, industry outlook and timing of completion of the transaction, each of which are based on current expectations and assumptions and that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. These constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in the transaction press release published today as well as TI's most recent SEC filings for a more complete description.
With that, I'll now turn the call over to Haviv.
Thank you, Mike. It is great to be with you all this morning. Earlier today, we announced an agreement for Texas Instruments to acquire Silicon Labs, a leader in embedded wireless connectivity solutions with a broad portfolio, deep engineering expertise and long-standing customer relationships. This transaction represents an important milestone for our company and accelerates the embedded processing strategy we've been executing over the last several years. As many of you know, Silicon Labs has a strong portfolio in mixed signal solutions and low-power wireless connectivity and has demonstrated double-digit growth in the last decade. By combining Silicon Labs' wireless connectivity IP and engineering expertise with TI's internally-owned technology and manufacturing and reach of market channels, TI will enhance its global leadership in embedded wireless connectivity solutions.
I'll now take a moment to share why this transaction with Silicon Labs is strategically and financially compelling and why now is the right time.
To begin, this transaction enhances our global leadership in embedded wireless connectivity solutions and expands TI's portfolio with 1,200 additional products that support a variety of wireless connectivity standards. Wireless connectivity is a fast-growing space with more devices getting connected every day. Silicon Labs has a large and diverse customer base and has delivered about 15% revenue CAGR since 2014. This transaction also utilizes TI's industry-leading dependable, low-cost manufacturing capacity to provide customers with greater assurance of supply. We've also found a strong cultural fit. Our teams share the same high-performing culture and I respect Silicon Labs' technical expertise, winning spirit and strong results. Together, our teams will deliver cutting-edge products and technologies to meet our customers' needs.
Finally, from a financial perspective, we expect the transaction to generate compelling annual manufacturing and operational synergies of more than $450 million within 3 years after close. We expect the transaction to be accretive to earnings per share, excluding transaction-related costs in the first full year post close. TI is a great business model built around 4 sustainable competitive advantages. As a reminder, TI's competitive advantages are a strong foundation of manufacturing and technology, a broad portfolio of analog and embedded processing products, the reach of our market channels and diversity and longevity of our products, markets and customer positions. The acquisition of Silicon Labs will further strengthen all of TI's competitive advantages and drive free cash flow per share growth over the long term. In addition, Silicon Labs' comprehensive platform, including hardware, software, tools and services has earned them a strong reputation in the industry and a loyal customer base. Silicon Labs' strong engineering culture is expected to further advance TI's technology leadership. By combining Silicon Labs' comprehensive portfolio with TI's scale and competitive advantages, we will be better positioned to serve more customers and accelerate growth.
I would now like to turn the call over to Matt, who will share more about why this is an exciting opportunity.
Thanks, Haviv. It's great to be here today and have the opportunity to address you all. I share Haviv's enthusiasm for this transaction and truly believe TI is the ideal partner to accelerate Silicon Labs growth. It's an honor to be combining Silicon Labs with a partner with such a storied place in our industry, and I'd like to thank the entire Silicon Labs team for the sustained execution and dedication that made today's announcement possible.
Turning to our company for a moment. You've heard Haviv say that Silicon Labs has an intense commitment to engineering and innovation, and you can see that in the composition of our team. Approximately 70% of our employees are engineers, allocated across software and hardware disciplines. From my conversations with TI, it's clear that they deeply value the expertise that Silicon Labs brings to the table and that they are highly focused on identifying opportunities to scale our operations and optimize our manufacturing processes to better serve new and existing customers. Our focus on engineering, innovative products has earned us a strong reputation in the industry and we've built a loyal customer base, especially across industrial applications. Not only are we proud of the growth we've achieved over more than a decade, we've also worked hard to build a high-quality revenue base across thousands of customers. We've established diverse and long-lived positions across the industrial market in a broad set of end equipments. There are significant growth opportunities available and these will be further enhanced with TI's dependable and low-cost manufacturing capabilities and extensive reach of channels.
Thank you for the time today. And with that said, I'd like to turn the call back to Haviv.
Thanks, Matt. As I said before, Silicon Labs has delivered about 15% revenue CAGR over the past decade. We see additional opportunity for growth as part of TI, supported by increased customer access, manufacturing capacity and cross-sell opportunities. Silicon Labs' extensive wireless connectivity portfolio is an important part of the increasingly connected world, where we see secular content growth in areas like industrial automation, medical and energy infrastructure, just to name a few. With our direct customer relationships, sales force, website and e-commerce capabilities, we believe we can further accelerate growth. Manufacturing is a key differentiator for TI and is a core value driver for this transaction. Our manufacturing footprint includes low-cost 300-millimeter wafer fabs as well as internal assembly and test capabilities. This footprint will allow us to transfer Silicon Labs manufacturing from external foundries and outside assembly and tests into TI's facilities, providing their customers with dependable and affordable supply at scale. Specifically, TI's defined process technologies are optimized for Silicon Labs wireless connectivity portfolio, including our latest 28-nanometer process node. We expect the transaction to deliver meaningful synergies with efficiencies across TI's wafer fabs with optimized process technologies, low-cost assembly and test and our direct market channels. The transaction is expected to drive more than $450 million of annual manufacturing and operational synergies within 3 years post close. We expect this transaction to be accretive to TI's earnings per share, excluding transaction-related costs in the first full year post close.
I'll now turn it over to Rafael to recap the details of the transaction.
Thanks, Haviv. Let me now provide a brief summary of the transaction details. Silicon Labs shareholders will receive $231 per share in cash. We plan to fund the transaction with cash on hand and by raising additional debt. And importantly, we remain committed to our capital return strategy to return 100% of free cash flow to shareholders over time via dividends and share repurchases. We expect to close in the first half of 2027. The transaction is subject to regulatory approvals, Silicon Labs shareholder approval and other customary closing conditions.
With that, I'll turn it back over to Haviv.
Thanks, Rafael. In closing, this acquisition enhances our global leadership in embedded wireless connectivity solutions. It leverages each company's strength to better serve our combined customers and deliver sustained long-term value for TI's shareholders.
With that, let me turn it back over to Mike.
Thanks, Haviv. Operator, you can now open the lines for questions. [Operator Instructions] Operator?
[Operator Instructions] our first question today is coming from Timothy Arcuri from UBS.
2. Question Answer
Haviv, you've talked about cost synergies, but are there any revenue synergies? I mean it seems like SLAB has a very diversified customer base. Is there sort of anything unique in the portfolio that's synergistic with yours that unlocks revenue in your embedded portfolio?
Thanks, Tim. First, let me answer that what we presented today, the $450 million of synergies by 3 years after the deal, you can think about 2030 as a good time to think about that. That does not include any revenue synergies. Just to be fair, I think they are hard to measure, and I decided I want to run the math without any revenue synergies. Having said that, I think we will see some opportunities based on our very large sales force and ti.com. A wireless connectivity chip is what we call, I call an alpha socket, right? This is where customers are making one of the first choices on the board. But once you get that early look and you get selected, there is a great opportunity to cross-sell power, the sensing signal chain, et cetera. So I do believe the synergies are there, and our sales team is tasked to bring them on once we close the deal, but they are not assumed in the financial model.
Do you have a follow-up, Tim?
I do, yes. I think SLAB has a next-generation 22-nanometer process. How will you bring that internally? I think Lehi goes down to 28-nanometer.
Yes. So let me start first with what we have internally, and then I'll let Matt talk about their view from their perspective. First, TI is now -- 28-nanometer process is now in development. We are starting to see test chips coming out, I would say, the end of last year and more in 2026. I think it's a great time to offer that technology to the Si Labs engineers immediately after close. Now our 28-nanometer process is developed ground up for these type of products. If you think about the memory options, if you think about the way we've designed cost versus power versus performance, this is not a logic, I would say, first type of process development task. It's really done for TIs MCUs, wireless connectivity solutions, high-speed mixed signal analog and will serve very well the IP of Si Labs. I do believe that Si Labs proved over the years that they are very capable of moving between fabs. We've seen some of that -- some of these examples during our thorough due diligence. And I'll let Matt say a few words about that.
Yes, sure. Thanks, Haviv. Yes, I think the way to think of it is, our Series 2 platform is still early days in its life cycle and pretty experienced there and doing multi-foundry, multi-fab on that platform. And we're just starting to ramp Series 3, which is already expected to be multi-foundry, multi-fab as well. What's key about that is, as Haviv said, what TI has from a manufacturing perspective is extremely attractive to what Silicon Labs does. You have a process technology that's optimized for the exact type of products we do, which is incredibly exciting. So I think there's a tremendous opportunity to port in multiple areas. And given that we develop on a platform, you can port a few devices and really start to impact a lot of volume quickly. So it's a really awesome combination, and that's one of the reasons we're so excited.
Next question is coming from Vivek Arya from Bank of America.
I think the acquisition is a surprise because the narrative has been that TI prefers catalog analog and that your embedded business had been fixed after undergrowing for many years. I mean Si Labs is a great business, but it is not catalog analog. And I imagine there is some level of product overlap in Microcontrollers and connectivity. So the question is, what does Si Lab give you that your embedded business isn't able to do now or in the next 1 or 2 years? And does your internal road map get impacted? Are there any dissynergies that we have to worry about before this deal is able to close?
Vivek, thanks for the question. Let me say a few words first about our embedded journey. If you go back to maybe 10 years ago, as you remember, Vivek, all of our embedded products were done externally. We were focused more on a big chip type of big SoC type of solutions, maybe remnants of our old days of running big SoCs for wireless and also base stations. We have transitioned this business between 2019 and 2025 tremendously towards a more mixed signal type of business. Think about low-power MCUs with a lot of analog content. Think about real-time control with DSPs and for power conversion or for motor drive. And of course, our radar sensing solutions and wireless connectivity. I look at wireless connectivity as almost a twinner between analog and embedded. It is -- the content, if you look at the die of a solution, it is dominated by a lot of analog RF, power management and yes, some digital. This is a great fit to what we are building internally. So if you think about what happened in '22 and '23, we have acquired the site in Lehi for Micron. We have transitioned it from a memory fab into an analog mixed-signal EP fab, really focusing on 65-nanometer and now ramping -- starting to ramp 28-nanometer in terms of R&D and in production by the end of this year. If you look at the fit of the products, as Matt mentioned before, into that technology, we see a great fit. And we also have now experience of transitioning some of our portfolio from the foundries mainly in Taiwan into Lehi. We love the yield we are seeing. We love the throughput we are getting out of the fab. And that's an asset we never had 10 years ago. So to me, right now is the perfect time to go and look at more options to add into our portfolio, utilizing our competitive advantages. Specifically to your wireless connectivity question and the overlap, if at all, look, TI's wireless connectivity business is growing. It's growing slower than Si Labs, and it's also focused -- most of the momentum we see right now is coming from the automotive market. Si Labs automotive business is less than 5% of the revenue. They don't operate in wireless BMS, car entry, wireless TPS, et cetera, but they have a very strong position in the garage door opener in the car that we don't do. If you go to the industrial market, this is where you see a ton of momentum coming from Si Labs. They have done the work to build the stack of chips, software and firmware application level to support hundreds of end equipments. And we are very excited about that. This is something that would take TI, I would say, decades to replicate in order to be able to be a leader in this market. I think we could have, but it would have taken too long. So when you look at the footprint of Si Labs, that 85% of their business in industrial with such a rich portfolio of software suite and tools that are tailored to each and every application with a variety of standards that TI does not have, I think it's a great complementary portfolio.
Do you have a follow-up, Vivek?
Yes. Very helpful answer, Haviv. For my follow-up, just kind of a few clarifications. What is kind of the next few milestones from a shareholder or a regulatory perspective that we should keep in mind? And when is the earliest you can get Si Lab products onto your own fabs?
Yes. So again, when we -- let me start with the second part of the question, Vivek, and I will tell -- I will let Rafael also talk a little bit about what we expect in terms of time. But in terms of the 2030 COGS synergies that you see on the presentation, we have been busy in the last several years, transitioning a couple of 6-inch fabs into our own 300 wafer fabs internally. And we have learned what it takes. Luckily, in the case of Si Labs, we don't need to move hundreds of dies from one process to another. Actually, we talk about somewhere between 10 and 15 dies, which is actually very efficient. So that work can start immediately after close. And we believe that our plan presents, I would say, a nominal to conservative time to complete all that work by 2030. My expectation is that we hit the ground running as soon as we can, and we can do it even quicker, but that's going to be a little bit of upside to the COGS plan we showed you today. So I expect the teams -- and again, during the due diligence work that we've done, we see the fit of the platform and the team is eager to start to work as soon as we can. And I'm expecting us to meet or beat our execution plan. A little bit about the next milestone, Rafael, anything there?
Yes. So of course, the Si Lab shareholders need to approve this. That should happen within a few months. And then we need regulatory approval from multiple countries, and that's what takes until about the first half of 2027, as we said during the prepared remarks.
Our next question today is coming from Joshua Buchalter from TD Cowen.
This is Sam on for Josh. Congrats to both teams on the deal announcement. Building on an earlier question, am I correct in hearing that you're able to substantially bring the entire portfolio in-house? Or are there still going to be some products and processes that will remain at foundry?
I would say the answer is the vast majority, I think about Series 2 and Series 3. Matt has -- every company has some very nice, call it, legacy but very profitable tail of the portfolio. But I would say about 75% of the revenue of 2030 would be moving inside the TI. Matt, anything to add there?
Easy way to think of it is exactly that, and all the growth can move inside quite quickly.
Sam, do you have a follow-up?
Yes, I do. And then a quick one. Will this change how TI looks at their distribution strategy as it is today? Or are we going to kind of operate legacy TI in terms of how you use the channel or don't use the channel?
Look, in a high level, Sam, we see the channel as an advantage for the combination of the companies, right? Some of the customers that -- and we've reviewed, of course, during the due diligence, the customer base of Si Labs, and we are very impressed by it. But some of the customers they have, we support direct. And there is always a benefit in our opinion, to support customers direct in terms of the -- just the transparency, the information flow, the level of support we can bring in. And of course, also, there is a little bit of synergies on the margin that we can take into TI. All of that is, is part of the plan. There are customers that have continued to be supported for TI and for Si Labs by the disti partners, and I think that will continue. Our main disti partners continue to be the plan of record for us moving forward.
Our next question today is coming from Matthew Prisco from Cantor Fitzgerald.
Maybe to start, can you help break down that expected $450 million in manufacturing and operational synergies? How should we think about linearity of that synergy recognition here? Can you offer some more color on the primary drivers?
Yes. Again, I think we show a chart -- we showed a chart in our presentation. More than 50% of the synergies will come from COGS. And the more you weigh, the better it gets because by 2030, we don't complete the entire COGS transition, but I would say most of it. I think by 2031 or 2032, it's all done. So you can think about this as a growing number in terms of percentages. Of course, it's not immediate. We will try to do whatever we can, as soon as we can, but it takes time to develop the die, to qualify it to get customer approvals and qualification. And as I said before, we have a lot of experience with that. We've done it for 2 fabs with tens and thousands of customers and hundreds of dies, okay? This effort here is going to be, I believe, more focused, as I mentioned, 10 to 15 dies. And I would say the OpEx synergies are more immediate. Of course, TI is a very large company. Si Labs doesn't have the same scale of TI. So there are some natural synergies, obviously, on the SG&A side. But even some of the fixed R&D functions, if you think about areas like IT and your test team or your process definition or design team, that type of synergies are straightforward, and I think the Si Labs team will enjoy them from day 1. I don't know if that is the color you were looking for.
That's perfect. Yes. And then as a follow-up, maybe how should we be thinking about potential for incremental investment required by you guys in the front end to bring SLAB products in-house? And then maybe on the back end, how should we be thinking about your capacity to support SLAB needs and then potential further investments there?
Yes. So when we looked at the -- Si Labs run at a pretty good efficiency of revenue per wafer. Their cost of wafer is pretty high, but they still have a respectable GPM, I think, above 60% right now. So in terms of the load on our fabs, I would say, we just absorb it. You would not see a material change, if at all, on the -- our CapEx plan in the next 5 years. That would be my high-level answer. The same is for the assembly and test. Our volumes are well above 10 billion units a quarter. And we've looked at the volume of Silicon Labs, again, very efficient revenue per [ P ], as we call it, portfolio that would be easily absorbed in our existing assembly and test facilities. And the packages they use, namely QFN and a little bit of WCSP, we have the internal capacity there. So you can imagine or you can model "0 delta investment from our side".
Our next question is coming from Joe Quatrochi from Wells Fargo.
I was wondering if you could maybe just share a little bit more thoughts on just how you think about just the mix of cash and debt that's required for the deal. And obviously, you're going to generate a lot of free cash flow between now and deal close, but also talking about committing still 100% of free cash flow to dividends and share repos. So just any kind of help there in terms of how we should think about that? And maybe how much cash should you -- we think about you need to have on the balance sheet?
Yes. Let me take that. So first, as we said in the prepared remarks, we will use cash on hand and incremental debt right now. And while we do that, to answer your second question, we're committed to continue to return all free cash flow to owners of the company over the long term as we have been doing for many, many years. So with that combination of things, we'll issue incremental debt, probably in the neighborhood of $7 billion or so. That will be a combination of investment-grade bonds and then some corporate -- some commercial paper. And we'll issue that probably later this year, the investment-grade debt in order to -- and then the commercial paper will be closer to when the deal will close. I'll also add that the combined entity is expected to be leverage neutral within 18 to 24 months post close.
Do you have a follow-up?
Yes, that's helpful. Maybe just -- you talked about regulatory approval across multiple countries. I assume China is one of those?
Yes. We expect that to be one of the countries that we'll have to go through. Our business, as a reminder, in China-headquartered companies is about 20% of our revenue. I think, Matt, for you guys, it's a little bit less than 15%?
Right.
And we are planning to go through it. Again, I believe this is something that can also serve our China customers that allows Si Labs to be competitive across the geographies. China is always a market that is very -- the cost and leadership is very important to succeed there. And I think that our customers in China will value the combination. I do believe that we will get that through. I have high confidence that, as we said by the first half of '27, we'll get that approved.
Our next question is coming from Jim Schneider from Goldman Sachs.
I was wondering if you already addressed, I think, fairly clearly the synergy you expect from a portfolio perspective with Silicon Labs industrial presence in wireless connectivity and what that means to TI. Can you maybe tell or talk about any of the Texas Instruments native product portfolio that is going to be particularly synergistic in terms of Silicon Labs designs, think about the other way around.
Yes. Again, as I said before, Jim, if you think about some of the applications that we looked at some of the boards that they run. In the center of the board, you will see, I call it a wireless MCU, right? It's almost like the -- if you think about the servers, the main chip is the CPU or the GPU. In many of the applications where Si Labs is playing, the host, the master of the system is that wireless connectivity solution. So for us, it means great news. It gives you -- usually when customers design a board or a new system, they start with what I call this alpha part. And this alpha part will be the wireless connectivity in many, many applications. I'll let Matt say a few words about it in a minute. What we are excited about is everything around. Power management, obviously, many of the applications are battery based. There is also battery management that TI is a market leader in that will be important. Many times, the wireless solution collects information. So there is a sensing signal chain attached to the wireless MCU. We think that will let us a very early look into that and will help us to sell more sockets per board. And in some cases, the wireless connectivity solution is like -- it behaves like a front end and then you need a higher level processor or a higher performing MCU that can drive that. We have that also in our embedded portfolio. So Overall, I am excited about the cross-selling opportunity. But as I said, to be prudent and not to justify the deal on revenue synergies, it's currently valued in our Excel sheet at 0. We think it's going to be much higher. Maybe, Matt, you can talk a little bit about the applications you operate in and what happens when a customer selects your solution?
Yes, absolutely. Just the first thing I do is reiterate what Haviv said that at Silicon Labs, we've had more opportunity than we can keep up with in the core wireless space for a long time. And we've seen a lot of opportunity around the silicon in the areas that were just mentioned, but we had to focus on that one area. However, there's literally silicon all around that can support and not only support it, but can also, over time, allow further differentiation on the application and solution as well. So there's really something there that we just haven't been able to get to, but we will be able to do now. That's exciting. And if you just look across a few example applications, what Haviv said, pick applications that Silicon Labs has talked about historically, take in health care like continuous glucose monitors where you have core silicon, but you also have an analog front end that's right there that's supporting it. You put those together, you can do something special, and that's a huge opportunity. Same in electronic shelf labels. Think of metering, where there's this position across gas, water and electric, where if you can combine not only the compute and wireless, but all supporting analog and power management, you have a complete solution for customers literally. So there's quite a bit of excitement around this. And I think we're just seeing the tip of the iceberg of what's possible there over time.
Jim, do you have a follow-up?
Yes. Just quickly to clarify, would you expect to discontinue TI's sort of organic efforts or product lines in connectivity after closing this deal?
No. The short answer is, no. Again, we are -- the momentum we are building right now is predominantly on the automotive market. This is where we see the highest growth. Our revenue there is about 50% of our overall revenue. Our revenue is lower than Si Labs. Of course, once we get together, we can attack the -- look, the industrial market, we say industrial, but we are talking about hundreds of end equipments. And even when I talk with Matt, they themselves cannot attack all of them. So there's going to be some, I would say, better partitioning to utilize our joint R&D force. I'm also -- I want to add one more point that I think is very helpful for the synergies. Si Labs has a great software team that has been able to deliver not only the wireless stack, which is the bare minimum, which we do today, they also have a higher level of software that many application builders need. So you will see again that software suite running in the future on TI's portfolio. So there is not going to be a shutdown of activities or road map items in TI. There's going to be an acceleration of how we attack this broad market.
Our next question is coming from Stacy Rasgon from Bernstein Research.
For my first one, look, I'm probably characterizing this too harshly, so I apologize in advance. But the signal that I think you're sending -- and it seems like manufacturing is the key driver of this. So the signal that seems to be emerging for this is we built all this capacity, we thought we could fill it. We can't fill it and so we're buying stuff to fill it. So I guess why is that not a fair characterization, number one? And number two, the SLAB isn't actually that big. So maybe that's the answer they can't fill it. But I mean, should we be expecting more deals like this to leverage the capacity footprint that you have?
I think you've answered it in your question. That's not going to move the needle anyhow, Stacy. I think the reason we buy Si Labs is their position and their portfolio. And if you look at our pitch, I don't know if you had a chance to look at the beginning of today's call, that's what drove the excitement, that's what drove the enthusiasm of us going after this asset. I will say that every deal has to make sense financially. And the reason it does is mainly built on COGS, but that's not the reason we are doing this. As you said, in terms of wafers per day versus our overall footprint, because Si Labs is such -- has such a high-performing lucrative margin or revenue per wafer, it doesn't move the needle. But I do believe, and I'll let Rafael comment here that every deal has to make sense financially. And we are happy that our synergies are built on tangible. We have an exact plan die by die, how we're going to do it in the next coming years. I think that's very important. Many times deals are justified on revenue synergies that are harder to measure. I think the fact that we can do it in a very tangible way is very important.
Yes. No, this...
This is not a test case is what you're saying?
Say that again, Stacy?
I said this is not a test case.
No. I mean that I've been looking at Si Labs for many, many years. I think we were not ready internally based on our execution plan on embedded to go after it. But then I think about our embedded portfolio, Stacy, and I always mentioned low-power MCU, I mentioned real-time control. I mentioned wireless connectivity. I mentioned radar systems, right? I want to be a leader, TI should be a leader over the long term in all areas. We got to the conclusion that the best way to be a leader in wireless connectivity is with this asset. And I think we will certainly be once the deal closes. In terms of real-time control, I think we are heading there. We're seeing a ton of momentum on our DSPs on power conversion and motor control. In terms of radar, I think we are on our way to be there as well. It's just going to take several more years. The last point, and you said it's not a test case, if you -- maybe you are alluding to MCUs. I think MCUs in general, are harder to bring in. When you look at an MCU company, you look at tens of different architectures, probably thousands, if not tens of thousands of dies. When I talk with [indiscernible] and the team, this one we have to do organically. And it's going to take time. But we plan to be a leader in the low-power MCU market. I think we will do it inorganically -- organically rather than inorganically because doing it inorganically, it's, I think, impossible. So hopefully, that gives you a little bit of more color on the way we think about our future, Stacy.
Stacy, thanks for the questions. Moving on to the next call and our last [ caller ] for the call today.
Our final question today is coming from Chris Caso from Wolfe Research.
Rafael, just one quick clarification for you on something you said earlier. So if the plan is to borrow $7 billion against the deal, then is it right to conclude that this transaction wouldn't really affect TI's buyback that -- in terms of cash return to investors?
No, it will not. We'll continue to return all free cash flow to owners through dividends and buybacks over time. What the deal does is that we issue the debt in order to fund the deal, that way, the free cash flow stays available to return. And of course, this deal makes sense financially. So over time, we're going to grow free cash flow. We're going to accelerate the growth of free cash flow versus a stand-alone basis. So then we'll have more free cash flow to return to the owners of the company.
I think that's a very important point. I just I want to reiterate because that's how we review the deal with the Board. When we look at 2030, for example, of TI's free cash flow with and without Si Labs, it's obvious that our free cash flow per share will be higher with Si Labs. Moreover, we will have a great portfolio and a leadership in Wireless Connectivity. So that combination is a very attractive one.
Chris, you have a follow-up?
I do. And I guess just pointing out that this is the first significant acquisition that TI has made since, I guess, it was National Semiconductor, which is a while ago. So perhaps you could just talk about, has the philosophy changed here with regard to M&A? How are you thinking about that going forward? And what's changed in TI's thinking? And was it particularly Silicon Labs? Or is it perhaps a rethink in TI's position in M&A in general?
Short answer is no, no change. We always talked about analog and mixed signal as a target. I explained why we think an MCU portfolio is very hard to bring in because it's usually so diverse and dispersed among architectures and software suites and very, very hard to achieve the efficiency of the synergy when you bring it in. As I said, wireless connectivity or side, we land at our embedded processing organization. But I see it as a twinner between analog and embedded really a mixed signal solution, very diverse customer base on a very diverse set of applications on a very efficient die base. This is why we like the deal here, and this is why we'll continue to look at the future deal with the same criteria that we've looked at in the last 10 years.
Chris, thank you for the questions, and thank you all for joining us today. A replay of this call will be available on our website as well as the slides that were used on this call. With that, have a great day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Silicon Laboratories Inc., Texas Instruments Incorporated - M&A Call
Texas Instruments — Silicon Laboratories Inc., Texas Instruments Incorporated - M&A Call
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Deal: TI übernimmt Silicon Labs für $231 je Aktie in bar; Abschluss erwartet in der ersten Hälfte 2027; Finanzierung aus Cash sowie zusätzlicher Fremdkapitalaufnahme (~$7 Mrd.).
- Ziel: Ausbau der Marktführung in Embedded Wireless Connectivity durch Ergänzung um ~1.200 Produkte, Nutzung von TIs Fertigung (inkl. 28‑nm) und erwartete >$450 Mio jährliche Synergien binnen 3 Jahren; EPS‑akkretiv im ersten vollen Jahr nach Close (ohne Transaktionskosten).
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Fertigung: TI plant, 10–15 wichtige Dies von Foundries in eigene 300‑mm‑Fabs zu verlagern und damit COGS (Cost of Goods Sold) deutlich zu senken; 28‑nm‑Prozess wird aktiv für diese Produkte genannt.
- Cross‑Sell: Wireless‑Chips fungieren oft als "Alpha‑Socket" – frühe Auswahl ermöglicht Upsell von Power, Sensing/Signal‑Chain und weiteren TI‑Bausteinen; Software/Tools von SiLabs erhöhen Wert für OEMs.
- Portfolio‑Fit: SiLabs ist stark in Industrial (≈85% des Geschäfts) mit differenzierten Software‑Stacks; overlap zu TI in einigen Bereichen, aber keine Abschaltung von TIs bestehenden Roadmaps geplant.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Finanzen: Kaufpreis $231/Anteilschein, Finanzierung über vorhandene Mittel + ~ $7 Mrd. Neu: konkrete Synergie‑Schätzung >$450 Mio/Jahr innerhalb 3 Jahren und Zeitrahmen Closing H1 2027.
- Akzeleration: Management nennt explizit 28‑nm‑Testchips und einen klaren Plan zur schnellen Portierung wichtiger Produkte; Erlöseffekte (Revenue‑Synergien) wurden in der Finanzmodellierung bewusst nicht angesetzt.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Revenue‑Synergien: Analysten hoben hervor, dass TI Synergien im Modell nicht annimmt; Management sieht Cross‑Sell‑Potenzial, quantifiziert dies aber nicht.
- Integrations‑Timing: Nachfrage nach Tempo der Portierung und Linieneinbindung; TI nennt 2030 als Zielpunkt für hohe Hebelwirkung, frühe COGS‑Vorteile sollen schrittweise kommen.
- Regulatorik & Finanzierung: Zustimmung der SiLabs‑Aktionäre, mehrere Regulierungsbehörden (inkl. China) als Meilensteine; Ziel: Leverage nach 18–24 Monaten post‑Close wieder neutral.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Strategisch logisch kombinierbarer Zukauf: beschleunigt TIs Embedded‑Wireless‑Ambitionen, bietet klare Fertigungs‑/COGS‑Hebel und ist finanziell auf EPS‑Akkretion ausgerichtet. Hauptrisiken sind Integrationsausführung, regulatorische Genehmigungen und die bislang nicht eingeplanten Revenue‑Synergien.
Texas Instruments — Q4 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Welcome to the Texas Instruments' Fourth Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined by our Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan; and our Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi. For any of you who missed the release, you can find it on our website at ti.com/ir.
This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website.
This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in the earnings release published today as well as TI's most recent SEC filings for a more complete description.
I would like to provide you some information that is important for your calendars. On Tuesday, February 24, at 10:00 a.m. Central Time, we will have our Capital Management Call. Similar to what we've done in the past, Haviv, Rafael and I will share our approach to capital allocation and summarize our progress as we prepare for the opportunity ahead.
Moving on. Today, we'll provide the following updates. First, Haviv will start with a quick overview of the quarter. Next, he will provide insight into fourth quarter revenue results with some details of what we are seeing in our end markets. Haviv will then provide the annual summary of revenue breakout by end market. Lastly, Rafael will cover the financial results and our guidance for first quarter 2026.
With that, let me turn it over to Haviv.
Thanks, Mike. Let me start with a quick overview of the fourth quarter. Revenue came in about as expected at $4.4 billion, a decrease of 7% sequentially and an increase of 10% from the same quarter a year ago. Analog revenue grew 14% year-over-year. Embedded Processing grew 8%, and our Other segment declined from the year-ago quarter. The overall semiconductor market recovery is continuing, and we are well positioned with inventory and capacity to meet immediate customer demand.
Before I walk through our results, I'd like to share an update we've made to our end markets. To better reflect the growth opportunities we see for our Analog and Embedded products, we reorganized our end markets to include data center which includes sectors related to data center compute, data center networking and [ rack ] power and thermal management. As such, our end markets are now industrial, automotive, data center, personal electronics and communications equipment. With that as a backdrop, I'll now provide some insight into our fourth quarter revenue by end market.
First, the industrial market was up high teens year-on-year with recovery continuing broadly across sectors and was down mid-single digits sequentially. The automotive market increased upper single digits year-on-year and was down low single digits sequentially. Data center grew around 70% year-on-year and mid-single digits sequentially. Personal electronics declined upper teens year-on-year and mid-teens sequentially. Lastly, communications equipment declined low single digits year-on-year and mid-teens sequentially. In addition, as we do at the end of each calendar year, I'll describe our estimated 2025 revenue by end market.
Industrial was $5.8 billion, up 12% year-on-year and was 33% of revenue. Automotive was $5.8 billion, up 6% year-on-year and was 33% of revenue. Data center was $1.5 billion, up 64% year-on-year and was 9% of revenue. Personal electronics was $3.7 billion, up 7% year-on-year and was 21% of revenue. Communications equipment was about $500 million, up about 20% year-on-year and was 3% of revenue.
In summary, industrial, automotive and data center combined made up about 75% of TI's revenue in 2025, up from about 43% in [ 2013. ] We see good opportunities in all of our markets, but we place additional strategic emphasis on industrial, automotive and data center. Our customers across all regions are increasingly turning to Analog and Embedded technology to make their end products more reliable, more affordable and lower in power. This drives growing chip content per application or secular content growth, which will likely continue to provide faster growth in these end markets.
Rafael will now review profitability, capital management and our outlook.
Thanks, Haviv, and good afternoon, everyone. As Haviv mentioned, fourth quarter revenue was $4.4 billion. Gross profit in the quarter was $2.5 billion or 56% of revenue. Sequentially, gross profit margin decreased 150 basis points. Operating expenses in the quarter were $967 million, up 3% from a year ago and about as expected. On a trailing 12-month basis, operating expenses were $3.9 billion or 22% of revenue. Operating profit was $1.5 billion in the quarter or 33% of revenue and was up 7% from the year-ago quarter. Net income in the fourth quarter was $1.2 billion or $1.27 per share. Earnings per share included a $0.06 reduction not in our original guidance related to the noncash impairment of goodwill in our Other segment and other tax-related items.
Let me now comment on our capital management results, starting with our cash generation. Cash flow from operations was $2.3 billion in the quarter. Capital expenditures were $925 million in the quarter. In the quarter, we paid $1.3 billion in dividends and repurchased $403 million of our stock. We also increased our dividend per share by 4% in the fourth quarter to $1.42 per share, marking our 22nd consecutive year of dividend increases. In total, we have returned $6.5 billion in the past 12 months to owners.
Our balance sheet remains strong with $4.9 billion of cash and short-term investments at the end of the fourth quarter. Total debt outstanding was $14 billion with a weighted average coupon of 4%. Inventory at the end of the quarter was $4.8 billion, down $25 million from the prior quarter and days were 222, up 7 days sequentially.
Now let's look at some of these results for the year. In 2025, cash flow from operations was $7.2 billion and capital expenditures were $4.6 billion, as we continue to make progress on our capacity expansions. We're nearing the end of a 6-year elevated CapEx cycle that uniquely positions TI to deliver dependable low-cost 300-millimeter capacity at scale.
Free cash flow for 2025 was $2.9 billion or 17% of revenue, representing an increase of 96% from 2024. Our free cash flow growth reflects the strength of our business model as well as our decisions to invest in 300-millimeter manufacturing assets and inventory. This supports our overall objective to maximize long-term free cash flow per share growth, which we believe is the primary driver of long-term value. In 2025, we received that $670 million cash benefit related to CHIPS Act incentives.
Turning to our outlook for the first quarter. We expect TI revenue in the range of $4.32 billion to $4.68 billion and earnings per share to be in the range of $1.22 to $1.48. We continue to expect our effective tax rate for 2026 to be about 13% to 14%.
In closing, we will stay focused in the areas that add value in the long term. We continue to invest in our competitive advantages, which are manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, reach of our channels and diverse and long-lived positions. We will continue to strengthen disadvantages through disciplined capital allocation and by focusing on the best opportunities, which we believe will enable us to continue to deliver free cash flow per share growth over the long term.
With that, let me turn it back to Mike.
Thanks, Rafael. Operator, you can now open the lines for questions. [Operator Instructions] Operator? .
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Ross Seymore with Deutsche Bank.
2. Question Answer
I guess my first question is the first quarter guidance is significantly stronger than seasonal. And if my math is right, it seems like it's the first time you've guided up sequentially since right after the financial crisis. 15 years ago roughly. So is there anything unique going on by either end market or geography that's given you such an optimistic view versus relative or normal seasonality? .
Ross, thanks for the question. I'll take it, and I'll let Mike add some more color as needed. First, let's start with the fourth quarter. We have seen a typical fourth quarter, revenue came in as expected. But if you look at the [ year on year ] results, we are seeing recovery continuing in industrial. It grew close to 20%. I think it was 18% year-over-year. And remember that on the industrial market, we still have a lot of room to go when you think about the previous peak. So if you will, the compare is still easy for industrial to continue to recover.
The other market that I will highlight is the continued strength in data center. We are seeing this market now becoming a little bit more substantial as a percentage of our revenue. I expect this market to continue to grow in Q1. It's been growing for now 7 quarters in a row for us. And we left the year at about $450 million a quarter revenue footprint, and I think that continues as we move forward.
The last point I would say, we did see orders improving throughout the quarter. And what guides our guidance is the stronger bookings. Mike, I don't know if you want to add anything?
Yes. So we did see linearity revenue linearity through the quarter improve. So month 1 to month 2 to month 3, we did see it continue to build. Same with backlog, we saw that continue to build through the quarter. And also, as we've talked in previous quarters, turns business or when a customer comes in, wants an order shipped right away, we continue to see that run as well at higher levels. So that's factored into the guidance. Do you have a follow-up, Ross?
Yes, I do. Just a question on the gross margin implications given what you guys are talking about with revenue, it seems like you had a nice beat at least versus what I was expecting in the fourth quarter. Rafael, can you just talk a little bit about the puts and takes on gross margin in your first quarter guidance maybe throughout the year. If utilization is changing, if inventory levels are where you want it or if they need to rise, anything on that would be helpful.
Yes, sure. Let me start with fourth quarter, EPS came in a little better than expected. And once you account for that $0.06 reduction that we talked about in the prepared remarks, and that was a combination of revenue was a little better, mix -- and market mix was a little better, loadings was a little better and OpEx was a little better. So it was a combination of multiple things there.
On first quarter, we gave you the range on EPS and the range on revenue. I would tell you, assume OpEx is up low single digits, and you should get into a reasonable number for gross margin in the loadings will depend on demand and we'll adjust those as needed. Thank you.
Our next question comes from the line of Jim Schneider with Goldman Sachs. .
I was wondering if you could maybe relative to your prior comments, maybe address inventory levels and where you expect those to go? You talked about taking loadings down a little bit to bring inventories down and you accomplished that in the quarter. Do you think inventories are at a pretty good place either from a days or dollars basis would you expect to want to take them down a little bit further at this point?
Let me start, and I'll give -- I'll let Rafael add some color on this, James. So again, I think we said it along the fourth quarter when we had the chance that we are very pleased with the inventory position we have built. We are very proud of how we got there. It's across all of our technologies at the right level. So from a high level, the inventory, we are -- we have right now. That's an asset that allows us to serve customers, especially in the current environment, when we see a lot of real time just-in-time demand, the turns business, as Mike mentioned before, is high, and it allows us to support customers at a high level. Rafael, any more color on how you want to manage inventory moving forward.
No, that's it.
Yes. I mean, clearly, industrial and automotive are doing very well right now and that plus data center or your main focus. Can you maybe talk about sort of the prospects of a return to growth or a turnaround in the personal electronics and communications end markets and maybe some of the product areas like Embedded Processing associated with those.
Yes. So just on the -- maybe on the personal electronics market, it did grow for the year, right? The business grew at -- for the full year at around, I think, 7% for PE. And we just saw a little bit of a weak Q4, I would say, below typical seasonality. Maybe, Mike, you can add a little bit more color on what we've seen there in Q4.
Yes. So if you look inside the sectors there, home theater, entertainment, TV declined the most. On the other end of the spectrum, mobile phones actually performed the best out of that group. So it varied within, probably not inconsistent with what you've probably seen around subsidies expiring around in China for things like appliances and TVs. So -- it's also if you think about where personal electronics is and its timing of the cycle and where it is, it was one of the first to correct and also go through its recovery. So there's also a tougher compare than it probably has compared to some of the other end markets.
Our next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
Good to see the strong double-digit year-over-year growth in industrial. Haviv, last quarter, you talked about seeing some hesitation by customers in your industrial business, especially around manufacturing activity, things like factory automation, which is one of the largest segments of your industrial business. Are you still seeing that hesitancy that sort of wait-and-see posture by customers? Or is the order activity there starting to now pick up, especially among your China-based industrial customers?
Yes, it's a great question. I think from a high-level perspective, let's remember, industrial when I look at the quarterly revenue, even if I go back to Q3, which was, I think, the highest industrial quarter for 2025, it was still about 25% from the previous peaks in year 2022, right? So I do believe that the secular growth continues in industrial. We are looking at end equipment and generation to generation, we see just more content growth per system. So I expect industrial to establish new highs in the future. This is why I talked in the last quarter about maybe a more moderate recovery, especially on the industrial side.
And it did behave kind of seasonally in Q4. But as Mike alluded to, we are seeing a little bit of a pickup in orders, including in industrial. And I can't tell you why. We'll have to see how it plays out. But we have seen some noise in the last several months on some issues regarding a certain supplier. And sometimes, we all know about the memory shortages. So I don't know what makes the customers order more. We'll just have to look and see. I do want to remind us all that earlier in 2025, I would say, the first half of '25, we saw a pickup of industrial and then it kind of came down. We want to see how sustainable this wake up in orders is. And Mike, anything to add on the industrial side?
I think you covered it well. I wouldn't add anything to that.
Yes. [indiscernible] the last question. You also have previously mentioned the team is ahead on the [ Sherman ] fab build-outs and on track to complete the build-out of fab 2 this year. Can you guys just give us an update here?
And then on the potential of $2 billion to $3 billion of gross CapEx this year, I'm not sure if you guys are willing to articulate what that could be. But what is the size of the potential offsets, right? You've got ITC, goes up 35%, and you still have $1.6 billion in direct funding or grants to capture. Just wondering if you can maybe quantify that capture this year?
Yes, I'll start regarding the execution on the buildup of the fabs, and I'll let Rafael comment the rest of the topics, although we want to save something for the February call, Harlan. But first on the past year, we are very pleased about the execution in [ Sherman. ] It's actually ramped ahead of schedule, high yields. We also see with the new equipment that we have, really, the factory is more capable than we originally hoped. So a high level of throughput is being planned for this factory. So I'm very pleased with that execution.
And that will help us support our customers for the next 5 and 10 years. We have a clean room in [ Sherman ] 1 that is already have some production lines running. But remember, we also have the shell in [ Sherman ] 2, and we can build into this capacity if the -- if demand wants to be very strong, I think we can be in a great position to support it.
On the [indiscernible] side, also on schedule, I'm very pleased with the transition or the in-sourcing progress from our foundry wafers into [indiscernible] that's mainly an Embedded Processing comment that tailwind will continue for us in 2026. I think I've mentioned in '25, we've completed our 65-nanometer transition and they are yielding at the same level as they used to in the foundries. And now we are busy with our 45-nanometer technology, mainly supporting our automotive radar business, that's also progressing well in [indiscernible]. Rafael, anything on the ITC?
Sure. Yes. No. So Harlan, you asked about 5 or 6 questions in one, but let me see if we can -- Haviv addressed a couple. Let me address the next few. First on CapEx. We continue to expect CapEx for 2026 between $2 billion and $3 billion. So that's consistent with what we said before. On depreciation for '26, let me give you a new number. We now expect $2.2 billion to $2.4 billion on depreciation in 2026. And for 2027, we expect an upward pressure on that number but at a slower rate of increase. So if you look at what we've increased the last few years, just it will increase again, but slower.
You asked about ITC and direct funding. Direct funding did not change. We expect up to $1.6 billion as we -- in several milestones as we reach those milestones. And on ITC, investment tax credit, it is now 35% as of January 1 of '26. So anything that we put in place, any CapEx we put in place, both equipment, building, clean room in 2026, we get back 35% on the ITC credit.
Our next question comes from the line of Vivek Arya with Bank of America Securities.
For the first one, Haviv, what do you think is driving this above seasonal Q1? First of all, how much above seasonal is it? And then what role is the pricing playing in that because there is some discussion about price increases from some of your peers. So is TI raising prices in Q1? Is that part of what's driving? And how would you characterize this? How much above seasonal is it? And what's kind of the main driver of that?
Yes. Let me just say for the second part of the question, the answer is no, it's not pricing related. Regarding the seasonality, it's more or less maybe a little bit about seasonal, right? We usually see low single digit to flat quarter. I think we've guided what?
Low single-digit decline...
And again, the reason, Vivek, is orders, we are just seeing growing orders, and it behaved the same through the quarter. I can't speculate on what, but I do know the industrial market, there needs to be a correction. And the second point is data center is now a bigger part of our business, so it starts to move the numbers for us, right? This is a market that is now growing every quarter, and it's not insignificant. So I think that also helps to change the guide compared to previous years. Mike, anything else on the seasonality?
No. I think you called it out on seasonality.
Yes. For my second question, there's a lot of talk of higher memory pricing impacting demand for consumer electronics, PCs, phones, automotive. Have you seen it already? Have you heard that as a concern from your customers? And how are you thinking about the auto market right now? And just is memory pricing a headwind at all for your businesses that are exposed to consumers?
High level, we -- I would say that we haven't seen any implications although then that would be a speculation on my side, but it could be that when customers are seeing some issues on the memory side. Do they want to replenish some of their inventory. That could be always the case. And Mike, I don't know if you've seen any examples of...
Yes. But all I would add though is -- and we've heard about it, obviously. And I think not necessarily specifically that scenario, but it could be that, but also when a customer doesn't necessarily have everything need to complete their bill of materials, when they finally have those parts they need, sometimes they'll come in very quickly and want to order parts. We did see some of that where customers come in the last minute, want product [indiscernible] right away because they've just completed a bill of materials, could be related to that or other different things.
Our next question comes from the line of Timothy Arcuri with UBS.
Rafael, I wanted to also ask on CapEx and sort of how quickly it's going to fall off. I think you said this year, $2 billion to $3 billion, but the math would then say you're going to kind of exit the year like run rating something like $1.5 billion. So the question is then, can it go lower than that? Because I seem to recall a comment at our conference in December that it could go like lower than 5% of revenue next year. So that would put it down to like $1 billion in that -- like that kind of being a floor. So can you kind of talk about that? Could it go that low next year?
Tim, let me start with the second half, and then I'll let Rafael answer the first part. I made the comment because I was asked about maintenance CapEx, what is maintenance. We always have to spend money to fix equipment, to buy replacement parts, et cetera. So I characterized it as kind of mid-single digit or revenue, that's always kind of a run rate you can think about. There's never 0 in an [indiscernible] like TI. That was my point. This is when you don't have growth, right? Now I'll let Rafael talk about CapEx beyond the maintenance.
No. So for this year, for 2026, $2 billion to $3 billion, and there's a range there. So if we go through the year, we'll update you on on that number.
And then beyond that, what we've said it's about 1.2x long-term revenue growth. So you pick a number for revenue growth, you do 1.2x, so 10%, you get to 12% CapEx intensity, but that's a gross number before ITC benefit. So once you get those ITC benefits, you essentially get back to one-to-one that growth rate. So whatever growth rate you assume you kind of get back to a net capital intensity of about the same level.
So I also wanted to ask about loadings. It looks like cash gross margin is up like 50 basis points or something in March. So that would kind of suggest that loadings are going up just a smidge. And the bigger question is sort of are you thinking about loading that you want to keep inventory sort of in this [ 4.8 ] range and you just want to match loadings with demand from here? Or do you want to bring inventory down over time versus that [ 4.8 ] number.
As Haviv said earlier, we're very pleased with inventory levels. That's good inventory in a number of fronts on the buffers that we have and the position that we have to support potential revenue growth. The same goes with capacity. We are well positioned with capacity. So we'll adjust those loadings as needed, depending on what we see for demand for the rest of the year.
Our next question comes from the line of Thomas O'Malley with Barclays.
Haviv, in your outlook for March, you talked about strength in data center, recovery in industrial continues and bookings are improving, turns are good. There was no mention of auto there. You guys have said previously, maybe the auto business is a little bit slower off the bottom than industrial. Any update on the auto business and how that trended through the quarter and kind of your updated view there.
Yes, great question. On the automotive market, I think we -- I think in Q4, we were slightly down. And we did see strength in the automotive in the second half of this year, right, in Q3 and Q4. It's back to the level more or less of the peak, somewhere in 2023. This is an automotive peak. Remember, automotive was last into the cycle, right? If you go back all the way back to the COVID cycle, they are the last ones to peak. They peaked in Q3 '23.
But the -- I think what's happening in automotive and it continues to happen in secular growth continuing. So generation to generation, model to model, we just see more content per vehicle. Even if it's an ICE, a combustion engine vehicle rather than EVs. Strength in China continued in Q4. And typically, in Q1, if I need to comment about Q1, typically, Q1 is a quarter where, at least in China, we see always -- with Chinese New Year, we always see a seasonally down quarter. I expect that to be the same in Q1. But again, we are -- we've seen a single-digit drop versus the peak in automotive, back to the same levels and I think secular growth continues into the foreseeable future, at least for the next 5 years.
Yes. I just wanted to clarify a comment earlier. You mentioned that pricing didn't have anything to do with the above seasonal margin. You talked more about these end market trends. Is that because you've raised pricing previously, you plan to in the future? The reason the question comes from, your competitors are talking about an increase in pricing early in 2026 and being very clear about that. Do you guys feel like you don't want to do that? Or is it just something you'd rather not comment on?
I think we've been clear along the year, and I'll just repeat it, and Mike, you can add a little bit more color, but -- we said that we expect the pricing -- price -- we have 80,000 products. Prices always go up and down. But for the company, the overall price effect like-for-like in '25, we expected it to be low single digits down. Now we finished '25, it was exactly there. When you say low single digits, think about 2% or 3% down.
That's my assumption for 2026. That's what we expect the market conditions to be. If anything changes with pricing, as you know, we'll see -- of course, TI will respond. But right now, that's our assumption moving forward. That's why I was so convinced that the Q1, I think we have a little sequential growth there. It's not due to pricing. Mike, anything to add there on the pricing side?
No, I think you called it out, a base case assumption of low single-digit decline over time. We'll have to see what the market presents to us, but continue to expect...
Definitely no step function planned in Q1. Actually, usually, Q1 pricing usually goes down a little bit because of yearly negotiations. That's usually what we see in Q1.
Our next question comes from the line of Josh Buchalter with TD Cowen.
I wanted to [indiscernible] little bit more. Any details you can give us on the exposure across power, Embedded and maybe non-power Analog parts and 70% growth is a pretty big number. Any sort of handicap here, what you're willing to give us on what that business could grow over the medium to long term?
Yes, definitely. I can take that. So again, data center has grown nicely, as you said, in 2025. CapEx continues to be invested in data centers. We expect that growth to continue.
In terms of our position, most of our business is based on the Analog side. And there is also -- there is -- between power and [ signal chain, ] I would say it's kind of maybe a little bit more power, but both power and [ signal chain ] are very strong in data center. We see a lot of opportunity a lot of diversity of parts.
I know most people like to talk about a specific socket, if you call it the VRM or the [indiscernible] voltage regulators, that's always a large -- very large socket. But if you look at the [ rack ] and you open it up, there are thousands of different parts, and many of them are analog and embedded parts and TI plays across the board there.
As I've mentioned over the years, we have also invested in our technology to be able to support the higher power, call it, rails. Think about the [indiscernible] this is where a lot of the current going into an accelerated computer or a CPU come from, and TI is building the technology in [ Sherman, ] Texas. This is where our BCD process is serving us very well there. That product is sampling and we expect our opportunity in data center to further expand in the coming years.
So TI plans to play across the different sockets in data center, and I see it as long as CapEx continues into this market, I see the opportunity as an attractive one.
Yes, [indiscernible] interesting several years for the analog industry. And for a while, you talked about the benefits of your U.S.-based [indiscernible]. Do you feel like rapid [indiscernible] a lot of more on inventory, but really at the point where we expect TI can [indiscernible] normal amount yet?
So Josh, I think there was a little trouble on the line, but I'm going to repeat what I believe the question was, and then we'll answer it. So I think it was talking about the cycle and how it's been playing out. And with the capacity that we have in place, are we in a position to be able to get back to market share gains.
And maybe if you want to start with the answer? I can also answer as well.
Was that the question?
Yes, close enough.
Yes. As we said, look, cycle -- this cycle has recovered slowly. We just forget about TI, just look at the overall unit trend. You can look at units without memory. You can look at IC. It's been 1 of the slowest, if not the slowest recovery ever in our history at a time where I think more semis are used in our life. I mentioned the secular growth in automotive. We see that across many, many end equipments in industrial across the board, just more content per system. That's just -- and of course, the investment in data center that are becoming more and more substantial even for the Analog and Embedded Portfolio that we have.
So I do believe that there is going to be a point of time where you -- all this capacity we put in place and the inventory that we've positioned is going to serve us well. We have seen cases where it served us very well with an immediate response to customer needs and our customers value that a lot. And I believe there is more to do here. So let's see how the market wants to continue and develop.
One thing is very clear to me, end equipments are being redesigned with more semis every day. It will continue to be the case in the future. This is why I'm continuing to stay very optimistic and encouraged by the investments we've made in the past several years.
Our next question comes from the line of William Stein with Truist.
First, I'm hoping you can talk a little bit more about the strong bookings you referred to. Would you be able to disclose the book-to-bill to us? And maybe even more interesting, has the duration of your backlog changed at all in the quarter?
So maybe I'll take that one. So well, we did see throughout the quarter backlog did build. And I think, first of all, it's important to remember that we transact most of our revenue direct with our customers, meaning that we don't sell through a channel. So we do see things typically pretty real time. And that's part of the reason you heard us talk about the fact that we have seen our turns business also exhibit strength over the last several quarters.
I don't have a number specifically to provide you for what bookings did, but it is reflected in our guidance. And I think going back to what Haviv said about where our end markets are, industrial is going through recovery. And we saw that in the fourth quarter, you've got a data center end market that is growing for, I think, 7 consecutive quarters. Those are all part of what factor into how we think about our guidance.
Yes. I mean I'll ask maybe the same question a little bit of a different way. Are you seeing either based on customer willingness to place the orders or because of your own lead times to customers, have you seen an extension in the orders further out into the future?
The shorter answer is yes. But again, not because of lead times. Our lead times are very competitive, unchanged, I think, on average, below 13 weeks, many of our parts at 6 weeks. Part of our ambition and objective as we prepare to the next cycle, was to be -- to be able to maintain very competitive lead times across the cycle. So far this cycle has not been very tough to meet, right, as I said, been a slow recovery, but our lead times continue to stay very, very competitive, probably the lowest in the industry, and our inventory position allows us to support customers.
So I don't think customers are placing -- I mean they are placing orders a little bit more forward, but they have the ability to change their opinion even within this quarter. This is what Mike mentioned before. Our terms are very friendly, very customer-friendly. We want customers to be showing us their demand real time and we are willing to carry this inventory, especially when it's so diverse and long-lived to increase customer support. So that would be my high-level comment. Mike, anything else about what we see into the longevity of the inventory?
Well, the inventory that we have in place has incredible longevity.
No, no. But on the orders...
Yes. I'd say that if you look at -- does a customer need to put long-term backlog in place when lead times are stable, they probably don't feel like they have to necessarily. So nothing to spike out that I would say, but what we have seen is a lot of customers wanting to come in, walk product quickly. That isn't something we've seen build over the past several quarters. .
Our last question comes from the line of [indiscernible] with Wolfe Research.
I guess the first question is a clarification of some what you said about factory loadings, and you did say that you'd adjust loadings according to what you saw with demand and take into consideration that you reduced those loadings more recently, are there any plans in place now to increase those loadings? And what would you need to see in order to take those steps?
What I would tell you is that if we had something significant changes like we did back in the third quarter, we would tell you. We are not making any disclosure right now on on which way the loadings are going. So it's just -- there's nothing significant versus where we've been running in the fourth quarter.
And I'd just add that part of that is we have the ability to make those adjustments as we see things occur, and that's part of the flexibility we have in our manufacturing to be able to do that. .
It's related to geographic revenue. You made some comments on China. Obviously, you have the New Year holiday that hits in the first quarter. But if we look at the different regions, how does that stack up against what you would expect for normal seasonality in each one of those regions in the first quarter?
Yes. In general, I think we haven't seen anything specific on -- the only comment I made, Chris, before was that typically, Q1 in China for automotive is lower just because of Chinese New Year. But I think from a where the backlog comes from, it's been pretty even, right, across the geographies, Mike?
And then maybe I'll just talk about last quarter, what we saw and we don't have a guidance by region for the top level. But China came in right about on a sequential basis, pretty much in line with what we saw at the top level, down about 7%. On a year-on-year for fourth quarter, it was up about 16%. So didn't see something on a sequential basis that stood out very differently there compared to the overall top-level results. .
And I want to make -- maybe before we -- I'll let Mike finish the call. I want to make one more comment on the orders and everything. I just want to remind us all that TI has invested in capacity and inventory over the last 3 or 4 years to be exactly ready for this type of environment, right? We've seen a lot of real-time demand coming in, in Q4, which we were able to support. We are seeing a little bit of strengthening in the orders right now in Q1.
And we'll see how long lived it will be. The market has been jittery in the last 12 years -- 12 months, sorry. And we'll just have to see how it plays out. This is also related to Rafael's comments about loading. We have the knobs to turn as needed. And we have the inventory to allow us time to adjust our loading, for example, as we go. So we are in a very good position as we come into 2026. We worked very hard to get to you, and I'm very proud of our execution. And we'll be ready for any scenario that the market wants to present to us. [indiscernible] Mike.
Yes. Thank you, Haviv, and thank you all of you for joining us today. Again, as we mentioned earlier, we look forward to sharing with you our Capital Management Call on Tuesday, February 24, at 10:00 a.m. Central Time. A replay of this call will be available shortly on our website. And with that, have a great evening.
Thank you. And this concludes today's conference, and you may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Q4 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $4,4 Mrd. (−7% QoQ, +10% YoY)
- Bruttomarge: 56% (Bruttogewinn/ Umsatz), −150 Basispunkte sequenziell)
- Betriebsgewinn: $1,5 Mrd. (33% Marge, +7% YoY)
- EPS: $1,27 (Earnings per Share; inkl. $0,06 Nicht-Cash-Wertminderung)
- Cash & Kapital: Operativer Cashflow Q4 $2,3 Mrd.; CapEx Q4 $925 Mio.; Free Cash Flow 2025 $2,9 Mrd. (17% Umsatz)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Fokusmärkte: Stärkere Gewichtung auf Industrial, Automotive und Data Center; diese drei machen ~75% des Umsatzes 2025.
- Fertigungsvorteil: Abschluss der 300‑mm‑Investitionen und schnellere Ramp‑Fähigkeit (Sherman‑Fabs) als Wettbewerbsvorteil, um Verfügbarkeit und niedrige Kosten sicherzustellen.
- Kapitalallokation: Disziplinierte Rückführungen (Dividende +4%, Aktienrückkäufe) bei gleichzeitigem Abschluss eines erhöhten CapEx‑Zyklus zur Maximierung des langfristigen Free Cash Flow je Aktie.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Q1‑Leitlinien: Umsatz $4,32–4,68 Mrd.; EPS $1,22–1,48. Management sieht Q1 leicht über Saisonalität dank verbesserter Buchungen.
- 2026‑Prognosen: Effektiver Steuersatz ~13–14%; CapEx 2026 $2–3 Mrd.; Abschreibungen $2,2–2,4 Mrd.
- Risikotreiber: Nachfrage‑Nachhaltigkeit (insb. Industrial/orders) und Preisentwicklung; ITC (Investment Tax Credit) 35% ab 2026 und bis zu $1,6 Mrd. direkte Fördermittel mildern CapEx‑Nettoeffekt.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Saisonalität Q1: Analysten hinterfragten ungewöhnlich positive Q1‑Leitlinie; Management führt dies auf stärkere Buchungen, Turns‑Geschäft und Data‑Center‑Wachstum zurück, nicht auf Preissteigerungen.
- Inventar & Loadings: Inventar $4,8 Mrd. (222 Tage); Management sieht Inventar als Vorteil zur Bedienung kurzfristiger Turns, will Loadings flexibel an Nachfrage anpassen.
- Data Center‑Dynamik: Data Center +64% YoY (2025); Nachfrage breit über Power und Signal‑Chain; Management erwartet anhaltendes Wachstum, wenn CapEx der Kunden anhält.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Bewertung: Call signalisiert Übergang von Investitionsphase zu Erntephase: TI profitiert von strukturellem Content‑Growth in Industrial/Automotive/Data Center, hat hohe Liquidität und abgestimmte CapEx‑Pläne. Kurzfristig bleibt die Entwicklung der Auftragseingänge und die Nachhaltigkeit des Data‑Center‑Trends entscheidend für das weitere Gewinnwachstum und die Kapitalrückführung an Aktionäre.
Texas Instruments — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good morning, and good afternoon. I'm Tim Arcuri. I'm the semi and semi equipment analyst here at UBS. Very pleased to have Texas Instruments with us next and very pleased to have Haviv Ilan, who is the President and the CEO of TI. So thank you, Haviv.
Thank you, Tim. Good to be here. Thanks for having us.
Great. Well, Haviv, let me just start by a question that I'm sure you're getting all day and I get a lot, too, that your recovery sort of came out of the gates pretty strong. You were above seasonal a few quarters and things have sort of come back to being more seasonal. So can you just talk about some of the drivers and maybe some of the puts and takes that are occurring in each of your bigger end markets?
Yes. When I look at '25, we are in a recovery. If I go back, I think we almost like had a 0 growth in Q4 2024. So finally stopped declining. And then in '25, every quarter, we saw growth. It's in the double digit. I think company at the midpoint for '25 is somewhere around 13% growth. But you are right that it was not smooth. So we have seen a building momentum in the earlier part of the year. Q1 and especially Q2 with all the tariff noise, it was really hard to decouple what is the root cause or what's driving that recovery. But it took a little bit of a step down in Q3. So if I look at it over the last year, we see a recovery. It's a double-digit recovery.
We can also see it on the unit trends when you look at the market, not only TI, -- but it's kind of a slow recovery. It's a moderate one. You can go back to more or less 2000 to see a similar recovery. And I think there's simply a lot of uncertainty in the market right now. And also, there was a little bit of a synchronous behavior during the up cycle that is now playing in a down cycle. So we are trying to stay away from trying to call the shape of the recovery. From now on, we will tell you how we do once we finish the quarter.
But I am pleased to see all markets are recovering right now for us. In some areas, we are seeing a new peaks of revenue established, specifically on data center and also in the automotive market, we got to the same level of 2022, so -- or 2023 in the case of automotive. So I'm pleased with where we are. I think there is more room for the market to catch up and get back to trend line. We are still trending below trend line right now.
And can you just talk about some of the end markets as you look in December? You didn't call out any one end market in particular for your guidance. But maybe speak to some of the relative strength or weakness in industrial, all your different end markets in industrial. And then within autos, any geos that are stronger than others within auto?
Yes. I think, look, our main markets for TI, about 70% of our business are industrial and automotive, and both of them are showing recovery. I think the recovery of industrial is more significant. It's in the double digit. But also, it trough the most, right? We saw a big drop back in '24. And if you look at where we are right now, and I think it's not a TI specific, we have still not established a new revenue peak. I think there is still room to go.
And we can talk about some of the macro issues that are creating that. But we do see industrial recovering fast, but still not at the levels where we saw it in 2022. The automotive market is behaving better in 2 ways. First, when it dropped, it didn't drop a lot. It was a single-digit drop, and now it's growing single digits. But I do like the fact that if I compare to the previous peak, it's at the same level.
And I don't forget that the previous peak was probably helped by some of these inventory buildup. So from an end demand perspective, I do like what we're seeing in automotive. I think it's related to the secular growth in automotive. I know that a lot of folks are concerned about how quickly EVs are getting adopted. But I think every vehicle is adding content from EVs to ICE to hybrids. On the industrial side, I think there is more room to grow. Now if you specifically about geos, I cannot think about the China market for automotive.
This is where EVs are gaining momentum. The OEMs there are doing well, not only in China, but also with the export business. And I think this market still has a lot of potential in terms of content addition. We are seeing a generation to generation. We are seeing just more content added to vehicles. I think this is still a growing trend. And I also like the fact that we are competing at a high level across geos, including China. So in that sense, these markets has been -- or specifically this automotive market has been doing well. Last but not least, I do want to add a little bit of a few comments about the data center market because it's becoming more and more significant.
It's still a single-digit percentage of the TAM, but it's moving very quickly. And I call it somewhere between -- for Analog and Embedded, somewhere around $5 billion to $10 billion, somewhere in between, but moving very, very fast, and I think it has a lot of room to grow in the future. So we also see the momentum over there. And this is where we see a strong momentum like all of our peers. Customers are continuing to invest. This is where there is no hesitation whether to put more CapEx into data center and TI is enjoying that trend among the industry.
And you're going to start to break out data center starting in fiscal '26 as a separate.
Correct. So in January, actually in the earnings call, we'll provide data center as a stand-alone market. You will see TI talking about industrial, automotive, PE or personal electronics, data centers and comms. These are going to be the 5 markets. And we are going to give a little bit of history also. So we'll make it history corrected. So we'll see 2025 and also how fast that market moved over the last years. And we'll report this market going forward every quarter. This is how we run the company. We are putting more emphasis on data center internally, and we also want to share it with the Street and with owners.
Yes. It sounds -- I think you said it's about $1.2 billion right now.
Yes, we are collecting that data. I think last time I checked, it was $1.2 billion. I think it's probably going to end up a little higher than that. Most exciting is the growth rate is well above 50%. And what I like about the market that I think it has more momentum building, right? As we see architectures changing at the rack level, we are seeing that semiconductors are playing a larger and larger role. As long as you believe that data is going to be important in our life, I think this market is going to gain momentum in the future and can one day become a double-digit part of the TAM, if not even 20%. I don't see a reason why it's not over the long term. So very important to break it out, very important to monitor it, very important to report it back to the Street.
Great. I wanted to ask about factory loadings. One of the main issues coming off of last call was that gross margin was guided a little bit below what I think some folks thought. I didn't think it was that much of a surprise, but I think some investors thought that it was a surprise. The guidance implies something like 55% gross margin. It's down about 250 basis points roughly. That's my numbers, not yours. Can you just talk about how you're managing loadings and inventory? It seems like you finally have maybe reached a pain point on inventory where you don't want to build any more. So loadings are going to track demand and you're sort of looking at Q1 and Q1 is not the best quarter seasonally. So loadings come down a little bit in Q4.
Yes, I think you kind of answered it. But remember, taking a bigger picture, Tim, and you know us, we don't think about -- to be fair, we run the company on free cash flow and free cash flow per share. And the reason we are not -- we are stopping building inventory at the same rate because we reached the point where we want to be. So if you think about -- even in Q2, we were a little bit anxious about can we get ahead? Can we build buffers across the entire portfolio? We are, in some cases, we are almost like hand to mouth on some of the technologies. I'm very pleased that by the end of Q3, we reached the level that we want to be at. And now not only that we have capacity of demand, but we also built the inventory level across our portfolio.
And I think about some areas in analog, especially those who are building in Richardson in our fab too, that we're catching up. But you can call it the market was growing not as fast as it could have, and it allowed us to get ahead. Now when you get to the right level of inventory to serve the short-term surges that you might expect, -- of course, you want to -- we manage the company on free cash flow. So you let the cash flow fall through into -- and back to our owners. So we are going to see momentum over there. I think we've seen it in Q3.
I expect that to continue, and that's part of our excitement. We talked about a 6 years process of building capacity and inventory ahead of demand. We finally are getting there. Yes, there is a little bit left over in Lehi to complete LFAB2, but we are done on the analog side. We have the inventory level. It's time to go back and grow our free cash flow per share, both from an inventory buildup perspective, but also from a CapEx perspective. And we are very excited to be in that -- finally in that point.
Yes. So I wanted to ask about CapEx and also free cash flow. So CapEx this year is $5 billion. You said that if revenue is between '20 and '22 that you'd spend between $2 billion and $3 billion next year.
I mean, it seems like revenue probably is on the -- if anything, at the low end of that number. I think you said you can't spend less than $2 billion because of what's going on in LFAB and elsewhere. So you're going to drop at least $2.5 billion, maybe even $3 billion to cash flow next year because CapEx is coming down. So can you just talk about how you think about CapEx? And then into '27, actually, I get asked this a lot. And it would seem like given all your inventory and all your capacity that you could even take CapEx down even in '27, even if there was a modest recovery.
Yes. I think let me just elaborate on what you said. You're right. We do -- we talked about a 6 years investment from 2021 to 2026, and we are 5 years in now. We have actually executed ahead of schedule on Sherman. So if you look at our analog business, both capacity is built, clean room of Sherman 2 is built. We've built the right level of inventory. We are ready. On the Lehi side, we are in the process of getting the shell and the clean room built in LFAB2. We want to be in that position to never repeat the issue we had in the previous cycle where we didn't have brick-and-mortar ready for demand. So we are making progress. I think that we will finish it somewhere in 2026. And that's the main -- the largest ticket item or the big ticket item we have in 2026.
This is what drives our CapEx somewhere around $2 billion to $3 billion. I can't be talking about precision, but we'll try to be a little bit more -- give more information during the capital management call in February. But your estimation is true. There is a $2.5 billion to $3 billion of CapEx opportunity over there because we are where we are. If you look at '27, it depends on revenue. We are going to be in this, what we call Phase 3 of modular capacity. Clean room is built, fabs are qualified, customers are taking the new parts. And now it depends on what revenue wants to do. If revenue wants to grow rapidly, we'll be ready.
But if it doesn't need to and we have enough capacity, that capacity comes into kind of what we call maintenance mode. And people have asked me what does this mean maintenance, but maybe 4% of revenue or something like that is where we used to be when we had the clean room ready at the time when we were kind of ramping our Fab 1. I think it's a good estimate. And we can provide some more color in the future, but that's what I have in mind, not to give a precise number. The last point I would make, and we don't mention that many times, but we also care about our assembly and test. We had a mission to internalize our capacity also on the back-end side.
On the fab, we're already at about 90%. By the end of the decade, we'll be at 95%. On the OSAT, we started at below 60%. And I think we'll finish the year close to 80% and again, with the aspiration to finish the decade at above 90%. And this is something that we are still continuing to do. We are ramping our Melaka II factory. I was just there a couple of weeks ago. Very good progress internalizing part that used to be built in OSAT many times in China into what I call dependable capacity footprint, both in Malaysia and the Philippines. So that's also something that happens in '26, but can take a step backwards in '27.
Great. So I'm sure you get asked this also, and this question is more in relation to China, that the effort to add a lot of manufacturing capacity in the U.S. and have dependable manufacturing capacity, that knife in China potentially could cut both ways because some of the Chinese customers are trying to do to the non-Chinese suppliers what the American customers are not wanting to buy from China given the geopolitical tension. So do you think that having all this U.S. manufacturing capacity, does it put you at a disadvantage in China for the products sold domestically in China?
I don't think so because we have options. China is about 20% of our -- of the market and also about 20% of our business. And can I supply that 20% with the non-U.S. capacity? Of course, I can. TI is not only having manufacturing in the U.S. We have manufacturing in China. We have manufacturing in Europe. We have manufacturing in Japan. And assuming China doesn't want to take manufacture only from China, we have the answer. And this is currently what customers are asking us to have. In case something happens, I want to have a non-U.S. supply, and we are very ready.
On top of it, we are also strengthening our muscle of bringing the right technology into China. So in that sense, our China customers are very happy with TI's ability to build for them even locally in China. We've been tested over the last couple of quarters. There were periods of tariffs in China, and we've done very well. We could divert our wafers into the right supply chain. Our customers felt very secured. And I'm seeing the design-in momentum continue to grow in China based on our ability not only to have a dependable capacity, but also they like our portfolio. They like our level of service. They like the urgency of the company. This is why I see China still as an opportunity rather than a risk. Of course, I don't underestimate the geopolitical tensions that they seem to grow over the years.
But China will stay an important market, not only next year, but I think for the foreseeable future. If I think about the next 5 and 10 years, is there going to be some decoupling between -- some more decoupling between the U.S. and China? It's probably a good estimate to have. But will we be able to ship analog and embedded parts into the China customers' footprint? I think, yes. And both things can live together. So that's how TI is at right now. We see momentum in China. Our business in China is growing nicely this year. It's at the low 30% year-to-date. And I think there is more opportunity moving forward.
Yes. I mean, if they were going to displace you, they've had plenty of opportunity to do that.
And that's not new. We've been competing with the local competition since 2018. So this is something that we've talked about way before it was "in the news. We took a decision, I think it's a strategic one that we want to be very competitive there. And the hard part was not the capacity of manufacturing. The hard part was changing the culture of the company. Can you keep up on the fast-moving treadmill? Can you react at a very fast time to the demand? Can you fulfill the market price? The market price is not set by TI, it's set by the competition. Can you have the right cost structure to make good money when you fulfill these sockets? So I think the answer to all this, we've proven that it's yes. I think also, to be fair, it's helping us across the globe. China is not the only market. And when you get team that is fast moving, that cares about cost, that cares about urgency, that cares about the high customer service. It pays dividends across other geographies. I think that's very important to remember.
Can I just ask about share? So -- and I ask you this a lot. So if I look at your share of the analog market, it peaked at 19%, almost pushing 20% actually. And you've lost roughly from peak to trough, you lost about 400 basis points. You gained about 150 basis points back this year. So you've gained some of that back. but you haven't gained half of that back.
And the share seems to have stalled at least like last quarter, if you look at the SIA data. So are you focusing on regaining that share? Is that a key metric that you're focusing all the salespeople on? And are you compensating the sales force on gaining that share back? And maybe if you can go back and deconstruct, why did you lose that share in the first place?
Yes. First, a quick answer to your last 2 questions is yes and yes. Of course, we measure it. Of course, we -- and again, there are many ways to measure it. We just collect all our competitors and see how we do versus them. And on the analog side, as you mentioned, I think we have some momentum, but we have a lot of room to grow. And that's how we measure the team. That's how we compensate the team.
So definitely, yes. Now to me, the -- and it's part of the learnings that we've discovered back in 2020 that we were not well prepared for the opportunity. If you think about it, and we had the right part, we were on the board, we had a socket. Customers wanted us to ship more. And I think everybody struggled during that time, but I think TI was struggling more simply because our clean room got filled up and the lead time to build new capacity was like 3 years. So that really drove our decision to make this investment cycle in the last 5 years and to do it.
And as I said, we have reached a huge milestone of lots of execution, lots of investment. But when I look at the end of Q3 and where we are, I'm very pleased. Now in terms of how you gain it back, it's a combination of what the market wants to do and also your execution. So I think the market right now has not tested the suppliers. It's a very gradual recovery. Every time there is an accident at one "accident" at one customer or the other, TI always is able to show up and fulfill some of the gaps. I would love to have more opportunities as the market evolves, but I think they'll come. We see secular growth in our market. We see that TI has invested through the cycle. I think this is a unique position that we have. And I'm convinced that the share of gain will continue over the coming years. And of course, we'll continue to monitor it.
Now the other part of our portfolio is the embedded side. This is where the share loss is not related to supply. It's related to our portfolio that weakened and we saw a gradual share loss since 2017. That's more of a strategic issue that is not easy to fix. I think we are in the process of fixing it. We are starting to see early results of a stabilization of our share, but it's still like we lost almost half of it since 2017. We have the opportunity in the coming years, and I'm talking about the second half of the decade to start to make an embedded I would say, momentum buildup towards the second half of the decade. And the reason I say that, that we have built a new portfolio. It's starting to get designed in. We see all our internal metrics showing the right momentum. And I think we will continue to accelerate that in the second half of the decade. The team has to prove it. That's how we are going to measure them. We are going to stay persistent on our mission to rebuild our embedded business, but I think we have -- I give the team a good chance to make it happen.
And can you just sort of deconstruct for people why -- like why did you lose that share in?
Look, I think we talked about it so many times, but I think it's a combination of just where do you want to spend your R&D or what portfolio you want to build. I think we had a lot of legacy business coming from our old wireless days that we did big process or big chips, moving from smartphones, for example, into vehicles. That was not sustainable for TI. So it drove some of the momentum in the previous decade. I think in 2019, we said, look, we want to have a very -- a much higher quality type of business in embedded. Let's put our R&D where we care about low-power MCUs, wireless connectivity, sensing solutions like radar and others. Instead of big SOCs for processor, maybe focused on low-power processors and everything around DSP, drive motors, convert power.
That's kind of where TI's competitive advantages come into play. You can build it internally right now in our new fab that we've acquired in 2021. You can build a broad portfolio, so you can solve many problems on the board. Your channel advantage now is coming into play because now you can touch many, many customers to grow your business.
And that's how you get to this footprint of longevity and diversity. The good news that we are well into it, you can call it bad news, but I think that's part of the quality of the market. It takes time. This is where these are smaller sockets. You won't see it ripping back up, but it will stay once it gets there. I think it's a very sticky type of business. So that's what we've done in Embedded. I'm pleased with the execution, but the team has a very high bar to translate into share gains. So far, okay, you've stabilized your share. Thank you. Now you have to grow it. And that's the mission of the team for 2026 and beyond.
And so just back to your point on share on the analog side, which I think the point you make is great, which I hadn't thought of, is that really it's the tension in the marketplace, you actually need the tension in the marketplace for you to actually gain the share.
No, I don't think -- I think you will see it quicker when there is tension. I think I am very convinced that generation to generation, we are getting the footprint. But right now, let's take factory automation. And this is our largest sector in industrial. I know that we are on the board waiting to be shipped to customers that are going to have automated manufacturing somewhere. But I do see our customers or the customers of our customers hesitating whether to make an investment right now.
And maybe the AI data center is an outlier, but everywhere else in just our people spending a lot of money building new manufacturing new manufacturing footprint, the grid, solar, we see customers are a little bit in a wait-and-see mode, Tim. And this is something that we've noticed. I think that's what industrial needs in order to go back to trend down and beyond. And when it does, we'll see the momentum. So I'm very optimistic about the long term. I think the market so far has moved slowly, and this is why you see the share gains coming in, but not at a rapid pace. If we need to go in and show the muscle of TI, we'll be there.
I want to ask you about M&A. Everyone always says to me, every investor says, well, if TI was ever going to do a deal and buy something, now is the time to do it because you have all this fab capacity. And so my question is, what are the qualifications when you look at doing deals. Everyone seems to think it would be an embedded, but it seems like because of the IP and the process technology, it probably wouldn't be an embedded if you were going to do something. So can you just talk about like the boxes that any deal, if you were to do one would have to check?
Yes. I think the most important part is does it have a good strategic fit for the company. And we always talk about our competitive advantages, not as a slogan, we think that way. So first, can I build that portfolio internally? So of course, when you look at a company that maybe build the foundry, you bring it in, you have the COGS synergy that you would not have if you wouldn't build it in TI, right? So that's always part of the criteria. Does it have a broad portfolio? It's very, very important because broad portfolio and a broad customer base is very important to us.
This is where our channel advantage, whether it's ti.com or our sales channel is very effective because once I already call on a customer, if I can expand my portfolio, by expanding it maybe inorganically, that falls into -- the fall-through is very nice. And last but not least, we do like the business to have this, I call it, diversity and longevity, which is kind of the stickiness of it. So is it mainly on industrial and automotive rather than on PE, -- that would be a criteria. Now regarding the portfolio, I think today, now we build embedded also inside the company, but I think it has to be a good fit in the sense of it should be more analog mixed signal type of thing other than big MCUs or very high level of concentration on processor.
That's not where my head is. My head is more on this analog mixed signal side. And we always look at opportunities. And of course, if something comes up, you will hear us. But we continue to be very focused on organic growth. I think we have an opportunity to continue to expand our portfolio and grow share organically while looking always at opportunities externally.
Great. And then I just wanted to ask you about share repo. They've sort of slowed midyear. They were on a very strong pace in Q4 of '24 and the first quarter of '25, and they slowed a bit recently. However, when I just adjust your CapEx, and I assume you're going to drop at least $2.5 billion to cash flow, possibly $3 billion as the CapEx comes down. I mean you're basically annualizing $750 million in cash right now. And the stock is -- I mean, it's at a very low multiple by historic standards at currently annualized cash flow if you adjust for the CapEx. So it would seem to me that now is the time to lean in and really buy back more stock. I know your long-term commitment to returning 100% of the cash flow. But it seems like now is the time to be maybe a little bit opportunistic.
Tim, you said it yourself. I mean, first, let's build the free cash flow muscle, okay, or rebuild it. And it's really going to come by executing and we are executing. So getting through this investment cycle and then whatever revenue wants to be, I think your assessment is right, probability of below 22% is high next year. So that is a lot of gain on free cash flow, $2 billion to $3 billion, as you mentioned. I will say also that we've been aggressive, right? We've been returning at above 100% where we saw an opportunity. We continue to do it even in 2025. I am excited about next year because we are starting to see the fall through. I think we have more opportunity.
As I think about the trend line of free cash flow per share, and we showed it over, I think, 20 years in our capital management call, -- are we getting there next year? Yes. Do we have a chance to have a new record next year? Yes. And in the case we don't, it's because we see such a huge demand that we have to put more CapEx in, right? So very excited about that. It's a unique point. It's been a long journey to run this company in the last 5 years with Rich through the cycle, keeping a steady hand on our investment. I think it will pay dividends whatever the markets want to do next year. So in that sense, you're right, your math is not wrong. And I think a lot of opportunity ahead on capital allocation, whether it's buybacks, whether it's whatever else.
So you think there's a scenario where next year could be a record free cash flow year for the.
I mean we put a target there of $8 billion to $12 billion, right? I think the $12 billion is a low probability because we need a $26 billion for that. But that $8 billion doesn't sound crazy. Look at the numbers today. You've -- do the math of the CapEx. And yes, we are not going to force it. I said it, I think, in the previous conference. It's not -- you should be 8 next year, but is there a good probability? Of course, there is. Now I assume there's going to be some more growth in the market. That thing can change every quarter. I've given up on trying to call the shape of the recovery. We're just going to report how it went every quarter. But I think this market is still trending below trend line. There is a good chance. And you've heard some of the peers today. I don't know what they said, but there is a good chance for this market to continue to recover and establish new highs. So we'll see.
Great. Well, we've run out of time. Thank you, Haviv.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
Texas Instruments — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Erholung: TI spricht von einer klaren Erholung 2025 — mittlerer Wachstumspunkt bei ~13% — aber mit ungleichmäßiger Momentum‑Verteilung über die Quartale.
- Marktstruktur: Industrie (stärker, zweistellig) und Automotive (einstelliger Wachstum, auf Vorjahreshöhe) treiben die Erholung; Data Center wächst sehr schnell, startet als eigener Berichtsbereich.
- Cash‑Fokus: Inventare weitgehend aufgebaut, Kapazitäten verfügbar — Ziel: Free Cash Flow per Share wieder deutlich steigern.
📌 Strategische Highlights
- Data Center: Wird ab FY26 als eigenständiger Markt ausgewiesen; TI schätzt das adressierbare Analog/Embedded‑Volumen mittelfristig deutlich höher als heute.
- CapEx & Kapazität: 6‑Jahresinvestitionszyklus weitgehend erfüllt; Sherman/Lehi‑Ausbau bis 2026, danach potenziell deutlich niedrigere jährliche CapEx (zitiert 2–3 Mrd. $ für 2026).
- Operative Resilienz: Rückverlagerung/Interne OSAT‑Kapazitäten (Malaysia/Philippinen), Multi‑Site Produktion (USA, China, Europa, Japan) als Schutz gegen geopolitische Risiken.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Reporting: Management kündigt Breakout von Data Center ab dem Jahreswechsel (Earnings‑Call im Januar) — Basiswert zuletzt ~1,2 Mrd. $ und >50% Wachstum angegeben.
- CapEx‑Ausblick: FY26 CapEx erwartet bei ~2–3 Mrd. $ (gegenüber ~5 Mrd. in laufendem Jahr); LFAB2‑Fertigstellung soll 2026 erfolgen.
- Cash‑Ziel: Management nennt ein Free‑Cash‑Flow‑Band von 8–12 Mrd. $ als Zielreichweite für die Perspektive; 12 Mrd. wird als unwahrscheinlich eingestuft.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Endmärkte: Nachfrageverlauf in Industrie vs. Automotive; Geografie (China) und ob Automotive‑Peaks nachhaltig sind — Management sieht Momentum, bleibt aber unter Trend.
- CapEx & Buybacks: Wie schnell fällt CapEx, wie stark steigt der Free Cash Flow und wie opportunistisch werden Aktienrückkäufe gefahren — Management sieht Raum für erhöhte Rückflüsse.
- Geopolitik/China: Risiko durch US‑Fertigung vs. lokale Forderungen in China — TI betont Multi‑Site‑Optionen und lokale Fertigung/Design‑Support als Vorteil.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Der Talk signalisiert einen Wendepunkt: Inventare aufgebaut, Kapazität verfügbar und strukturelle Wachstumshebel (Data Center) geben Aussicht auf deutlich verbesserten Free Cash Flow. Wichtige Beobachtungspunkte für Anleger: FY26‑Reporting von Data Center, tatsächliche CapEx‑Reduktion und Rückkauftempo.
Texas Instruments — Q3 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Welcome to the Texas Instruments Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined by our Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan; and our Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi. For any of you who missed the release, you can find it on our website at ti.com/ir.
This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website.
This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in the earnings release published today as well as TI's most recent SEC filings for a more complete description.
You likely saw last week, we announced that the Board of Directors has elected Haviv Ilan, Chairman of the Board, beginning January 2026. Haviv succeeds Rich Templeton, who will retire as Chairman after a 45-year career with TI. I'm sure you will join me in congratulating them both.
Today, we'll provide the following updates: first, Haviv will start with a quick overview of the quarter. Next, he will provide insight into third quarter revenue results with some details on what we are seeing with respect to our end markets. Lastly, Rafael will cover the financial results, give an update on capital management as well as share the guidance for fourth quarter 2025.
With that, let me turn it over to Haviv.
Thanks, Mike. I'll start with a quick overview of the third quarter. Revenue came in about as expected at $4.7 billion, an increase of 7% sequentially and an increase of 14% year-over-year. Analog and Embedded both grew year-on-year and sequentially. Analog revenue grew 16% year-over-year and Embedded Processing grew 9%. Our Other segment grew 11% from the year-ago quarter.
Let me provide a few comments about the current market environment. The overall semiconductor market recovery is continuing, though, at a slower pace than prior upturns, likely related to the broader macroeconomic dynamics and overall uncertainty. That said, customer inventories remain at low levels and their inventory depletion appears to be behind us. We are well positioned with capacity and inventory and have flexibility to support a range of scenarios.
Now I'll share some additional insights into third quarter revenue by end market. First, the industrial market increased about 25% year-on-year and was up low single digits sequentially following a strong result in the second quarter. The automotive market increased upper single digits year-on-year and around 10% sequentially with growth across all regions. Personal electronics grew low single digits year-on-year and grew upper single digits sequentially. Enterprise systems grew about 35% year-on-year and grew about 20% sequentially. And lastly, communications equipment grew about 45% year-on-year and was up about 10% sequentially.
With that, let me turn it over to Rafael to review profitability and capital management.
Thanks, Haviv, and good afternoon, everyone. As Haviv mentioned, third quarter revenue was $4.7 billion. Gross profit in the quarter was $2.7 billion or 57% of revenue. Sequentially, gross profit margin decreased 50 basis points.
Operating expenses in the quarter were $975 million, up 6% from a year ago and about as expected. On a trailing 12-month basis, operating expenses were $3.9 billion or 23% of revenue. Operating profit was $1.7 billion in the quarter or 35% of revenue and was up 7% from the year-ago quarter.
Net income in the quarter was $1.4 billion or $1.48 per share. Earnings per share included a $0.10 reduction, not in our original guidance. This includes $0.08 of restructuring charges related to efforts to drive operational efficiencies to support our long-term strategy, including the planned closures of our last 250-millimeter fabs.
Let me now comment on our capital management results, starting with our cash generation. Cash flow from operations was $2.2 billion in the quarter and $6.9 billion on a trailing 12-month basis. Capital expenditures were $1.2 billion in the quarter and $4.8 billion over the last 12 months. Free cash flow on a trailing 12-month basis was $2.4 billion. This includes $637 million of CHIPS Act incentives, including a $75 million payment received in the third quarter related to the direct funding agreement.
In the quarter, we paid $1.2 billion in dividends and repurchased $119 million of our stock. In September, we announced we would increase our dividend by 4%, marking our 22nd consecutive year of dividend increases. This reflects our continued commitment to return free cash flow to our owners over time. In total, we returned $6.6 billion to our owners in the past 12 months.
Our balance sheet remains strong with $5.2 billion of cash and short-term investments at the end of the third quarter. Total debt outstanding is $14 billion with a weighted average coupon of 4%. Inventory at the end of the quarter was $4.8 billion, up $17 million from the prior quarter. And days were 215, down 16 days sequentially. We have executed well on building an inventory position, which we believe will allow us to consistently deliver high levels of customer service.
Turning to our outlook for the fourth quarter. We expect TI's revenue in the range of $4.22 billion to $4.58 billion, and earnings per share to be in the range of $1.13 to $1.39. Our fourth quarter outlook includes changes related to the new U.S. tax legislation and now assumes an effective tax rate of about 13%. In addition, we expect our effective tax rate in 2026 to be about 13% to 14%.
In closing, we will stay focused in the areas that add value in the long term. We continue to invest in our competitive advantages, which are manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, reach of our channels and diverse and long-lived positions. We will continue to strengthen these advantages through disciplined capital allocation and by focusing on the best opportunities, which we believe will enable us to continue to deliver free cash flow per share growth over the long term.
With that, let me turn it back to Mike.
Thanks, Rafael. Operator, you can now open the line for questions. [Operator Instructions] Operator?
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Timothy Arcuri with UBS.
2. Question Answer
Haviv, I'm wondering if you can talk about the linearity of bookings through the quarter. I know in the June quarter, things had softened throughout the quarter. But this quarter, it seemed like things got a little better as you moved through the quarter. So can you talk about that as you sort of head into C Q4?
Yes, I'll give some high-level comments, and Mike, please add anything with more details. Yes, this quarter was -- kind of came in as expected and not similar to what we saw in Q2. It was a little bit hectic with the tensions related to trade and tariffs, we saw a lot of change through the quarter. This was more of as expected quarters -- through the quarter in July, August and September. And Mike, anything to add on that one?
We had talked about the turns portion of the business had kind of started out strong at the beginning of second and had moderated near the end. We didn't see that same behavior again. And third, it really -- that portion kind of followed what you'd expect to see in a kind of a cyclical recovery that we saw in third. Do you have a follow-up?
I do. Yes. Rafael, I wanted to ask about loadings that are assumed in the fourth quarter. I know you're usually coming at the high end, but if we assume the midpoint of the guidance, and I assume that depreciation grows like it has the past few quarters. Gross margin, if I exclude the depreciation, so on a cash basis, it's down like sub 67%. So it hasn't been that low in like 10 years. And you are already sitting on a lot of inventory. I don't think you want to build more.
So sort of what's the path to get cash margins on a better path here? I mean, it's below where it was 7 to 8 quarters ago when revenue was $600 million to $700 million lower than where it is today?
Yes. Let me try to answer that. There were several questions there, so let me see if I can hit most of them. First, your question is maybe fundamentally on inventory. So let me start there. We're very pleased with our current inventory position. That -- objective for inventory is to support customers, to keep lead times short and have just great customer delivery, customer satisfaction. So that we are achieving, and we're pleased with where the inventory is.
Now given our revenue -- the midpoint of our revenue in order to continue to maintain those levels of inventory and where we want to be on inventory. We're adjusting the loadings down into fourth quarter. We did some of that in third quarter, and we're going to do some more in the fourth quarter. So as we do that, and as you pointed out, when you look at fourth quarter, you have lower revenue, you have higher depreciation. You have the hit on the lower loadings. So that's how you get to the EPS range that we have listed.
Our next question comes from the line of Chris Danely with Citibank.
Can you just talk a little bit more about the restructuring? Maybe what was the catalyst for it? And then any benefits to expenses, either gross margins or OpEx going forward?
Chris, high level, it's related to actually two things. First, I think we announced several years back that we are winding down our 6-inch fabs or 150-millimeter fabs. We have one in Sherman, the old site -- the old fabs in the site and one in Dallas. Both of them have actually started the last wafer this month. And we will see a gradual reduction in cost related to these two factories through, I think, the first half of '26. We are just taking the hit on the restructuring costs in Q3 as we had predictability, and the amount was clear to us in terms of the size of it.
Regarding the other part of it, this is an ongoing work that we are doing. We always look at efficiency gains. We had some areas where we felt that our R&D machine is not generating the returns that we would expect on the long term, and we decided to consolidate some sites. That is also going to take place in the next couple of quarters for the company.
Do you have a follow-up, Chris?
And Rafael, is there anything that -- just on the OpEx side that you want to mention, Rafael on the...
I would just say, tactically for fourth quarter, I expect OpEx to be about flat to third quarter, and that's, as Haviv alluded to the benefits from the restructuring, they don't all come in immediately. So it just takes a little while for that to happen, and there will be benefits in both COR and well as OpEx.
Do you have a follow-up, Chris?
Yes. I think you guys said industrial was up low single digits sequentially and auto was up, I think it was high singles or something like that sequentially. That sounds like a bit of a change from what you said last quarter and intra-quarter, is that true? And then why do you think industrial is slowing down and auto is a little better than expected?
Let me take -- first, Chris, as you remember, we only guide for the -- at the company level, we don't guide by market. We did say, I think on the industrial side that we had a very strong Q2, so kind of indicated that we assume Q3 will taper off, right? And actually, to me, that low single-digit growth sequentially was good. I'm pleased with the result. Remember, a very strong growth in the second quarter.
On the automotive side, I would say, look, automotive was kind of sequentially up and down and up and down, but all in a very similar level, right? The recovery in automotive, at least for TI, was very -- the trough was shallow, and now it's kind of back to where it used to be. So I would not read too much into it. It came in more or less as expected. And I think, Mike, it grew across the regions in automotive?
It did. Yes. It grew sequentially across all the regions.
So no surprises there, Chris, from our perspective, at least.
Yes. And I'd just add with industrial, a second-to-third transition, usually actually down. If you look across the averages over history, it's actually down a little bit. So -- and up low single digit is actually not an unusual result if you're in a recovery.
Our next question comes from the line of Joe Moore with Morgan Stanley.
Great. I guess I continue to get a lot of questions about pricing for you guys. Anything unusual happening there? I think you alluded to kind of an ongoing learning curve kind of price declines. But anything happening where any markets are sort of different on the pricing side?
Short answer is no. And again, for the year, I think our assumption coming into the year was kind of a low single-digit decline like-for-like on the pricing side and I think that's how we are trending year-to-date. So I expect the year to end at the low single-digit price reduction in 2025.
Do you have a follow-up, Joe?
Yes. And just your -- any comment on lead times? Are you still in the range that you've talked about? Any areas where lead times are getting longer?
I'd say across the portfolio, very consistent with what it was in the quarter prior. So not much of a change in that. And our lead times right now are competitive. We worked very hard to make sure that our inventory position would allow us to do that. And we're happy with the lead time position that we have. So yes, not a lot of change on a sequential basis.
And Joe, just a little bit more color on the lead times. I think we always talk about inventory part by part, technology by technology, package type by package type. I think as Rafael mentioned, the third quarter was a very good quarter for us because we've reached our milestone of that's where we need to be. We had a few areas where we were still catching up. So that's now behind us.
And we are now prepared to any scenario. As Mike said, we are serving our customers through a growth this year of mid-teens with no issues. So very strong support from TI. We are hitting our metrics and exceeding them even. And customer service is continuing to be very high for the company, which explains some of the low visibility we are seeing in terms of turns business, as Mike mentioned before.
Our next question comes from the line of Stacy Rasgon with Bernstein Research.
For my first one, I just wanted to dial in on the gross margin expectations explicitly for Q4. So you talked about loadings and everything, you talked about the tax rate coming up. It seems that you're guiding it down, I don't know, maybe 250 bps, something in the ballpark of 55%. I just want to know, is that the right number to think about?
And then given that baseline, like how much cost should I be expecting comes out of the model due to the 6-inch fab closures in the first half?
Yes. So Stacy, high level, you're in the ballpark. We let the EPS guide speak for itself, but you have lower revenue, you fall that through, you have increases in depreciation for the year is $1.8 billion to $2 billion. So -- but it should be an increase second to third, similar to -- third to fourth should be similar to second to third. So you do that and you have higher levels of depreciation.
Then as Haviv said, we're very pleased with our inventory levels. They're doing what they're supposed to. So now we are moderating those wafer starts, those loadings. And as those come down, we get the impact on gross margins.
Let me just also step back and stress that we run the company with a mindset of a long-term owner and the objective to grow free cash flow per share over the long term, and that is gaining momentum. On a trailing 12-month basis, our free cash flow is up 65% from last year, and it has the potential to accelerate and grow even faster next year as we have outlined in our framework back in Capital Management.
Do you have a follow-up, Stacy?
I do. So your Q4 guide is down about 7% sequentially off of a slightly higher-than-expected Q3 base. My math suggests that down 7% or so is pretty much seasonal like on a pre-COVID basis, I know post-COVID seasonality has been over all over [ the place ]. But pre-COVID, it typically was down, call it, like high single digits. So you seem to be on a seasonal trend now, and maybe that's consistent with customers no longer draining inventory.
What is -- how should I think about normal seasonality like pre-COVID levels for Q1? My feeling is it's typically down sequentially, like what is -- I'm not asking you to guide it, but just like what is normal for Q1, at least on a pre-COVID basis, if we're running more of a seasonal pattern from here?
Stacy, before we talk about Q1, let me just add a little bit more color on Q4. As you said, I look at it as a roughly seasonal guide, as you said. And the reason is there is a recovery, but it's a very -- in a moderate pace, right? So that's what guides our, call it, seasonal view into Q4.
I also mentioned, and that's what we're seeing. This is part of the way we do business these days. More customers are direct, more customers are on consignment. Customer inventories are low, and I think they've gone through this depletion process, okay? That's behind us. So we are going to be just seeing it real time as it comes, and hence our guidance.
Now regarding Q1, Mike, you could comment if you want.
Yes. Yes. It's not unusual to see fourth to first just historically -- this not a guide for what we're going to see, but what historically has done, it's typically down just slightly sequentially, it's not unusual to see.
Our next question comes from the line of Ross Seymore with Deutsche Bank.
I'm going to ask a couple of questions. Haviv, congratulations on the Chairman role as well.
I wanted to go back to the gross margin side. Rafael, you talked about all the reasons it was going to drop in the rough range from the prior question. Just wondered how does that flow through into next year from the perspective of depreciation? Is there any change to the range you gave before?
And if you're flat to slightly down in the first quarter, does that flow through in the utilization dynamic? Does that have to flow through inventory, et cetera, and leading to a headwind as we go into the first half of next year as well?
Yes. So a couple of things. First, on depreciation, no change to our guidance, $1.8 billion to $2 billion for this year. So you come back into fourth quarter, as I answered to Stacy, a second ago. And for next year, we've said $2.3 billion to $2.7 billion, but to be on the lower end of that range that should give you enough to model that.
Beyond that, we'll go -- we'll forecast 1 quarter at a time. It's going to depend on revenue and demand. So this by lowering the loadings now puts us in a good position to have the level of inventory that we think is required. And I think that's going to put us in a good position going into 2026.
And Ross, the only color I'd add, and then Rafael touched upon it. We do think, and that's the way we run the place on free cash flow per share. We have made an excellent progress on ramping and qualifying our Sherman new site. We are winding down two 6-inch fabs. Our investments in Utah in Lehi 2 are continuing as planned.
So our eyes on free cash flow per share growth and start with free cash flow, right? So when you get to the right level of inventory, when you execute on your expansion plans, I think we are now well prepared for any scenario. And as you remember, we have framed 2026, not on GPM, but on free cash flow, and that's where our sight is on, okay?
Do you have a follow-up, Ross?
Yes, I do. I just wanted to also talk about margins, but on the OpEx side. A clarification first then the question. The clarification for Rafael, you talked about OpEx being flat in the fourth quarter. I assume that's excluding the charge in the third quarter.
And then as you look forward, in the past, you've had years that OpEx was flat year-over-year. You just took some restructuring, you're consolidating R&D sites, you said. How should we think just generally about OpEx, whether it's relative to revenue or absolute levels? Do you plan to grow at low single digits? Is it something higher than that like this year? Any sort of color about how you're approaching OpEx as you look into next year?
Yes. So a couple of things. First, on the first part of your question, when I think about OpEx, I do not include restructuring in that. That is a separate line. So that $85 million, of course, it's not going to repeat. So that -- put that out.
And the OpEx, the regular OpEx, I expect it to be about flat third to fourth quarter. Beyond that, on R&D and SG&A strategy, more broadly speaking, we have a disciplined process of allocating R&D and SG&A to the best opportunities and the best investments that both -- primarily in the R&D space, but even in SG&A strategies such as ti.com, to strengthen our competitive advantages.
Yes. And on the R&D side, Ross, look, today, I'd like to talk about -- and we are seeing the data center market becoming a larger opportunity over the last several years, and I think that continues into future. So when I think about industrial, automotive, data center, the amount of opportunity to expand our portfolio is high. We have a lot of good investments to make there, and we plan to continue to grow our portfolio in these three areas.
We care about all markets, all five markets, but these three will have a really long-term growth opportunity ahead of them and TI can do more to serve these markets. So I expect to see that in '26 and beyond.
Our next question comes from the line of Jim Schneider with Goldman Sachs.
I was wondering if you could maybe give us a little bit of color in China and what you're seeing there? I think last quarter, you called out some pull-in activity. I'm curious whether you saw a reversion there in terms of orders or whether orders were ending up -- ended up better than you expected and sort of what you're seeing on a real-time basis heading into Q4?
High level in Q3, China came back to normal, and I expect that to continue into Q4. Mike, anything specific on the China business in Q3?
And maybe to add, as we probably talked about last quarter, there was potential for pull forward in second. And if you look at industrial in China, that was the only market that didn't grow sequentially. But if you look on a year-on-year, it's still up about 40%, but I think you're looking at where it essentially didn't repeat. We didn't see that same level of pull forward, at least evidence of it. I can't confirm that with certainty, but it doesn't appear that same pull forward trend repeated itself in third just based on that. But we'll have to see how it plays through. That's the only thing I would add.
So nothing special to report there, Jim, okay?
Do you have a follow-up?
Yes, please. I know when you get to the beginning of next year, you'll give us an update on the Capital Management Day, but I'm just sort of curious, as we think -- sit here today in light of the slower recovery you seem to be talking about right now or you seeing right now, can you maybe give us a sense about whether you expect that your CapEx for next year will be toward the lower end of the range you sort of outlined at the beginning of this year?
Yes. We gave you the framework, Jim. And again, we gave you a $20 billion to $26 billion framework there, but of course, it can be higher or lower. I think the probability of being lower is probably more probable than higher, than $26 billion, right? So at the end of the day, we'll see what it wants to do. This recovery has been moderate. So we haven't seen even the market goes back to trend line. Not to mention going above trend line and customers building inventory. We just haven't seen it. It could still happen in this cycle, it could not.
The good news from a TI perspective that we are ready for any scenario. If it wants to grow quickly, we will be able to serve it. But if it wants to continue and that moderate recovery, of course, we will be at the lower end of the CapEx and free cash flow will grow. As indicated in our framework we provided in Capital Management.
And as February comes in, we'll have some more information. We'll have Q4 behind us, and we'll provide more color on that, Jim.
Our next question comes from the line of Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
I guess first question is with regard to general conditions and the recovery. And I think the words you said were that the recovery was continuing at a slower pace. Can you talk about what what's changed in your mind since the last earnings call? I think earlier in the year, perhaps you were more optimistic that this would follow lines of a more typical recovery, which would be stronger by now. But what sort of changed in the part of your customers and such as compared to the last earnings call?
Yes. I think that's related more to the first half of 2Q. I think Mike mentioned that and we acknowledge that in the July call that it had a very rapid start. We were thinking that we are sitting on a sharp slope. I think time taught us that if it's not -- I would not say -- it's just a moderate, okay? We are seeing the market getting back towards trend line, but still below trend line. And that's one of the more moderate recovery that we've seen in the history. I think you have to go back many years to see similar behavior. Could still change.
My -- and again, I cannot prove it, but I do see when I talk with customers, especially on the industrial side, and if you think about investing, building new factories, putting more CapEx, there is a bit of a wait-and-see mode with our customers. They're just hesitant to have clarity on what exactly are the final rules. Should I put my factory in this country or another one. Even in our domain, think about it, the rules are still not finalized in terms of the rates of tariffs, for example, will they be or not.
So I do see this hesitancy at the customer base, and I see it mainly on the industrial side. On the automotive side, it's -- the secular growth is continuing, so just content growth allows that market to go back to the level that it peaked before.
And the outlier is data center. Data center, again, not a large part of our revenue, but growing more than 50% for TI year-to-date. That's where we see a strong investment. That's the only place where we see a strong growth where customers are investing and moving fast, and TI wants to do more there. We are investing as well. But again, a smaller part of our revenue.
Do you have a follow-up, Chris?
I do. And as a follow-up, if you could take us through your thought process with regard to the reduction in wafer starts and utilization. I mean, is it a function of what you just said that typically, the recovery will be stronger at this point, and it's not there, so you need to moderate a bit. Take us through the thought process of that.
And for how long you would keep the loadings at a lower level? And what would you need to see to start raising those loadings again?
Yes. So it is -- you can think of it fairly mechanically, frankly. Think of revenue was $4.7 billion and change in third quarter. Now the midpoint is $4.4 billion. If you run the factories, the same way you were before with lower revenue, you just grow inventory and keep on growing inventory. We only grew $17 million in third quarter, so it was essentially flat, but at a lower revenue, same loadings, you would grow inventory. So you need to moderate that in order to keep inventory either flat or maybe slightly down as we go into fourth quarter.
The second part of your question, it's going to depend on revenue, right? So the higher the revenue could be over the next 6, 9, 12 months going into 2026, then the faster we could increase the loadings back up or we may leave them at that level if the revenue is more moderate. So it's just going to depend on how revenue comes in.
Our next question comes from the line of Blayne Curtis with Jefferies.
I had two questions. I just wanted to follow back up on that loading comment. I mean you said that you would keep it kind of flat in December. I mean, I guess, you're not going to guide to March, but I'm just kind of curious, you've been growing inventory for many, many quarters. Is this now the way to think about it, you'll keep it flat until you see a more robust recovery on the top line?
Yes. And I think you're referring to flat inventory levels. And I said flat to down. So we are comfortable with the $4.8 billion that we have that has very -- of inventory that has very low obsolescence level. We hardly ever scrap any of our inventory because it lasts a long time, both in finished goods and in chips -- in chip form and die bank and in finished goods.
So we feel very comfortable with that level, but it's about sustainability, right? If you just keep on growing, it's just not a good allocation of your cash or your capital for -- of owners. So it's better to moderate the loadings that way you're flat to down in the current environment, and we feel that we can do that and continue to have very high levels of customer service and metrics supporting our customers.
And then I guess just a follow-up, in terms of the lower loading in the December quarter, is that all reflected in the gross margin guidance? Or does that kind of spill into March? Obviously, like I said, you're not going to guide to March, but just kind of thinking about the moving pieces, is there any kind of part of the December cut that spills into March in addition to whatever March is?
Yes. So we're not guiding to March, as you pointed out. But the lower loading that I'm talking about, some of that happened in third quarter. There was a step down in third quarter, second to third, and there's another step down into fourth. That is, of course, embedded in the EPS guidance that we just gave.
Our next question comes from the line of Tore Svanberg with Stifel.
Yes. And congratulations, Haviv. My first question is on the enterprise data and communications business. I get the enterprise data, that's obviously tied to data center. But I'm a little bit surprised to see the communications equipment being that strong. Is that also tied to data center and perhaps some of these cluster build-outs? Or is there anything else going on there?
Yes, I think it's a great question, and that's the reason. I think we indicated before and we'll provide more color in Q1, we are planning to break out data center as a market for the company. Right now, our data center sits mainly in enterprise in that compute and equipment, but also on the comms side, we have there the wire, the switches and the wired comms in a rack and [ rack-to-rack ]. We also have the optical module business there in comms. So they are really part of the data center market, if you will.
The other part of the data center market for TI sits today in industrial, think about all these high-voltage power delivery, the PSUs and all that. And there is also a lot of architectural change there going to high-voltage DC and all that. So I think it's time that TI calls out data center at the top. We'll provide more color in Q1. But just for the year, and then we are in the midst of collecting all the bits and pieces, but TI is running more or less at the $1.2 billion run rate in 2025, that what we're seeing right now.
And again, we'll provide more specifics in Q1, but it's also our fastest-growing market. It's growing year-to-date above 50% for the first 3 quarters. And I see customers continuing to invest, as I alluded before, that's the one market that we see CapEx going into. And I'm not seeing any slowdown there in the -- at least in the foreseeable future related to our visibility at least. Okay?
Do you have a follow-up, Tore?
Yes, that was very helpful. Just a quick follow-up. I know you typically don't guide by market in Q4 but any sort of outliers one way or the other by your end markets into the December quarter, please?
I'd just say there's no specific outliers to call out as you look across our businesses. Some of our end markets have higher sensitivity to seasonality than others, personal electronics being probably the most sensitive to it. But overall, there's nothing specific that I'd call out about fourth quarter's transition.
So Tore, thank you for the question, and I'll hand it back over to Haviv to wrap this up.
Thank you, Mike. So let me wrap up with what we've said previously, at our core, we are engineers. Our technology is the foundation of our company. But ultimately, our objective is to -- and the best metric to measure progress and generate value to our owners is the long-term growth of free cash flow per share. Thank you, and have a good evening.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Q3 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $4,7 Mrd. (+14% YoY, +7% QoQ)
- Bruttogewinn: $2,7 Mrd.; Bruttomarge 57% (−50 Basispunkte QoQ)
- Betriebsergebnis: $1,7 Mrd. (35% Marge); EPS: $1,48 (Earnings per Share), inkl. $0,10 zu Lasten der Guidance, davon $0,08 Restrukturierung)
- Cash & FCF: Operativer Cashflow $2,2 Mrd. Q, $6,9 Mrd. TTM (trailing twelve months); FCF TTM $2,4 Mrd.
- Bilanz: Cash $5,2 Mrd., Schulden $14 Mrd.; Inventar $4,8 Mrd. (215 Tage, −16 Tage)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Fokus FCF: Management betont langfristiges Ziel: Free Cash Flow pro Aktie als zentrale Kennzahl und kapitaldisziplinierte Allokation.
- Fertigung & IP: Weiterer Ausbau von Fertigungs- und Technologievorteilen; Sherman-Ramp und Lehi‑2 laufen, letzte 6‑Zoll(150 mm)-Fabs werden geschlossen.
- Marktposition: Inventar bewusst aufgebaut, Lieferzeiten wettbewerbsfähig; Data‑Center wird als eigenes, schnell wachsendes Marktsegment herausgestellt.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Q4 Umsatz: $4,22–4,58 Mrd.; EPS: $1,13–1,39 (Guidance berücksichtigt neue US‑Steuergesetze, erwartete effektive Steuerquote ~13%).
- Margen-Treiber: Erwartete Belastung durch niedrigere Wafer‑Starts (Loadings) kombiniert mit höherer Abschreibung; Abschreibungsrahmen 2025: $1,8–2,0 Mrd., für 2026 geplant $2,3–2,7 Mrd.
- CapEx‑Rahmen: Framework $20–26 Mrd.; Management sieht höhere Wahrscheinlichkeit für unteren Bereich bei moderater Erholung.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventar & Loadings: Analysten kritisierten potenzielle Overhangs; Management sagt: Inventarniveau gewünscht, Loadings werden reduziert, um Bestand stabil zu halten.
- Restrukturierung: Fragen zu Auslösern und Timing; Firma nennt Schließungen 150 mm Fabs und R&D‑Konsolidierung; Effekte auf OpEx/Gewinn setzen verzögert ein.
- Markt‑Differenzierung: Diskussionen zu Data‑Center‑Wachstum (>50% YTD für TI), China normalisiert, Pricing‑Trend: leicht negative Preise (low single‑digit) erwartet.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Solide operative Cash‑Generierung und ein aktiver Kapitalrückfluss (Dividende +4%, Buybacks), aber kurzfristig Margendruck durch geringere Loadings, höhere Abschreibungen und einmalige Restrukturierungskosten. Langfristiger Fokus auf Free Cash Flow pro Aktie und Fertigungsstärke bleibt positiv für Aktionäre, kurzfristig bleibt die Guidance konservativ.
Texas Instruments — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good morning, everybody. Welcome to the Goldman Sachs Communacopia and Technology Conference. My name is Jim Schneider. I'm the semiconductor analyst here at Goldman Sachs. And it's my pleasure to welcome Texas Instruments and CEO, Haviv Ilan, to the stage today. Welcome, Haviv.
Thank you, Jim. Good morning, and thanks for having us here.
Thank you for being here. Maybe let's start on the macro side for a moment. And Texas Instruments has a relatively broad end market exposure. You see a lot across the globe across a wide range of end markets. Maybe give investors some color on where are you seeing incremental strength in other verticals where you're seeing incremental weakness or sluggishness.
Yes. Let's start with a really high level. If you think about what we are going through this year in 2025, I think 2 things are playing in parallel. First, we see a semiconductor recovery. I'll comment about the market in a minute. But we troughed somewhere in the first half of 2024. I would argue 1Q '24, if you look at units trend.
And then we've seen a recovery since then, different markets at different phases, right? So I think this is continuing. We are now -- TI at least has commented about that 4 out of the 5 markets we operate in are in recovery with one of them, which is the automotive market, still not there, but I think it will come as well.
In parallel, trade tensions, geopolitical tensions are putting a lot of -- there is a lot of disruption noise. And I think it also influences the way the market wants to go back to trend line. If you think about where we see strength, obviously, the markets that have recovered first or the personal electronics market, some people would call it the consumer market. Comms is recovering. But data center is probably the fastest recovering market. This is where we see very strong growth at about 50%. It's also establishing almost like new peaks. So it's going back to 2022 level.
And I do believe that in 2022, we were also shipping for inventory build. So right now, when I see that market doing well, I get encouraged. I would say that on the industrial side, we are seeing now 2 or 3 quarters of recovery, but at, if you will, a slower pace other than aerospace and defense that established a new peak. We see most of the sectors maybe 20% to 40%, sometimes 35%, sometimes 30% below their previous peak. And I think that's related to the macro environment of -- and I see it with my customers, they're cautious. They are making up their mind on capital investments. They want clarity, and I think that makes the recovery a little bit slower.
That's a good point. So I mean, just to clarify, on your last conference call, I think most investors seem to perceive a downtick relative to your perceived level of bullishness coming into that call and the strength of the upturn that we're likely to see. So I think you may have taken issue with that, but maybe perhaps recalibrate for us sort of like how you see this in the level of tailwinds and just your overall level of optimism we see on recovery right now.
Yes. I think I'll just be very open. Let's talk about second quarter. Second quarter was a good quarter for the company. Company grew at mid-teens, I think, 15% or 16% year-over-year. And also sequentially, it was above average quarter. And I think it grew 9% sequentially, and it was a strong quarter. I do think that we have discovered along the quarter that the 2 elements that I've described are almost super positioned, the recovery of the market, but also the trade tensions and maybe tariffs and pull-ins, we kind of deciphered it a little bit better, specifically what our business in China, when we ended the quarter, we looked at our growth over there. It grew sequentially close to 20%.
And this is a little bit above natural, okay? So we made -- and customers don't tell us why they pull parts and why they want more of them. We have to assume there was some sort of pull-in there. And we've made that assumption. And when we came into July, we just -- look, that was an element of Q2. This is why you see a Q3 a little bit lower than our traditional 6% or 7% sequential growth. But I'd like to take it to the bigger picture, Jim. And I think this is why we're here. When I look at the markets we operate in, and we are an Analog and Embedded company, I call it we make foundational chips, but we operate in 3 markets that are amazingly promising.
And I'll start with the industrial market, although it's still not ripping back to the trend line, underneath, we are seeing investments and related to automation, to electrification, to digitization that are going to continue secular growth, even if it's going to take a little bit more time. I think it's clear in automotive. There is content growth. This is why the automotive market, we talk about recovery. But even if you look at where we are versus the peak, we are single digit before or lower than the previous peak, and it will recover as well because of content growth.
This is why we saw a very shallow down cycle, if you will, or recovery. And I go back to the fastest-growing market for us, which is data center. And today, in Analog and Embedded, still not a big part of the TAM, probably about 5% or so, mid-single-digit percentage of TAM, but growing very quickly. And if I look at TI, I'll give a little bit more color, and we'll provide a little bit more clarity as we arrange our markets differently into 2026.
We'll call out data center. But if you think about the way I look at data center, it's running back to 2022 levels, as I've said before, it's growing more than 50%. It's our fastest-growing market this year, and I see more and more opportunity to play a bigger game for the company. And the run rate is not -- it's not low. It's like probably a $1 billion or $1.2 billion in between. That's how I expect us to finish 2025, and I see a tremendous opportunity for growth in the future.
So today, maybe a single-digit portion of the market, but growing to be, in my opinion, 20% of our market, not so far away from now because of the clip, it runs in terms of growth. So I'm excited about that. 75% to 80% of our revenue is centered around on these 3 markets. So this is why I'm excited. And this is why we prepared the company for that in terms of investments, in terms of, of course, inventory, in terms of our product portfolio. We have to build them to build our parts and to compete at more sockets per system as we move forward.
Yes. Makes sense. Maybe on a very high-level strategic note, Haviv, you've been CEO for about 2.5 years at this point. When you first started as CEO, what were the core issues of the company you wanted to address? Have you made progress over that period of time? And what are the areas of business you're still working to improve?
Yes. By the way, it's more than 2.5 years to me. But yes, you're right, it has been 2.5 years. I will say that when we -- when I took the company, the biggest thing was to learn or to apply the learnings from the previous up cycle. We felt that we could have done better in the up cycle. We're almost not prepared for success in terms of how we support our customers. And that meant investment, and you've seen us starting that or announcing that back in 2021, get capacity in place, get capacity ahead of demand. So if you see an opportunity, you can respond.
The problem with the fabs and -- by the time you understand you have a surge of demand and to put that capacity in place, it's 3 to 4 years to -- from moving dirt all the way to a clean room qualified. And it's just too late. So get capacity ahead of demand is one thing. The second thing is inventory. And this is part of the reason we have built a strong inventory position right now to serve the future because that's how you react short term to a surge of demand. And I mentioned before, there is a bumpiness, there is noise. This can happen still in this cycle. We don't know. It's very noisy out there. So having a good inventory position to support whatever scenario the market will throw at you is very, very important.
And we modeled the previous surge of demand, and we want to support at least that in the future. So we've done that. And I am very pleased about these 2 elements because you can argue that we fully control our destiny, but it's in this period to build factories on budget, on time with sophisticated technology, qualifying it on time. I'm very proud of the team. And we have done it very well. Also, the inventory was built in a very thoughtful way, part by part, material by material, using data to inform us the level of inventory we need to have.
And we are really approaching -- and Rafael touched it last week, we are approaching that level. We are getting to that comfort level that now we can support any scenario that the market will throw at us. And of course, we have to prepare the best case or the toughest surge that the market will throw at you. The more -- if you think about the other element that I'm working on right now and will continue in the second half of this decade is to work on our product portfolio. I grew up making products in, TI and it's dear to my heart. I do feel that there are some obvious places where we had the opportunity.
The easiest example is embedded. Embedded, 20% of our business could be higher. We have not grown revenue peak-to-peak from 2018 to 2022. And I put it on our portfolio. We are investing there. We can talk more about it later if you have questions. But I'm encouraged with that progress. There are also elements once you get capacity and inventory in place for Analog, you also can expand the portfolio over there.
We are expanding there as well into areas like high voltage, areas that are going to be important for data centers, more parts that can serve the automotive market, also areas in industrial that I feel we can further expand our portfolio. And that this unique position, and I think we are very unique here as a supplier to solve almost any problem on the board, whether it's a $0.05 part and a general purpose amplifier or a voltage regulator all the way up to a very sophisticated integrated application-specific part. And TI can play in both, and our competitive advantages are serving us across the portfolio. We want to be the house of solution for our customers, and I think our customers value that capability.
Yes. Great. I want to maybe just kind of touch on some of your targets and goals you've laid out. I mean, at this kind of point in time when investors see cyclical recovery happen, many people immediately gravitate to gross margins and earnings power. However, you've always used free cash flow as sort of your North Star metric. So maybe you want to kind of touch on both those elements, the P&L and the free cash flow for a second.
Gross margin has been like complicated by a few factors at TI because of the capacity additions you referenced earlier. So D&A is kind of stepping up to the $2 billion to $3 billion range. Inventories are fairly elevated at this point. So in light of the cyclical view you provided there, like how should investors think about the path and maybe the time line to get back to the sort of mid-60% product gross margins?
Yes. I mean, of course, when you make investments in capacity and inventory, the premise is that revenue will come and that's how you expand margins over the long term. We even gave formulas of how it behaves for the company with a fall-through to the GPM line once you account for depreciation. So -- but let me start to go back to our religion almost. We think we run the company on free cash flow per share. That's how we think. And that's also how I talk to my team, I talk to the Board. This is how we presented the targets for the company.
And we were very open about it in our capital management call exactly a year ago where we showed, look, this is a -- let's give you a plan through the decade. That gave you a span of revenue. I think there is a funnel almost there that you can see at 2030. And it represents about -- this is not exact math, but about $30 billion to $40 billion of revenue and how the company can behave in terms of free cash flow per share. It also gives you some intermediate points in 2026.
So investors can be informed of our plan. And this is the plan we put together from the get-go, and we are very committed to make it. Now margins are a factor of how you get there, right? And you've mentioned the biggest element is CapEx. CapEx is dependent on demand, especially now where we have built our clean room. We've got capacity ahead of demand. We are, as we call on the Phase 3. So let's see what revenue wants to be and let's equip the factory accordingly.
And that will inform [ deter ] depreciation and margins. But what I can tell you, and you can run the math, when you fall through at 75% once you account for [ deter,] you will see that in a case of a lower revenue plan, you just have to spend less because you have done it. And remember, part of the investment was to bring -- this is a onetime thing to bring manufacturing inside the company. So you -- actually manufacturing foundries in Taiwan, for example, our Embedded business that 80% was done outside of the company, all of that goes inside.
That's a onetime investment that once it's behind you, it's a very lucrative fall-through, right? Because the variable cost to run a wafer externally versus your own fab is tremendous fall-through. So as you run your math and the fall-throughs we have provided, you will see that in any event, and that's how we model it, it's going to be in the high 60s easily. You can actually see that if you grow faster, you have to inject more CapEx.
So depreciation still lingers longer, and actually it weighs itself down on margins. But I want to say one more time, we don't run the company thinking that way. We run the company thinking about free cash flow per share. I think this is what owners at the end care about, and that's what also brings value long term for our shareholders.
Yes. That's fair. So on vis-a-vis the Capital Allocation Day, you talked about, you did lay out some intermediate scenarios, especially for 2026. And I think that even at a lower revenue target and a lower CapEx target, I think you're sort of like minimum free cash flow per share target was about $8 of...
Yes. I think it was for the lower revenue cases, I think it was $8 to $9 of free cash flow per share. But again, that's -- this is not like we don't build the -- look, part of our ambition is -- and we -- this is how we leave our culture is we think like owners that will own the company for decades. And that's how we think. We think 10, 15, 20 years. I think we are very unique in that sense, and I'm very proud of it.
I think we had a capital management call back in February, and we gave the same framework. So yes, that's our plan. There is no like, you shall be at $8 in 2026 because that -- then you are not optimal. But if we had something to comment, we will tell you. So we are always being very upfront with our owners. And I think our next call is going to be in February. So we'll probably report back there, but I'm not expecting surprises there.
Yes. Okay. Okay. Very good. Maybe pivoting back to manufacturing strategy, your U.S.-centric manufacturing strategy for a second. I think that you've been very clear about your desire to build in the U.S. and have that be kind of the core of your manufacturing base, if not entirely. Maybe just give us a sense about how that approach got started? And what did you decide to do or how do you decide to take that approach versus a very different approach taken by many of your competitors, whether it's global or China for China or the other kind of like ideas that your competitors have?
No, I think it's a great question. And to us, as you know, we've embarked on this plan in 2021. I think at the time, there was not a lot of discussion about trade tensions and geopolitics. So at least you've seen us steady hand since then. And I think that's very important to remember how we think and what drives us. And you talked about the U.S. capacity. I think about it as we call it dependable because I think when you build capacity, you want to serve the globe. And I think our capacity is dependable for the globe.
This is not based on -- this is not U.S. or China or whatever. If I think about the Western part of the world, I'll put the U.S., I'll put Europe. You can also add areas like Japan, areas like Korea and beyond. To me, building a factory, in our case, in the U.S., and I will talk about why in the U.S., is dependable. I think these are partners. You're even seeing early indicators of the trade discussions that they are partners. And I think our factories in Utah and in Texas are not only supporting in an excellent way, our U.S. customers, but also Europeans and other partners that I've mentioned.
In that sense, it's very, very dependable. The reason I view it is because that's where we were. So in manufacturing, we always talk about efficiency of manufacturing and cost. And by the way, that you see some of our foundry [indiscernible] you want to concentrate your supply base. It's just you get more efficiency when you have clusters of fabs co-located, you have access to talent. Your suppliers come closer to you and support you in a better way. You can really utilize the factories better.
So Texas or North Texas is the area for us. We operate in 3 cities. But in Dallas, in Richardson, in Sherman, they all are kind of 40 miles apart. So that's our cluster in North Texas. And it's a great state to build plant, a very business-friendly, good supply of power. Water is there for us. And most important, talent and know-how rather than a new green point on the map that is from 0 exercise.
The other part that we invested in Utah, and you can say Utah is a new place for you, but not for our team. We -- because over there, we not only formed a new fab, we acquired an existing team, an existing factory. I think great investment for us. We like what the team is doing. They are ramping their new products, and that's why we build there. And this is also what informed our decision.
We could have looked at an alternative to Lehi 2, but we decided Utah is the best place, and I'm very happy about it. So that investment is ongoing. It's also why we have still some minimum level of CapEx in 2026, but we'll be done with that towards the end of '26, beginning of '27. And then we are really completing phase in Phase 3. So that's what we call geopolitical dependable capacity.
The last point I will make, and I'm sure you'll have a follow-up on that, Jim, but China is an important market for us. But look, China is less than 20% of world GDP. To me, it's about the same, call it, 20% of the semiconductor TAM that we want to support. So we need to support China. Today, we can support China from the U.S., but I have to be ready for a case we cannot. And this is where we have the rest of the footprint of our capacity. We have a fab in Europe. We have 2 fabs in Japan. We have a fab in China.
And we have learned a little bit of -- we have tuned our machine in April because we got a little bit of a dry run, what happens if there are U.S.-based tariffs or what else. So we have -- we had a good answer to our customers. And we are now making it even better. So some of the cases for technologies that were only -- were building one fab, we are now requalifying. We own our technology, okay? We own our destiny.
So we are moving them into places like Japan, like Germany. We have our assembly and test houses in China and in Malaysia, in the Philippines. So when I talk with -- and I just was in China a month ago, the answer we have right now is excellent to our customers in China. But of course, we have to be prepared to be dynamic. I don't -- I can't call what the trade tensions will develop into. But I think TI is a great answer for both our China-based customers, but also the outside of China-based customers. And that also informs our strategy moving forward.
So it sounds like the customer response to that strategy, including the potential kind of geographic diversification has been positive.
Yes. And again, look, I'm not trying to call what's going to happen in 2, 5 or 7 years, and the rules can change every -- we saw a lot of dynamics in that. But you can't prepare yourself to any scenario. But I like our position. I like our position both for our China customers. I like our position for the rest of the world. I think as a TI owner, you can feel good about TI is prepared to a set of scenarios. And I think we actually can be one of the most resilient suppliers in our industry.
Great. Maybe moving on to Embedded Processing. That's an area you touched on a few minutes back. I think you've been quite positive on rejuvenating your embedded portfolio. Talk a little bit about how your team is looking to regain share. Can you kind of elaborate on what the medium- to long-term goal is for embedded? And there are specific sort of applications or geographies you're looking to target to kind of like drive that share retake?
Yes. Again, embedded, I commented before, we will be the first one to say, hey, this is not something we are happy with the results that we have generated for our owners during the last run. If you look at -- really, if you look at the bigger picture, since 2017, we've been losing market share in embedded. And I think we have stabilized that share loss. I think -- we have to establish a trend, but I will dare and say that it's stabilized. And Amichai will argue that we are starting to show -- I want to make it a trend, okay?
So quarter in, quarter out, let's show a trend of market share gains in embedded because embedded has to be an equal contributor to free cash flow per share growth in Analog. And by the way, when you build your portfolio in embedded differently, and this is what we are doing right now, higher breadth of products, serving customers like industrial and automotive, having this diversity and longevity and bringing most important manufacturing inside Lehi, there is no reason that, that will be very different than Analog, especially when you go to the more catalog-ish type of embedded.
And that's where -- that's in the center of our strategy with low-power MCUs, with wireless connectivity that is getting revised now in our portfolio, with real-time control. Think about all these data centers. Someone has to convert all the 800 volts coming into the data center in the future all the way down to Vicor. Our DSPs or our [ 6,000 ] MCUs are in the center of that platform, and we are winning share over there, and we plan to play a bigger role over there.
Of course, Analog will also help with all the power management part that we are building. So I'm encouraged with where we have progressed in embedded, but I think there is so much more opportunity. And if you look at the -- if you talk with the embedded processing team, their ambition is higher. They say, okay, our compare is easier. Maybe we are coming from a lower point. We need to outshine the Analog folks.
That's an internal competition in the company. But I will tell you that I will be very pleased if embedded is at least an equal contributor to the long-term growth of free cash flow per share. And I think they are set to do it. You wouldn't see TI is investing $15 billion in Lehi if we were not convinced that the team can do it.
Yes. Great. Industrial end market, if we can talk about that for a second. I think it's obvious you have a very, very broad range of applications here. Any applications that stand out to you in terms of the growth potential within industrial? And then maybe do you think -- where do you think you're most differentiated in your product offerings relative to peers?
Yes. Look, on the industrial side, as I mentioned before, this is a huge market for us. I think at the peak, it was about 40% of our revenue. So -- and so much room to grow. We are far away from trend line. I mentioned before, 30% lower than the previous peak. And the next peak should be higher if you think about secular growth. So a lot of room.
You do see -- and we have 9 sectors in industrial now. We kind of a little bit did some consolidation there. We look at the 9 sectors. Some of them are already back to where they used to be or back to the previous. Not like all of our peers, aerospace and defense established a new peak for us, unfortunately, with what's going on globally. But areas that are related to electrification, and specifically around the data center, all this power delivery into the [ rack ], if you will, it's a great opportunity for TI, both on Analog and Embedded.
And we are seeing, again -- we established again the same level of revenue on a quarterly basis previous -- versus the previous peak, but it's growing very, very quickly. So I'm encouraged about that. The other markets, and the biggest one for us is automation robotics. Look, I know this is an opportunity waiting to happen. I know that because I see what we're doing in our factories, inside Texas Instruments, inside our assembly and test. There is a clear efficiency gain on cost per pin that we make when we make a package using robotics and AGVs and even humanoids in our factories, it is just early phases.
And we are investing. We are adding automation. I think a lot of our customers are still in a wait-and-see mode related to the geopolitical tensions, related to the trade. But underneath that, there is a lot of work on automation, on digitization, on electrification, on the grid, you talk about energy infrastructure to serve all these data centers. I'm very, very excited about the long term. I can't wait for it to happen. I know right now, we're getting impatient, but [indiscernible] persistence here because the secular growth is real.
Of course, anecdotally, I can give you a gazillion amount of examples, but we also have to show it in the numbers. Again and again, it showed in the past that it does it, and I'm very convinced that we are going to see it, maybe later than sooner because of what we discussed before. But once we have stability on all the noise we are filling with trade and tariffs, I think it's going to be a great opportunity.
Yes. And a little more tactically, last quarter, you talked about -- you put up a very good growth in industrial. You talked about the pull-in effect earlier. Maybe just kind of walk us through exactly what you saw in Q2. Was that pull-in activity just limited to China? Do you believe? Was it broader than that? I mean, I guess -- and if you could share anything that's happened this quarter, that would be great.
Yes. First, on this quarter, let's let the quarter play out. But that's what informed our Q3 discussion or July discussion on the earnings call. The biggest sale was China. China grew sequentially in that quarter, 20% or 19%, I don't remember, 19%. So look, this is above natural. And we also saw signs that is going to -- companies took some inventory and then started to deplete back some of it because they got comfortable again.
So to me, it's again noise. And what I've learned also as an engineer on noise, the more you sample it, the less information you get. You just make more noise. So let it play out. And to me, that doesn't change the big picture, Jim. I am convinced that the industrial secular trend continues and actually accelerates in the next decade.
Yes. Automotive. We've talked about it sort of lagging the other markets. But I think historically and consistently, you've always talked about that being a big opportunity for TI. Maybe just kind of talk about sort of what is going on in that market from a -- more from a design perspective. Where are you seeing traction? Are you seeing the most traction in EVs or ICE or ADAS systems or -- and then geographically, Europe, U.S., China, et cetera?
Yes. Automotive, great market. I think that's part of the reason you saw a correction that is very minor. Peak to trough, call it mid- to high single digits. And we call it hovering at a trough. But if I look at our quarterly revenue in automotive over the span of 3 or 4 years, it's kind of -- it's ready to grow again. And it's been a very shallow correction. So -- and the reason is the secular growth. The reason is more content per vehicle.
Our opportunity is across the sectors in automotive with ADAS, of course, electrification on EVs that everybody talks about. But it's also on body and on new braking systems and on infotainment, more speakers and more displays and more connectivity and more and more and more. I don't think it runs forever because one day, you do have enough speakers and massage seats and fans and displays in the car, but we are not there yet, right? So I'm very encouraged about that.
Geographically, look, the EV adoption in China is just -- it's almost, I would say, done. Every new platform is planned to -- on EVs. Customers prefer EVs. They're the most cool cars, the most -- the cars that people want to buy. So I think 55% of new cars sold right now are EVs in China, and I think that S-curve adoption is very quick. To the point that even the government said, hey, slow down, okay, let's tone down the craziness of that growth. I think worldwide, it takes a little longer on EVs, and that's good.
I think the market will be of higher quality. But if I look at our customers long term, they are shifting their R&D into EV platforms or plug-in hybrid EV. And I think that trend continues, maybe in a slower pace versus China, but I'm very encouraged about that. Our opportunity in EVs and especially on the embedded side is to add or to attract or to attack more sockets. And this goes back to our investment, expand your portfolio, Analog and Embedded, have tailwinds or create tailwinds across the sectors inside the cars across the sockets. And I think we are well positioned to do that in automotive.
One thing we didn't talk about relative to your manufacturing strategy is just sort of like the -- and I think the industry is always focused on the issue of not just units because we look at the same trend line you do, but also pricing. How do you think about pricing structurally going forward for the next several years? And is pricing a lever that you think TI can use to gain market share?
Look, in terms of what happened, we know what happened. Pricing, you have to go back to the late '90s to see a price hike as the industry saw during the '21, '22, maybe even '23, but maybe '21, '22 time frame. I think TI was very conscious about, yes, this is -- it's probably not going to last forever. And if the market price changes, respond. And we responded, and I give the team credit of staying on sockets, not walking away and then calling, hey, this is how to compete. But we know how to compete. Sometimes we have to up our game on cost, and we've done that to kind of shrink die sizes, get test programs to be more efficient, but we stayed the course, and I think we are gaining share. We are seeing this.
The -- I think pricing always gets rationalized over cycles. This cycle right now is very -- is not very rapidly going back into trend line. So the opportunity is not there yet, I would say. Prices we see will go up and down all the time. But for this year, I would say it behaved as we expected. It's about kind of a low single-digit decline versus last year. It all depends on supply and demand for the future, as you know.
So the beautiful thing about our position is we can play either game because of our cost structure, because of our competitive advantages, because our appeal to multiple sockets, TI has an opportunity to play across sockets. And I see it as a competitive advantage, meaning I don't have to subselect. I don't have to walk away from socket. We can make good money and good profit and good growth of free cash flow per share across the portfolio, which I think is harder to do in a different manufacturing strategy.
Great. I think with that, we're out of time. But Haviv, thank you for being us with us. It was a great overview.
Thank you.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
Texas Instruments — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: TI sieht seit H1 2024 eine branchenweite Erholung; 4 von 5 Endmärkten erholen sich, Automotive hinkt noch hinterher. Data Center wächst am stärksten (~+50%) und soll 2025 auf ~$1–1,2 Mrd. Run‑Rate hinauslaufen. Management setzt auf US‑Fabs, Vorratsaufbau und Free Cashflow pro Aktie (FCF/Aktie) als Leitkennzahl.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Fertigung: US‑zentrierte Kapazitäten (Texas, Utah/Lehi) als "dependable" Cluster; Phase‑3‑Investitionen laufen, Abschluss Ende 2026/Anfang 2027 erwartet.
- Inventar & CapEx: Bewusster Inventaraufbau zur Abfederung von Nachfrage‑Spitzen; CapEx erhöht D&A kurzfristig, langfristig aber hohe Margenfall‑through erwartet.
- Portfolio: Stärkere Investitionen in Embedded‑Processing, High‑Voltage und daten‑zentrische Analogteile, Ziel: Marktanteilsgewinn in Embedded und größere Rolle im Data‑Center‑TAM.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Data Center: Management nennt konkret eine 2025er Run‑Rate im Bereich ~$1–1,2 Mrd. für Data‑Center‑Revenues — höheres Wachstumspotenzial als bisher kommuniziert.
- Q2/Q3‑Dynamik: Q2‑Sequenzieller Anstieg teils durch Pull‑ins in China (China ~+19–20% seq.); das erklärt moderat geringere Q3‑Sequentials im Juli‑Ausblick.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Markterholung: Analysten hakte nach Regionen/Endmärkten — Klarstellung: Data Center und Consumer/Comms treiben Erholung, Industrial erholt langsamer, Automotive noch hinterher.
- Margen/FCF: Nachfrage zu Weg zurück zu mittleren 60er‑Bruttomargen; Management betont FCF/Aktie als Zielgröße und nennt $8–9 FCF/Aktie für niedrigere 2026‑Szenarien.
- Fertigung & China: Rückfragen zur Resilienz vs. geopolitischen Risiken; Management beschreibt Multi‑Footprint (USA, Japan, Europa, China, ASE/SE Asia) und Möglichkeiten zur Requalifizierung von Technologie.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Call stärkt das Bild von TI als zyklisch positioniertem, aber langfristig strukturell wachsendem Anbieter durch gezielte Investitionen in Fertigung, Inventar und Portfolio‑Erweiterung (insb. Data Center, Embedded). Kurzfristig drücken erhöhte CapEx/D&A und volatile Pull‑ins die Margen, langfristig sollte die Strategie FCF/Aktie und Marktanteile erhöhen; Risiko bleibt geopolitische Unsicherheit.
Texas Instruments — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
1. Question Answer
Thanks, everyone. I'm still Chris Danely, your friendly neighborhood semiconductor analyst here at Citi. I guess it's top pick morning, another 1 of our top picks here, Texas Instruments. And like I said, I'm a simple man. So why is TI one of our top picks? One of the highest, in fact, the second highest margin and earnings growth in the semiconductor universe. We think roughly 80% to 90% earnings growth from the current estimates today. Actually, that was 100% earnings growth from the estimates today 2 quarters ago, but these guys are doing such a good job this year that the numbers have gone up already. So now it's down to 80% or 90%. Anyway, it's my pleasure to have Rafael Lizardi, the CFO; and also Mike Beckman, the newly minted VP of Investor Relations. So Rafael, thanks for coming.
Thanks for inviting us. It's good to be here.
Of course. So you guys were one of the first companies to call out a recovery earlier in the year. Maybe just sort of take us through how the year has gone so far, like what you saw? Clearly, things have bounced nicely. And just give us sort of a time line on what's happened this year?
Yes. So our sense is the recovery is underway. It is happening. It's broad-based. We're seeing 4 of our 5 end markets in recovery. The exception of that is automotive. But it's not quite happening a snapback as maybe some people anticipated or as other recoveries have happened. So that part is a little different. And some of that, we think, could be due to uncertainties at the macro level. Some of that, as I mentioned, is because automotive is not quite recovering like others, but we are in recovery. It's just not quite like it's been in other places now.
As far as our strategy on that, we remain steadfast on our approach. We have embarked on a multiyear investment on manufacturing and technology. We have several clusters of U.S.-based factories in Sherman, in Richardson, both in Texas and then in Utah. And we are very close to finishing what we call Phase 2, which is the brick-and-mortar. And then when we get to Phase 3, it's just incremental capacity based on demand. So then the CapEx is just size for what's needed on a demand basis as opposed to just big chunks in brick-and-mortar. And of course, we'll continue to focus on the long-term growth of free cash flow per share, which we believe is what drives value for investors long term.
I might just add on to that. The recovery that's underway, what we saw in industrial join that recovery in first quarter, it continued in the second quarter, very broad across the sectors. And as Rafael pointed out, if you just take a step back and look at global shipments even outside of just TI, just overall for our industry, it is recovering, but probably at a different pace than historical cycles. But what is continuing to grow for us and what we see in the opportunity in this cycle is there's more content in industrial applications that we sell into, automotive for us in the future, the TAM that's expanding in enterprise and data center, those are all areas we'd love to talk more about to the opportunities there. But that expansion, the end equipment that weren't there a few years ago, that are like robotics, that's expanding. And so we see the opportunity to continue to grow. So through this cycle, we'll see how it plays out, but we are very excited about what this recovery is going to hold for us long term.
And with this improvement in business, at least in 4 of the 5 end markets and various geographies out there, how would you characterize your visibility right now maybe versus 3 months ago or 6 months ago? Have you seen any change, any improvement? Anything there?
I'll start. I'll give you a few comments. One, our lead times remain really low. And that is by design. So we have capacity in place. We have inventory in place. We have new processes internally where we are building more buffers than we used to before. So our business is largely a catalog-based business, not entirely, of course. But largely, more than half of our revenue is on catalog-based business, so we can build to stock. And so even though we're already in an upward progress with the cycle, we can keep those lead times short. And we expect to continue to do that through the upturn. If we are successful in our strategy, we will keep those lead time short through the upturn.
The other comment I would give you is that the aging orders, so orders inside the quarter, which are a good leading indicator, those were pretty strong January through April. And April, in particular, were really strong. And we think some of that was due to the Liberation Day and some of the dynamics that happened there. But then things did slow down after April, or at least didn't grow as they normally would have month on month on month. And again, some of that was the Liberation Day potential pull-ins, and we talked about that at some length at our July earnings release call.
Okay. So let's dig into a few of those. You guys have been the pioneer in a number of things in the analog space and in semis in terms of honing down your distribution and also increasing inventory. Maybe just talk about sort of your unique situation for inventory. I get questions on this all the time. TI has all this inventory. Isn't that going to be bad? Aren't they going to have to write off half of it or whatever. Maybe just talk about your sort of inventory goals in terms of days and why TI can keep more inventory than other semiconductor companies?
Yes. So a couple of things on inventory. Mike, please, if I miss anything. But there are a couple of factors that are driving our inventory strategy that is different than other companies. One is, as I mentioned, that our business, more than half of it is catalog. So think of hammers and nails, right? You go to Home Depot, you don't expect to place an order for 12 weeks, right? You can get those parts. Now not every company can sell the parts that we sell, but it's catalog. So they sell to many, many customers. They are not designed for any particular customer.
The other aspect of the strategy is, as you alluded to, we reduced our exposure to distributors significantly. We used to ship 70% of our revenue through distribution. Now it's about 20%. In fact, less than 20% of our revenue goes through distribution. The third aspect that's also relevant here is that we are shipping more and more -- we're building more and more internally. So we're close to now 90% of our wafer fabs of our production from the front end is internal on the wafer fab front. And then on the back end, I think it's close to 80%, 85% is internal, and that's up from 80% and 60%, respectively. So as you bring more internal, that puts upward pressure on your inventory levels.
Now having said that, depending on how the -- so to answer your question on inventory days, our inventory days, I think, last quarter close to 225, if I recall correctly, 221. And remember, inventory days is a backward-looking metric. So you really have to think about it on what you want to have for the future. And we have a framework for next year's revenue, $20 billion to $26 billion. We put that out there.
If we're at the lower end of that framework for next year, and you'll hear more about that in October and January. But if we're at the lower end of that, then we'll have to adjust our wafer starts down to manage our inventory better and to either keep it flat or drain it. So that would bring lower wafer starts in the coming quarters, which would have repercussions in the P&L. But at the end of the day, it's the right thing to do. And that would last a couple of quarters until we digest that inventory and then get going again.
When you think about our portfolio and look across what we consider general purpose all the way to ASSP spectrum, and if you think about the economic relevance of a device, when you release it, that device can ramp for decades and continue to grow. And you think about the number of customers are on a device, the mix of applications that it's on, and then you take a step back and look at the allocation of capital to inventory and you go through any of these previous cycles, having inventory is really vital to making sure you could seize the opportunity. And we don't want to let that be something that keeps us from being able to seize that next opportunity. So it's an important allocation of capital is how we look at it.
Yes. And with this, keeping the lead times flat, your results have been pretty good for the last couple of quarters. Have you seen an increase in turns business like within the quarter or moving higher throughout the year?
As I alluded to earlier, January through April, yes, especially April, but then things slowed down after April, after Liberation Day. And we don't comment on inside the current quarter. We'll talk about that in October.
Chris, what that did -- we saw the turns business begin to transition positive in early 2024. So kind of I think first quarter of last year, it began to transition and grew every quarter throughout '24 into first quarter of '25 into the beginning of second quarter as well and then begin to moderate in the back half of last quarter.
Okay. And then with the lead times flat and yet sales increasing, you guys, the inventory has been coming down. Do you think that you'll be able to keep these lead times flat if the recovery continues? Like how are you modulating utilization rates?
So between the capacity that we have, that we've added, and the inventory that we have in place, and the processes that we have internally with the buffer strategy and a lot of different things that we've done internally in our processes, the answer is yes, we expect to maintain short lead times through the upturn.
Great. And then you talked about another unique thing about TI is that you're sort of moving towards more internal manufacturing, some of the peers that are 50% outsourced or even more. Maybe just go through some of the advantages of increased internal manufacturing.
Yes. So first, you control your own destiny, you control your supply chain. So that gives you a lot of advantages in terms of the supply, the manufacturing, the delivery to customers. You also have a lot of advantages in the design process. When you own that, you can just integrate better the front end and the back end and packaging and different things on that front.
But then the other key is your cost. Now you have to be a leader in order to claim this, right? It's not just you have internal manufacturing, you have better cost. You have to have a world-class cost footprint, which we do. Part of that is obviously the 300-millimeter footprint, because that 300-millimeter is significantly less expensive on a per unit basis, 40% less expensive than 200-millimeter. And because that's internal to us, not through a foundry, we get to keep those cost savings, either keep or pass them on depending on the competitiveness of the particular end market and product that we're selling.
Great. Let's jump into another comment you made earlier just on the pull-ins. So we've had various numbers of your competitors talk about pull-ins, it's 5% to us, it's 1% to us, we're seeing some, we're not seeing some. We're seeing a ton. Maybe just run through the metrics for TI on pull-ins and what you saw earlier this year? And are we done with it? Are we maybe not done with it? How can we tell that we're done with it? What sort of tea leaves are you guys reading? Or if you just skip straight to the chicken bones and stuff?
Yes. So incredibly difficult to tell what's that and what's not, okay? The customers don't send you a note with their orders to tell you exactly what that is. And of course, we have 80,000 different customers, 100,000 different parts. So the permutations are endless. But our sense is that the orders in April had a high component of pull-ins because of the Liberation Day and the uncertainty going on there. And since then, there's been a digestion of that. How long that lasts? I don't know. We'll report on third quarter in October, and we'll give you our best sense of what's happened in third quarter and then our sense for what that means for fourth quarter.
I think if you just put yourself in the shoes of a customer in April, and there was a scenario where you had an opportunity where there was a pause or there was no tariff to worry about and you already have very low inventory, would you take that opportunity to get a little bit more on your shelf? And where this gets difficult to completely tease out is there's also a recovery happening at the same time. So how much of each of the components are playing a role? Like you said, we don't have a check box to be able to determine that. But it's, I think, not a challenging leap to assume there was some of that, that could have occurred.
Yes. And let me pivot a little bit to maybe a slightly bigger picture, so that we don't miss that, and it's how well prepared we are and how well our strategy is working to set up the company, set it up for the longer-term secular growth trends that are happening in the industry in industrial, in automotive, in data centers. We have expanded our manufacturing footprint in the United States primarily with geopolitically dependable capacity that our customers really value. And then at the same time, in the assembly test in Malaysia, the Philippines primarily. So we have a footprint that will set us up really well for the coming years to capitalize on those secular macro trends.
So I'm guessing the move to manufacture more in the U.S. is not going to be a deterrent or a problem for Texas Instruments?
No, no. In fact, it's an advantage, as I alluded to, and it could become even more of an advantage as time goes on.
So I did get a few questions from some of your larger shareholders to ask. One of them is on just the whole move to manufacture and the CHIPS Act money. I think you guys have taken some CHIPS Act money so far. Any risk -- this is direct from the shareholder. Any risk to the U.S. government taking a stake in TI as a result of the CHIPS Act money?
Nothing along those lines has been discussed, has been proposed. We have not been approached on any of that as far as that goes. We have an agreement with the government that was signed under the previous administration. And then we reworked that agreement over the last 6 months or so with the new administration on some very minor things that were all favorable to TI. Frankly, there were little things they wanted to change, but nothing along the lines of what you're hearing from companies like Intel.
And we've been executing really well to the CapEx expansion plans, where RFAB 2, we're building that out. SM1 with the pilot line, we're ahead of schedule and getting that to where it needs to be. We've got SM2 with the shell in place, LFAB 1 tooling that and then getting the clean room, partial clean room built for that. We're working toward those milestones that are associated with those projects. You probably saw in June, there was an announcement in coordination with the administration and several of our customers as well, just in their support of what we're doing. So we've been well aligned in the direction.
Yes. I'll also mention that people think of the CHIPS grant or the CHIPS money as the grant. The grant is only -- well, I say only, but it's $1.6 billion for us. But on the ITC, the investment tax credit, we told you, I think it was a couple of years ago when the law was signed, that we expected $6 billion to $9 billion in total primarily from the ITC. Well, that number just went up as the ITC went from 25% to 35%. And other things have also happened that have given us a better understanding of the ITC where I think we're going to get even more money on that front. So that is really the bigger lever, the ITC rather than the direct funding.
I was hoping you said, okay, thanks. We checked that box. Two more. One is, there's been several reports of TI raising prices out there. Is this happening? Is this a good thing? Do you guys raise prices on certain parts every week? Maybe just give us some perspective on that. I had a lot of nervous nellies. Please ask Rafael about this. So...
Maybe I'll take it, and Rafael, please add. But part of just good portfolio management is just making sure your products are priced to where the market needs to be and they're consistent with that. That's a routine practice that we have. So that's not a new thing we just have all of a sudden realized. We always are making sure our products are priced effectively. No change in our view of the long-term kind of base case assumption on price over time, kind of a low single-digit, 2%, 3% kind of decline over time. That continues to be how we view the base case assumption on price over time.
Great. And last one, then we can dig into the other long-term stuff. I remember Haviv was asked a question on the conference call that, hey, you guys seemed a little more bullish earlier in the summer than you are right now. I had a number of folks asking me for some like clarification on that. Were you guys a little more bullish at the beginning of the summer than you are right now? Or is that just people making stuff up essentially? Fake news?
My sense is, not just with TI, but the industry as a whole, the tone was a little different in April and May than it was in July and August. And maybe nothing quantified, but the tone. And I think that was a function of those orders, the order trends that I referred to earlier that April was pretty strong. But it appears that some of that was pull-ins. Again, it's hard to tell with so many permutations on orders and customers, but it looks like some of that was pull-ins. So that's why I said earlier that the recovery is underway, but it's just not quite snapping back like some people thought at one point or maybe as those early indications or early signs may have indicated.
And the long-term structural growth opportunity we have, that continues to strengthen. That has not changed. In fact, it has continued to grow. Just the opportunity continues to get bigger for us.
Great. So then we can jump to my questions now. So gross margins, obviously, we're forecasting some nice gross margin expansion for you guys. Rafael, can you run through the gross margin drivers between utilization rates, mix and depreciation, and then we'll start to dig into CapEx a little bit.
Yes, yes. So the first and foremost important driver is revenue. There's no question about that. So we got to grow the top line in order to get margins higher. The guidance that we've given is take the revenue and fold that through at 75% to 85%. So pick the midpoint there, 80%. So we get an extra $100 million of revenue, you get $80 million of gross margin. But then you have to adjust for depreciation. And depreciation is increasing just given that the CapEx that we're spending eventually hits the P&L. Now of course, keep in mind that depreciation and equipment, we use 5-year straight line, but that equipment lasts a lot longer than that. So that's why with depreciation, you got to be careful not to -- how you take that information and make your judgments on the company longer term. That's why free cash flow is a better metric, we think, to use over the long term.
But there's -- so revenue, there's depreciation, but then there's also utilization, as you talked about. And utilization comes and goes, right? That over a long enough time, it's kind of steady and it's not impactful. But over the short term, it adds or detracts depending on what's going on. As I alluded to earlier, given the inventory position that we have right now and depending on what happens on revenue next year, we may need to adjust factory loading down in the coming quarters for a few quarters until we rectify the inventory situation a bit and just stop it from growing and maybe drain it -- and not maybe likely drain it for a few quarters. So that would put a headwind on gross margins, but it should be temporary for a few quarters until we rectify the inventory situation.
Can you just run through the latest CapEx figures for this year? And then I think you've given a range for CapEx?
Yes. So for this year, count on about $5 billion again. So it's going to be 3 years in a row of $5 billion. And before that, we had a couple of years of high CapEx as well, not quite $5 billion, but close to that. So, so far, by the end of this year, it's going to be 5 out of 6 years of high CapEx intensity with the company. For next year, we put out a framework. Last year, we put out for the first time and then we put it out again in February at the capital management call. It's $2 billion to $5 billion. And that depends on our revenue expectations for next year and beyond, of course.
So those revenue expectations, we put out 4 scenarios, $20 billion, $22 billion, $24 billion and $26 billion of revenue for next year. And at the high end, at $26 billion, the CapEx would be $5 billion, and at the low end would be $2 billion to $3 billion. And just take our midpoint for this quarter and expectations for -- if you look at consensus numbers for next year, it seems that we're more likely than not to be at the lower end of the framework than we're not. We're not calling it yet. And we call 1 quarter at a time, and we're prepared for any scenarios, any of those 4 scenarios with capacity and inventory. But right now, it seems that more likely than not the lower end of that framework is the more likely scenario. So therefore, you would expect -- and again, we're not making an announcement. We'll talk about that later this year or at the beginning of next year. We would expect CapEx to be at the lower end.
Now there's a floor on CapEx at $2 billion. That's a hard floor because we're still building some brick-and-mortar, primarily in LFAB 2 in Utah. So you don't want to stop building the factory halfway, so you got to finish that. So that's why there's a floor in 2026 of that $2 billion. So again, if we're at the lower end of that revenue, expect the CapEx to be towards the lower end, let's say, $2 billion to $3 billion or so of CapEx.
And you might recall that about a year ago, we talked about there's a Phase 1, Phase 2, Phase 3 to the CapEx. This is essentially us moving into that third phase of modularity to the tools themselves and being able to add them as we need them, and we have scalability in the CapEx itself. So we're moving into that kind of third phase as we start having that ability to do that.
Great. And then last thing is just depreciation. I think you guys have given some metrics on depreciation ranges as well. Can you just run through those for this year?
Yes. For this year, for '25 and no change. So what I'm about to say is the same as what we said before. But for this year, $1.8 billion to $2 billion of depreciation. And for next year, $2.3 billion to $2.7 billion, but likely at the lower end of that range. So let's say, $2.3 billion to $2.5 billion is the range for next year.
And when would depreciation peak?
Well, it depends on CapEx. But if CapEx is at next year's CapEx in 2026, if CapEx is at the lower end, as I said a little while ago, we would probably have one more year of upward pressure on depreciation in '27 before it stabilizes.
Great. Let's just dig into the end markets a little bit. We had some crosscurrents yesterday on automotive. You talked about basically everything is working except for automotive. Why do you think the automotive market has been the last end market to bounce back here?
Yes. And some of this could just be first in, first out. Auto was the last end market to begin its inventory correction. And it didn't have -- as you've probably seen, the level of decline that it had was much more shallow compared to the other end markets. And so if you look at it in totality, it's been kind of hovering at this shallow trough for some time. You look deeper inside and start looking at the regions, and we've had some regions outperform. China has performed very well in automotive. We've got a very broad exposure. You look across the region set, it's pretty well distributed to the size that those markets are. So we don't have a significant SKU either way. So wherever there's a socket, we're going to be playing a role in it. And so we'll have to see how it transitions. We're not saying that it's not working. It's too soon to call a broad recovery there. You compare that to an industrial where you look across every sector, and it's double-digit or close to double-digit growth across every sector on a sequential basis. I just don't think we can say the same thing yet with automotive.
Sure. So that's a nice segue into industrial. It's been by far, I think, your strongest end market this year. Do you think that's just the first in, first out type of comparison there, that it was first into the correction, so first out. And I think there's still plenty of room to go on the industrial side because it's -- I think you guys talked about it's still pretty far below the previous peak. So maybe just run through those metrics and some commentary there.
It is. It's well below its previous peak, even with the growth that we had in the second quarter. I think second quarter was up mid-teens, both year-on-year and quarter-on-quarter. And that's a pretty strong level of growth for industrial. And I think this is partially a reflection of that end market went through a pretty substantial inventory digestion just across our industry.
And obviously, Rafael was talking about lead times being short. It's a long tail of many, many customers, some very small, some larger as well. But if you had inventory, you have to work it down, sometimes it could take some time. And I think our industry saw that, got to a point where that inventory starts to get small and customers have to start resuming ordering again. And I think we started to see that stabilize in fourth quarter of 2024, started to see that early signs of growth in first. I think that was when we first called that, hey, this is starting to recover. And then that was reinforced again with what we saw in the second quarter.
And again, what's encouraging is you look deeper into the sectors within, some of those sectors last year, like factory automation, that was just continuing to decline double digits, beginning to recover, showing that double-digit growth. And it's not one region doing it. It's across the board. We're seeing significant growth there.
Great. Yes, let's just dig into the geos, getting into -- I might as well start with China, the whole China for China move, not so much a brand-new move over there. I'm sure that's been going on for quite some time. Any impact to TI? And maybe talk about how your sort of business trends have been in China so far this year.
Yes, I'll start, and Rafael, feel free to add. But I'd say, first, the performance has been pretty good if you look at our results in China, and I think our advantages have served us well there. First, to size it, it's about 20% of our business roughly, if we look at our headquartered revenue is out of China. And what our customers care about there. They want the best parts. They're not building products that they want to have be inferior. They want to have the best systems. And so that means they're going to buy great products to solve their problem.
I think when you look at the TI portfolio, I can buy the majority of the parts I'm going to put on the board without having to go to a dozen different suppliers. That makes us really easy to do business with. We make sure it's available for you, make sure that when we sell it to you, we've got a lot of ways to make that very friction-free for you. So we make ourselves be really easy to work with. And I think if you do that, you can be successful there, and I think we're seeing the results of that.
But at the same time, I think we have to acknowledge that it's going to be -- and this has been over a long period of time that this has happened, this is not a new conversation, but that you'll have to earn the business. You can't just show up and assume you're going to get the socket, you got to have the best part. But if you do that, you can win. And remember, a customer in China that designs in a TI part is likely going to want to use that. Not just in China, I mean they may want to sell that in places like the U.S. or in Europe or in South America and other geographies. So having access to our capacity, which is very geopolitically dependable, very diverse, gives you a lot of options. It meets the flexibility our customers want to have across the globe gives us a good opportunity there.
Great. What's been your strongest geography so far this year?
China.
I had to get that in there. All right. So another thing about TI. If you look at your sort of revenue growth metrics, you undergrew the competition from, I think, '21 to '23 or something like that. And yet last year and this year, you've been outgrowing the competition and the space. What's changed?
Our CFO.
Well, I'll start, and Mike, you go ahead. But during '21, '22 time frame, we lost share, okay? And some of that, or a lot of it was we hit supply constraints. And we didn't have RFAB 2 ready on time to handle what came at us during the pandemic and the post-pandemic. So that's part of the reason why we are operating very differently now, and we have added capacity in a significant way, because we're not going to be caught like that again. And with those additions and with the inventory strategy that we have and the processes that we put in place internally, we have been able to regain most or all of that share in the last 1 year, 1.5 years, particularly, but not only in China. China was a place where we disproportionately took a hit during that time. China and in personal electronics, depending on whether you look at it by end market or by geography. So we're in a much better position now than we were a couple of years ago.
And Chris, if you look at the portfolio, especially when you look at the analog side first, the portfolio that we have, it's very clear that we have the parts we need to be successful. And we're building new products every year. That's always an area we're going to be -- we want to make sure we have the best parts in, but we have a strong portfolio. We've got the opportunity in front of us to win that.
As we look at embedded now with also the changes that we've made, that portfolio is very different than it was 5 years ago and even 10 years ago. Big change in making sure it's a much more diverse set of products, attacking a lot more markets inside of embedded, very industrial and automotive focused. And so we are going into this next cycle with an analog business with a strong portfolio, a great ability to service our customers through our channels well and an embedded business that also will contribute to that growth at the same time. So we expect growth out of both of these businesses.
Would you say that TI has maybe gotten a little more aggressive out there in terms of the business and the share gains in the last like few years? Could that be -- I've just heard that from some folks that are your customers and your competitors. Is that maybe just something that they're picking up or falsity? Or what do you think?
I think we are being more assertive, yes, on various fronts. Our engagements, various strategies that we use, the inventory is a good one as well as a good example to point to, where we're going to take it, and we're ready to win.
Great. Last question. Since I have the CFO, I have to ask. Even though we're here at the bottom of the cycle or bouncing off the bottom of the cycle, you guys are still generating a ton of cash. You've been one of the pioneers in terms of splitting the dividend versus buyback, although the buyback has slowed down a little bit somewhat recently. Any reason why the buyback has slowed down? And then also, I know you guys have traditionally shied away from M&A. Is there any like potential for future M&A? Or is that door pretty much shut permanently?
Yes. So a lot on that question. So let me see if I can address it all in the minute that we have left. On the capital allocation side of the question, big picture, our goal is to return all free cash flow, dividends and buybacks, and we've been doing that. Now of course, in the last few years, free cash flow has been depressed with the higher CapEx. So it's been relatively easy to return all free cash flow since the dividend alone has accounted for more than the free cash flow.
But we have continued the buyback. But as you pointed out, it's been slower -- it has been lower than in previous years. And that's just because the focus has been on CapEx. When you -- capital allocation, it depends on what's going on. And over the last few years, CapEx has been the primary driver of -- the primary call on capital at the company. As that subsides over the coming years, then free cash flow will improve. And then we'll have more free cash flow to distribute between the dividend and the buyback. So our expectation -- your expectation should be that we'll continue to do that.
On M&A, things haven't changed. We continue to evaluate companies and primarily on the analog side, and it's got to make a good sense strategically. And then the numbers have to add up. We continue to assess different opportunities. And if those present themselves, we have a strong balance sheet and, as you pointed out, good free cash flow. So we have ample room to make something happen. But strategically, we're really well positioned. We don't have big holes in the portfolio that we have to go out and fill. So it's not something that we need to go out of our way to do that, but we always assess that as needed.
Great. Thanks again. We're out of time. Thanks, everyone.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
Texas Instruments — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Kurzfassung: TI sieht eine breite Erholung in 4 von 5 Endmärkten (Ausnahme: Automotive). Lieferzeiten bleiben bewusst kurz, die Inventarposition ist erhöht, aber strategisch aufgebaut. Fokus bleibt auf langfristigem Free Cash Flow pro Aktie.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Fertigung: Starker Ausbau interner Produktion: ~90% Front‑End (Wafer), ~80–85% Back‑End; US‑Cluster (Sherman, Richardson, Utah) fast in Phase‑2 fertig.
- Inventarstrategie: >50% Kataloggeschäft ermöglicht Build‑to‑stock; Distribution reduziert von ~70% früher auf <20% heute.
- CapEx‑Modell: Dreiphasiger Plan (Brick‑and‑mortar → Modularität); Phase‑3 erlaubt inkrementelle Investitionen je nach Nachfrage.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Finanzrahmen: Bestätigt: 2025 CapEx ≈ $5 Mrd.; 2026 Rahmen $2–$5 Mrd. abhängig von Umsatzszenario $20–$26 Mrd.; Boden bei ~$2 Mrd. wegen laufender Baustellen.
- Staatliche Unterstützung: CHIPS‑Zuschuss ≈ $1,6 Mrd.; Investment Tax Credit (Investment Tax Credit, ITC) steigt realistisch durch Gesetzesänderung (25%→35%) und erhöht erwartete Steueranreize.
- Abschreibung: 2025 Depreciation $1,8–$2,0 Mrd.; 2026 $2,3–$2,7 Mrd., wahrscheinlich am unteren Ende.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Sichtbarkeit: Management meldet starke Bestellungen Jan–Apr, danach Digestion; interne Lageinformationen werden nicht für das laufende Quartal kommentiert (Verweis auf Oktober).
- Pull‑ins & Inventar: April‑Pull‑ins (Liberation Day) als Treiber vermutet; Dauer unklar—Management kann das nicht punktgenau trennen und verschiebt definitive Aussagen.
- Risiken & Margen: Kernfragen zu Margentreibern (Umsatz, Utilization, Abschreibungen). Management war konkret zu Treibern, aber signalisiert, dass bei Inventarabbau kurzfristig niedrigere Auslastung Margen drücken könnte.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit für Aktionäre: Stabiler, gut durchdachter Re‑Aufbau: TI setzt auf interne Produktion und Vorratsaufbau, kauft geopolitisch verlässliche Kapazität und profitiert von höheren ITC‑Erwartungen. Kurzfristig besteht Volatilitätsrisiko (Pull‑ins, Inventarabbau, Abschreibungsdruck), langfristig bleibt die Cash‑floworientierte Story intakt.
Texas Instruments — Q2 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Welcome to the Texas Instruments Second Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. I'm Mike Beckman, Head of Investor Relations, and I'm joined by our Chief Executive Officer, Haviv Ilan and our Chief Financial Officer, Rafael Lizardi. For any of you who missed the release, you can find it on our website at ti.com/ir. This call is being broadcast live over the web and can be accessed through our website. In addition, today's call is being recorded and will be available via replay on our website.
This call will include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties that could cause TI's results to differ materially from management's current expectations. We encourage you to review the notice regarding forward-looking statements contained in the earnings release published today as well as TI's most recent SEC filings for a more complete description. Today, we'll provide the following updates.
First, Haviv will start with a quick overview of the quarter. Next, he will provide insight into second quarter revenue results with some details of what we are seeing with respect to our end markets. Lastly, Rafael will cover financial results, give an update on capital management as well as share the guidance for third quarter 2025.
With that, let me turn it over to Haviv.
Thanks, Mike. Let me start with a quick overview of the second quarter. Revenue came in about as expected at $4.4 billion, an increase of 9% sequentially and an increase of 16% year-over-year. Both Analog and Embedded grew year-on-year and sequentially. Analog revenue grew 18% year-over-year and Embedded Processing grew 10%. Our other segment grew 14% from the year ago quarter.
Let me provide some comments on the current environment and what we saw in the second quarter. We continue to see 2 distinct dynamics at play. First, tariffs and geopolitics are disrupting and reshaping global supply chains. As we work closely with our customers, we are leveraging our global manufacturing capabilities to support their needs. We have flexibility and are prepared to navigate as things evolve.
Second, the semiconductor cycle is playing out. Cyclical recovery is continuing while customer inventories remain at low levels. In times like this, it is important to have capacity and inventory, and we are well positioned. Now I'll share some additional insights into second quarter revenue by end market. First, the industrial market increased upper teens year-on-year and mid-teens sequentially with recovery across all sectors.
The automotive market increased mid-single digits year-on-year and decreased low single digits sequentially. Personal electronics grew around 25% year-on-year and grew upper single digits sequentially. Enterprise systems grew about 40% year-on-year and grew about 10% sequentially. And lastly, communications equipment grew more than 50% year-on-year and was up about 10% sequentially.
With that, let me turn it over to Rafael to review profitability and capital management.
Thanks, Haviv, and good afternoon, everyone. As Haviv mentioned, second quarter revenue was $4.4 billion. Gross profit in the quarter was $2.6 billion or 58% of revenue. Sequentially, gross profit margin increased 110 basis points. Operating expenses in the quarter were $1 billion, up 5% from a year ago and about as expected. On a trailing 12-month basis, operating expenses were $3.9 billion or 23% of revenue.
Operating profit was $1.6 billion in the quarter or 35% of revenue and was up 25% from the year ago quarter. Net income in the quarter was $1.3 billion or $1.41 per share. Earnings per share included a $0.02 benefit not in our original guidance. Let me now comment on our capital management results, starting with our cash generation. Cash flow from operations was $1.9 billion in the quarter and $6.4 billion on a trailing 12-month basis. Capital expenditures were $1.3 billion in the quarter and $4.9 billion over the last 12 months. Free cash flow on a trailing 12-month basis was $1.8 billion.
In the quarter, we paid $1.2 billion in dividends and repurchased $302 million of our stock. In total, we returned $6.7 billion to our owners in the past 12 months. Our balance sheet remains strong with $5.4 billion of cash and short-term investments at the end of the second quarter. In the quarter, we issued $1.2 billion of debt. Total debt outstanding is $14.15 billion with a weighted average coupon of 4%. Inventory at the end of the quarter was $4.8 billion, up $125 million from the prior quarter, and days were 231, down 9 days sequentially.
Turning to our outlook for the third quarter. We expect TI's revenue in the range of $4.45 billion to $4.80 billion and earnings per share to be in the range of $1.36 to $1.60. Our earnings per share outlook does not include changes related to recently enacted U.S. tax legislation and assumes an effective tax rate of about 12% to 13%. In closing, as we transition into the second half of 2025 and going into 2026, we're prepared for a range of scenarios. We are and will remain flexible to navigate, especially in the immediate term.
We will stay focused in the areas that add value in the long term. We continue to invest in our competitive advantages, which are manufacturing and technology, a broad product portfolio, reach of our channels and diverse and long-lived positions. We will continue to strengthen these advantages through disciplined capital allocation and by focusing on the best opportunities, which we believe will enable us to continue to deliver free cash flow per share growth over the long term.
With that, let me turn it back to Mike.
Thanks, Rafael. Operator, you can now open the line for questions. In order to provide as many of you as possible an opportunity to ask your questions, please limit yourself to a single question. After our response, we'll provide you an opportunity for an additional follow-up. Operator?
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Stacy Rasgon with Bernstein Research.
2. Question Answer
First, if I think to how your tone sounded last quarter and, frankly, even how you sounded kind of mid-quarter, you seemed really confident that the cyclical recovery was here, and we were kind of off to the races. And now I'm hearing you kind of saying you're staying flexible like to go after a range of scenarios. And like even in the quarter, like auto was down sequentially. I guess like what's going on, like how is your, I guess, outlook and feeling about where things are? How has that changed like over the last 3 months? Because you sound -- I guess just based on tone and everything else, it doesn't sound maybe quite exuberant as maybe sounded a few months ago, like what's going on?
Stacy, I'll take this one. So first, as we -- as I said in my prepared remarks, we are seeing 2 dynamics at play, and 1 of them is the cyclical recovery. I think we talked through it in the second quarter call back in April. And the discussion was all about industrial is joining the pack. We are now one more quarter in and this is the third quarter that we see a signal of industrial recovering, it's actually accelerated. So I can say we support 5 markets, we now have -- it started with PE, then enterprise and comms joined, and industrial is already in. We have 4 out of 5 markets recovering at a nice pace. And this is part of the reason we've added commentary on year-over-year performance to just show the dynamics over there.
In terms of automotive, to your question, look, automotive, let's just remember that it's kind of a year delayed versus industrial, right? Industrial peaked for us at least in the third quarter of 2022. Automotive picked 1 year later in the third quarter of 2023. So one could expect automotive to be joining last. The automotive recovery has been shallow, meaning we are running single digits versus the peak, we are running year-over-year. We are actually having some growth in the second quarter from a year-over-year perspective, but at a very low level. So I will say that automotive has not recovered yet. But because of content growth, I think the cycle here is going to be less pronounced and more shallow.
The second point related to getting ready. Look, we had some taste of it in the beginning of the second quarter, and we talked through it a lot during the call. But I think all the situation of tariffs and geopolitics disrupting supply chains, I think that's not over, right? It's true that we pause right now on the semiconductor tariffs, both in the U.S. and in China. But we have to be prepared for what the future may hold. So we want to make sure, and this is also the message to our customers that we'll remain flexible, and we'll know how to support our customers whatever the environment is moving forward.
You have a follow-up, Stacy?
I do. Maybe just a follow-up. Actually, I think I want to ask you about gross margins. We'll go there. If I just back into the guidance for next quarter, it seems like you're guiding gross margins probably down sequentially implicitly on revenue growth. I guess is that the case. And like what is that. Is that just depreciation, I know depreciation went up in the quarter. Is it just depreciation going up further? Or is something else going on in the gross margin line or what?
Yes, Stacy, I'll take that. So to help you and everyone with their models, where you should be landing, given our guidance is GPM percent above flat despite the higher depreciation that we're going to have going into third quarter. OpEx above flat. And then you -- what you're probably missing is the net of other income and expense and interest expense that's going to be unfavorable, about $20 million as we have lower cash levels, interest is lower while debt interest expense has continued to increase. So that's the part that's probably missing to round out your model.
Our next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
One of the signs of cyclical recovery is improvement in your terms business. Did the team see terms business grow sequentially in Q2, both in dollars and percent of revenues? And was it broad-based across both your industrial and auto businesses?
Yes. Let me start, and maybe, Mike, you can comment right after. So I think, yes, from a terms perspective, we see a continuation of that dynamic. We saw again, acceleration in the second quarter. Our -- we continue to invest in inventory. Our lead times are at the lowest level, customer inventories are very low. So we've seen that continuing. And Mike, maybe you want to provide some more color here? .
Yes. I think as we've talked about in previous quarters, that's something that late last year and in the first quarter began to build, we continue to see that into the second quarter as well.
Perfect. And then for my follow-up question, good to see the continued sequential and year-over-year recovery in the industrial segment, it's quite diverse, right? 10 subsegments, but the largest subsegment industrial automation, which is tied to manufacturing activity is pretty sensitive to trade and tariffs. So just wondering if this segment is relatively weaker due to tariff concerns. Or are you seeing shipment and order recovery here as well, especially among your China-based industrial customers.
Yes. Maybe I'll take that one. And what we actually saw in Industrial was recovery was broad, and it was across all sectors. So I'd say it's a continuation of the recovery we saw in the first quarter, and that's where we are. So, yes, move on to the next caller. Thank you.
Our next question comes from the line of Ross Seymore with Deutsche Bank.
Haviv, kind of going back to the first question just on kind of the tone, it seems like a little bit of a tone change on our side, maybe not so much to you, but maybe I'll try to ask it a different way. You highlighted the uncertainties about the tariff side of things, but then endorsed the cycle was coming. Last quarter, you guided significantly above normal seasonality. You seem to lean in on the cycle side and didn't really say that tariffs were doing much. So did something change in either the strength of the cycle or the uncertainty around the tariff to lead you to guide to more of a typical seasonal quarter for 3Q?
Yes. Let me put some more color into it, Ross. I think it's a great question. So remember, when we met here in April, we dealt with reciprocal tariffs on both sides. U.S. was exempting semis, but China had a 125% tariff rate on semis during the call, right? So just a different situation versus where we are now, now tariffs are put on hold, so a little bit of a different environment. I will say that we -- and I think I mentioned it also during the last call, when there is a change of dynamics like tariffs are being added, and I go back to April, customers are sitting on very low inventories.
I think it's a good assumption to make that customers will want to have a little bit more inventory. And we did see that phenomenon. We did see that in the early part of the quarter, there was an acceleration of demand and as expected, when customers are sitting on no inventories and there is a lot of noise around tariff. That has normalized through the quarter, and we are kind of back to right now, what drives our day-to-day is just a cyclical recovery.
Now as we forecast into Q3 and given the fact that we have a lot of real-time turns business that we have to kind of assess for the future, I think it's prudent to have a little bit of -- or to remember that what we saw in Q2 is probably a combination of customers wanting to have a little bit more inventory because of tariff and also the cyclical recovery. When customers make orders, they don't tell us why they want more parts. And I would assume that some of it was for building a little bit of inventory on their shelves to protect themselves from tariffs, if you will. So that is my assumption. Again, I don't know how the third quarter will play out, but that's part of the way we are forecasting Q3.
Ross, do you have a follow-up?
I do. Switching over to Rafael. Just kind of on the CapEx side of things, how should we think -- or is there any update on the CapEx and depreciation framework that you've given us for the annual numbers for this year and next year, especially given where you are in Phase 2, maybe going to Phase 3 on the CapEx side. Just want to see if there's any incremental color there.
Yes. No, happy to do that. The bottom line is there's no change but let me go through those so that everybody has those. On CapEx, for this year, 2025, we continue to expect to spend $5 billion. And for 2026, it's going to be between $2 billion and $5 billion, depending on revenue and growth expectations at that time. And we will update you on those -- on narrowing that CapEx window most likely later this year, okay? On depreciation, switching to depreciation, for 2025, we continue to expect $1.8 billion to $2 billion. And for 2026, we continue to expect $2.3 billion to $2.7 billion and likely to be at the lower side of that range.
Our next question comes from the line of Vivek Arya with Bank of America.
Haviv, sorry to go back to this tone change because it's not just from the last earnings call. It's at the end of a conference at the end of May, I think you had suggested that every remaining quarter of '25 will accelerate from the first half up 13%, but your Q3 sales guide is up only 11%. So my question is that versus that reference point, which end market has softened? Is it that the industrial normalization is done? Is it that auto, right, was a little weaker? Or is that just extra conservatism on TI's part? Because the tone change is, as I mentioned, not just from earnings, but from the end of May.
Yes. And again, I don't control probably tone level, but that's you guys are hearing...
But you quantified it, Haviv. You quantified; it wasn't just tone.
Sorry, directly to your question, Vivek, I would say that in the second quarter, we have seen industrial, in my opinion, running very hot, right? What were the numbers sequentially? Mid-teens, I think.
Upper teens, yes.
And it grew significantly year-over-year in the second quarter, close to 20%, right? So in that sense, I do believe it ran a little hot. This is where I want to be a little bit more cautious into Q3. We also saw and I'll let Mike comment about geographies. We also saw a little bit of higher pulls from China in the second quarter. We will have it in the queue when it comes out. But Mike, maybe you can give a little bit of China -- by region, maybe, not only China behavior in 2Q.
Sure. Yes. So China, it was up about 19% sequentially, it grew about 32% year-over-year. All end markets grew there with the exception of automotive and auto was pretty consistent with our overall results there. And industrial did lead the growth there in China. And just as a reminder, our China headquarter customers represent about 20% of our overall revenue.
And Vivek, that information gives you a little bit of why I want to be cautious for Q3, right? We have seen China running again a little bit hot in Q2. It was not across all markets, meaning on the automotive side, it behaved very similarly to the rest of the world. So it was not across the board. So we give you the data that it's hard to decipher what exactly or to decouple what was related to "pool-ins" or what was related to cyclical recovery. I think both are happening. And that's what -- that's the data we have right now, and that's what guides our third quarter as we plan for Q3.
Do you have a follow-up, Vivek?
For my follow-up, given everything they have heard, Haviv, I know you typically don't guide the quarter out, but how would you advise us to start thinking about Q4 that should we assume a similar conservative tone and assume something that is -- usually, your seasonality is, I think, down sequentially or flat sequentially. If you could remind us of that in Q4. And given everything we have heard; how should we just conceptually think about the move into Q4?
Vivek, as you know, we are a 1 quarter of a time company, specifically on guidance. So I will just say let's let the third quarter play out. Mike, do you want to comment about seasonality?
Yes. So historically, second and third are typically stronger quarters, fourth and first are typically seasonally lower. But we'll have to let third quarter play out to -- before we're going to be ready to talk about fourth. So maybe we'll go on to move on to our next caller. Thanks, Vivek.
Our next question comes from the line of C.J. Muse with Cantor.
I was hoping to revisit gross margins. You indicated flat roughly sequentially, and I guess within that, could you speak to your plans for utilization? Are there any sort of changes in mix? And if we were to normalize to kind of your typical, more typical 80% kind of fall through that would be an incremental maybe $25 million, $27 million. So is the kind of the pause in gross margin uplift 100% due to that increase in depreciation? Or are there other factors that we should be thinking about?
Yes. No, just to give you a few more information there. As I said earlier, and you restated, we expect third quarter gross margin to be about flat to the second quarter. That is with higher revenue, but also higher depreciation. In terms of loadings and inventory, we expect to run loadings about the same in third quarter as we did in the second quarter as we are well positioned with inventory to support a wide range of cyclical recovery scenarios.
Inventory, I expect to grow but at a slower rate than the growth we just had in second quarter. So hopefully, that gives you -- and then on the fall-through, we guide 75% to 85% debt over the long term that's over year-on-year and not any 1 quarter, but we should be close to that fall-through. We'll speak more about that when we have actuals, and we'll have better information to provide. But you should continue to think of 75% to 85% is a good number to use over the long term.
C.J., do you have a follow-up?
I do. With the ITC going from 25% to 35%, curious if you can comment on your thoughts on impact to your net CapEx into '26, '27. And is there any sort of movement or thought process that we should have around the impact of depreciation?
Okay. No, thanks for that question. So let's talk about the legislation that just passed. First, we are very pleased with the changes resulting from the passage of the recently enacted U.S. federal tax law. It includes expensing of U.S. R&D and eligible capital expenditures, an increase to the ITC from 25% to 35% and changes to other tax provisions such as the making FDII permanent. We are -- the effects of the new tax law are not reflected in the statements that we just released in the financial that we just released since the passage of the law happened in July. We are currently evaluating the changes in the legislation are going to have on future financial statements.
That's why in the guide that we gave, we did not incorporate it. We need additional time to do a full evaluation. However, I would tell you that based on our initial assessment, what we expect, what would likely happen is our GAAP tax rate will increase in third quarter in 2025; however, it will decrease in 2026 and beyond. More importantly, the cash -- from a cash flow standpoint, we expect significantly lower cash tax rates for the next several years. So again, we're very pleased with that legislation. Let me speak real quickly. You mentioned -- you asked about CapEx plan specifically. Our CapEx plans remain consistent with what we shared in February and will depend on revenue.
Our next question comes from the line of Jim Schneider with Goldman Sachs.
Maybe following up on some of the other questions that were asked. Could you maybe comment on some of the end markets, whether it be personal electronics or enterprise systems or otherwise, that you think may have gotten a little bit ahead of themselves or maybe run a little bit hotter into Q2 and which ones you think are sort of at risk of reverting a little bit in Q3 into Q4.
Yes. Let me take that. Remember that when we talk about the PE market and also enterprise, they're all kind of running at different phases under cyclical recovery. It started with really PE, then followed by enterprise, and comms and then Industrial joined later. As I mentioned before, the automotive market, we -- again, it's a very shallow cycle, but we haven't seen enough signs of true broad recovery over there.
Now regarding the -- if you go back to second quarter, where we saw a little bit, I will say, markets that ran higher than expected was on the industrial. We did expect the cyclical recovery in industrial with -- it did grow 15% sequentially, which is a little bit unnatural. When you add on top of it, the geography footprint, this is where I have a little bit of more cautiousness. I wouldn't mark anything else that behave differently in second quarter, Mike, would you agree?
That's the right assessment.
Yes, that's a market where we saw a little bit of, I think -- I wouldn't say anxiety, but customers just preferring to just have more parts. And we did see normalization through the quarter. So think about the front end of the quarter was running faster than the second half of the quarter. We think we left the quarter at a normal rate, but it's very hard to assess right now. So we keep watching it, and that's the market where I want to be more cautious when I think about Q3.
Do you have a follow-up?
Yes, I do. Relative to capital allocation, you mentioned about the cash tax benefits that you expect that will positively impact free cash flow next year and beyond? You reiterated the CapEx guidance, but can you maybe kind of speak to the capital return portion of this? Obviously, your free cash flow is better than what might you do differently or more on buybacks or dividends?
Yes. No, that's a good question. It's going to depend, and it's going to depend on a number of factors. For instance, right now, we're still in the middle of a high CapEx environment. And we'll see how long that lasts. As we said, next year, we do have a range of 2% to 5%. So that's still -- even at the low end, it's still a meaningful amount of CapEx and we need to be ready for that. And there are other factors, cash on the balance sheet, the price of the stock price, that also -- the stock that also plays into our decision. So we'll take that all into account. But at the end of the day, our objective remains the same when it comes to returning capital to owners, and that is to return all free cash flow through dividends and buybacks.
Our next question comes from the line of Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
The question is about fab loading and what your intentions are as we go through the back end of the year into next year, I guess, in light of some of the caution that you expressed, any changes you're making to fab loading and basically where you want your internal inventories to sit as you exit the year?
Yes. So I'll tell you, on an ideal -- in an ideal world, what we would want to do. And of course, the world is not ideal, and we'll have to navigate through that. But in an ideal world, what we would do is whole -- manage the operations, so the loadings are relatively stable, relatively flat over time. And what happens during a cyclical upturn, we actually drain some inventory and then during a cyclical downturn, we actually build some inventory.
And that's how you get the factory to run effectively constant over that time. Of course, it's not -- it's an ideal environment. You never quite know when you're at peak, when you're at a trough, so we'll have to add some guardrails to that to make sure that we maximize the opportunity and maintain flexibility. But at a high level, that's how we would like to run the company.
All right. Do you have a follow-up, Chris?
I do. And my follow-up if I could dig into auto a little bit more deeply. And it sounds like what you're saying there is auto hasn't really changed but hasn't recovered yet. That's a market where you've got a few customers that you speak to there, what's their tone right now, given all the macro uncertainty, what are they doing with inventory levels and preparing now? Is it just sort of in a holding pattern right now with regard to auto?
Yes, I think that's a good description. In a way the -- and again, I look at my graph here in front of me. So automotive, again, peaked for us in the third quarter of 2023 and in the last, I would say, 6 quarters, a little bit up, a little bit down, but hovering around a certain level of high single digit down versus that number. So -- and think about the automotive customers, those who shipped into the U.S., they have tariffs to deal with. So I don't think they want to -- I think they're being cautious right now. And I think the orders we get is only when they really need it. I don't think there is any inventory replenishment there, not only at the OEMs but also at the Tier 1 level.
So everything is almost real time. And we'll just -- we have -- our lead times are so low and most of our automotive customers on consignment. So we just get it real time. So to your point, we haven't seen yet the recovery. But remember, industrial peaked in the third quarter of '22, and we saw the recovery starting in Q4 of '24, so you can argue that automotive could be maybe a year later, if you just keep the same duration. So is it going to be some time in the second half of the year, we'll just have to see real time.
Our next question comes from the line of Joshua Buchalter with TD Cowen.
Maybe following up on Chris' previous one. When you spoke about China, it was clear that auto was sort of the outlier there and was down in line with your broader auto business. I mean it seems like China auto trends have been positive year-to-date, including in 2Q. It doesn't sound like there's de-stocking going on. Can you maybe explain what's going on specifically in China auto. Is there any element of share loss happening there? Or do you think it's more inventory dynamics?
Yes, I think it's a good question. I think it's more the latter. Automotive ran very hot last year in China, and there is enough news out there that there was a little bit of a caution coming or guidance, say, slowdown, some of the price wars over there. So I think we saw some of the dynamics. I think our automotive business in China is doing well.
I think from a year-over-year perspective, we grew the automotive business in Q2, but China was ahead of the rest of the market simply because, again, first in, first out. So we saw the recovery in China starting in 2024. I think it takes a little bit of a breather right now, but I think it's related to inventory correction on their side.
And I'd just add, if you look across the major regions for us in auto, U.S., Europe, China, they more or less performed pretty similarly on a sequential basis. They weren't vastly one stuck out differently than the others. When you look on a year-on-year, that's for China now is [indiscernible].
I would say China and Asia ahead and then you go to Europe and Japan behind very coherent with what we've seen in other markets.
Do you have a follow-up, Josh?
Yes, please. And so similarly, when you talked about China, it sounds like there was some element of potential pull-ins that were impacting the 2Q. You guys have talked for a while about having geopolitically dependable supply for the West. Are you seeing that on your customers outside of China at all? Or have they changed their behaviors? And when would -- should we expect sort of the share gains that you expect because of your U.S.-based manufacturing to start to flow through the model?
Yes. So let me start with just -- you mentioned the pull-in. We don't know. I just want to repeat that point. We just have to make assumptions. Customers don't tell us why they order. We just go through the data and try to decipher it, right? So we just can't rule out the possibility, and we say there was likely could have been some. When you see such a strong behavior in Q2 versus Q1, you have to attribute some of it to the tariff environment. Also remember that in China, we have -- the automotive market is more like what we call signed accounts.
We talk to the customers; we can explain to them the options. We have many industrial customers, it's just hard to get to everyone at once. And I think it just takes longer to let customers know the diverse manufacturing footprint, and we've got their back. So I think that's part of what we've seen during the second quarter, plus the tariffs that took a breather after a month or so. Now regarding the overall discussion on tariffs and our U.S. manufacturing footprint, I think that's an important point. We've spent a lot of time during the last call talking about the challenges maybe in China and how we are navigating it. But remember the environment is dynamic. Things are changing regularly, and tariffs and geopolitics will continue to evolve.
And as I said in the prepared remarks, reshape the supply chain. I think some of it is going to be a little bit more permanent. So our customers are increasingly valuing our geopolitically dependable capacity. And in the U.S., I think TI -- I think first, let me say, our global manufacturing footprint is optimized to support all of our customers worldwide. But if you go into the U.S., I do believe that the U.S. will make semis be -- U.S. semis will be increasingly incentivized in the U.S. And we do have a unique position. These are not investments that were made during the last quarter. We have been working on it for the past 5 years. Again, not because we have foreseen tariff.
We just wanted to control our destiny in the best way for us or the best efficiency for us to build our manufacturing footprint was in the U.S. And I think that hasn't played out yet. We do have a few customers. You could probably count them on one hand that are savvy and knowing what the plan -- how the plans could evolve. And they are already shifting and getting closer to us. But I think there is a lot of confusion at the broad customer base. People don't exactly understand the difference between reciprocal tariffs and sectoral tariffs and what's going to come and when, so there is a little bit of a wait and see.
And by the way, we don't know as well how things will evolve in the second half of the year. I will say that I believe our opportunity is greater than our challenge. While we are well equipped and well -- the diversity of our supply -- of our manufacturing footprint and supply chain is high, and we've proven it to our customers in Asia and specifically in China in the second quarter, I think TI is unique in the fact that we have a manufacturing footprint in the U.S.
And if U.S. chips are indeed becoming incentivized in whatever way they choose to do that, TI has a unique answer. Not only that we have the scale and the size of the required capacity, it's also very affordable. It's low cost, very competitive. And again, that opportunity has not played out yet, but we are ready for whatever changes we are going to meet in the second half of the year and beyond.
All right. Thanks, Josh. We'll move on to our last caller.
Our last question comes from the line of William Stein with Truist Securities.
It's variation on the theme that we've listened to tonight. In -- I think it was the past call, and if not, certainly, during the quarter, Haviv, I think you characterized the environment as cyclical recovery is the signal and that tariffs and geopolitics are more noise and that the signal to noise ratio was very high. And I think there was an expectation that the momentum that we saw in the first half of the year was going to extend.
And yet the guidance is sort of confusing in light of that view, specifically, you just delivered a plus 16.5% result year-over-year. And I think you're guiding to plus 11.5%. So how do I reconcile this? Is the environment just much more noisy than what you would characterize a quarter ago? Or did something else change? Is there another way to describe what happened in the last quarter?
No. I think regarding, Bill, what happened -- Will, sorry. What happened in Q2, I think we were very open about it. as I said, we did see some dynamics within the quarter. It was more noisy, if you will, in the second half of the quarter. And it's very hard for us to, as I said, to Vivek and others to quantify how much [Audio Gap] and when you make guidance into the third quarter with the data we see right now, we just want to take a responsible approach. That's the data we have right now, that's the way we call it. I think in the -- during the last call, everybody was pushing back, how could it be that TI will grow 7% sequentially, and I think we've up-sided there, right?
So I think right now, maybe the expectations were higher, but we are just calling the focus, the way we see it. We have to let it play out. I will reiterate that I believe the cyclical recovery is strong. Even if it masked a little bit by this tariff environment, I think we now have 4 out of the 5 markets already in. I expect automotive to join. I just don't see it yet. And once we have all 5 markets pointing in the right direction, will be complete. This recovery is very, very different from any previous one. You can see it also at the slope of the recovery, when you look at overall WSTS without memory trend, you can see a not very sharp return to trend line.
We are still running 12% or 13%, I believe, below trend line, and there is a lot of -- usually, when a cycle establish itself, you first have to get a trend line and then you have to establish the next peak. We are still running double digits percentagewise on units below trend line. So I think that's what we're seeing. We are not different than the rest of the market, I believe. And we'll just have to continue to let it play out. So that would be my answer to your question, Will.
Do you have a follow up?
Yes. If I can follow up one area that I hope might be a little bit more optimistic. In enterprise, I think you had a good quarter. And I'm wondering if you can remind us or update us as to your current and maybe future anticipated exposure to the rapid growth AI markets.
Yes, very well. Our enterprise market is mainly, I think, the largest sector over there for us is data center, data center compute, but it's not only data center. We also have, for example, large printers or enterprise printers over there and also projection devices. So we probably want to clarify that over time. But if I just focus on data center and it's mainly today inside the enterprise market for TI, but also a little bit of the optical communication inside comms. When I kind of cut out and I look at our data center story, that's behaving very well this year. It's growing very nicely. It's a very high level, above that 50% that I've mentioned before. And the future has a large opportunity for TI because we are seeing ourselves playing in more sockets over time.
Currently, our footprint on the data center side is more with our general-purpose part. We have a large share over there. But we're also working closely with some key customers to expand our positions there to more application-specific opportunities. This is based on our new technology that is ramping right now in Sherman, Texas. We already have samples, and we are competing to win share over there, that's more of a tailwind, a potential tailwind for us in 2026 and beyond. So that's our data center story. And thanks for that question, Will.
Okay. So let me wrap up with what we've said previously. At our core, we are engineers, and technology is the foundation of our company. But ultimately, our objective and best metric to measure progress and generate value to owners is the long-term growth of free cash flow per share. With that, thank you, and have a good evening.
Thank you. And this does conclude today's conference, and you may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Texas Instruments — Q2 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $4,4 Mrd. (+16% YoY (Year-over-Year), +9% QoQ (Quartal zu Quartal))
- Bruttogewinn: $2,6 Mrd.; GPM: 58% (Bruttomarge) (+110 Basispunkte QoQ)
- Betriebsgewinn: $1,6 Mrd. (35% Marge, +25% YoY)
- Ergebnis/Aktie: $1,41 EPS (inkl. $0,02 Vorteil gegenüber ursprünglicher Guidance)
- Cash & Kapital: Operativer Cashflow $1,9 Mrd. im Quartal; Free Cash Flow TTM $1,8 Mrd.; CapEx Q2 $1,3 Mrd.; Liquidität $5,4 Mrd.; Aktienrückkäufe + Dividenden $6,7 Mrd. (letzte 12 Monate)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Flexibilität: Management betont Vorbereitung auf unterschiedliche Szenarien wegen geopolitischer Risiken und möglichen Zolldynamiken; Globales Produktionsnetzwerk soll Kundenstabilität liefern.
- Fokus Fertigung & Tech: Fortgesetzte Investitionen in Fertigungskapazität und eigene Technologie als langfristiger Wettbewerbsvorteil; Sherman‑Ramp für neue Technologien genannt.
- Kapitalallokation: Diszipliniert: Dividenden + Buybacks bleiben Priorität; Rückgabe aller Free Cashflows an Besitzer ist Ziel.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Q3‑Leitplanke: Umsatz $4,45–4,80 Mrd.; EPS $1,36–1,60; angenommener effektiver Steuersatz ~12–13% (gesetzliche Änderungen noch nicht eingepreist).
- Steuern & Cash: Neuer US‑Steuergesetzgebungseffekt (ITC↑ auf 35%) wird noch bewertet; Management erwartet kurzfristig höheren GAAP‑Steuersatz, aber deutlich niedrigere Barsteuern 2026+.
- Investitionsrahmen: CapEx 2025 weiterhin $5 Mrd.; 2026 erwartetes Bandbreite $2–5 Mrd.; Abschreibungen 2025 $1,8–2,0 Mrd., 2026 $2,3–2,7 Mrd. (eher am unteren Ende).
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Tonalitätswechsel: Analysten hoben zurückhaltendere Rhetorik hervor — Management erklärt dies mit gemischten Signalquellen (zyklische Erholung vs. kurzfristige Pull‑ins wegen Zoll‑Uncertainty).
- Markt‑/Geographie‑Dynamik: Industrial lief im Q2 „heiß“ (starke Sequenz), China zeigte überdurchschnittliche Stärke; Unklarheit, wie viel davon Pull‑ins vs. nachhaltige Nachfrage ist.
- Margen & CapEx: GPM für Q3 erwartet flach trotz Umsatzanstieg (höhere Abschreibungen); CapEx‑Plan bleibt, ITC‑Änderung wird auf Cash‑Steuern positiv wirken, Bewertung läuft noch.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Solide operative Leistung und starke Cash‑Generierung bestätigen die langfristige Story (Fertigungsvorteil + Kapitalrückführung). Kurzfristig bleibt die Guidance konservativ: Risiko durch Zolldebatten und mögliche China‑Pull‑ins sowie ein „heißes“ Industrial‑Quartal können Q3 dämpfen. Für Aktionäre heißt das: gute fundamentale Basis, aber erhöhte Volatilität in den nächsten Quartalen; Fokus auf FCF‑per‑Share und die Wirkung der neuen Steuerregeln.
Finanzdaten von Texas Instruments
Umsatz
Der Umsatz stellt die Summe aller Einnahmen eines Unternehmens z. B. für dessen Produkte oder Dienstleistungen dar.
Umsatz (TTM) einfach erklärtDirekte Kosten
Direkte Kosten sind die Kosten, die direkt im Zusammenhang mit der Herstellung des Produkts oder der Dienstleistung entstehen.
Bruttoertrag
Der Bruttoertrag gibt an, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellkosten im Unternehmen verbleibt. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der Bruttomarge (engl. Gross Margin).
Brutto Marge einfach erklärtVertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten
Die Vertriebs- & Verwaltungskosten (engl. Selling, General & Administrative expenses, kurz SG&A) beinhalten alle Aufwände für Marketing und den Verkauf sowie die allgemeine Verwaltung des Unternehmens.
Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten
Die Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten (engl. research & development costs, kurz R&D) geben Auskunft darüber, wie viel das Unternehmen in die Forschung und die Entwicklung seiner Produkte investiert. Vor allem prozentual vom Umsatz und im Vergleich zu direkten Wettbewerbern sind die Kosten interessant.
EBITDA
Das EBITDA (Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der EBITDA-Marge.
Abschreibungen
Abschreibungen stellen Wertminderungen von Vermögensgegenständen des Unternehmens dar (z.B. durch Abnutzung von Maschinen).
EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis)
Das EBIT (engl. Earnings Before Interest and Taxes) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen und Steuern, das auch als operatives Ergebnis bezeichnet wird. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von
der EBIT-Marge.
Nettogewinn
Der Nettogewinn stellt den Gewinn oder Verlust nach Abzug aller Kosten dar.
Nettogewinn einfach erklärtaktien.guide Basis
| Mär '26 |
+/-
%
|
||
| Umsatz | 18.438 18.438 |
15 %
15 %
100 %
|
|
| - Direkte Kosten | 7.869 7.869 |
17 %
17 %
43 %
|
|
| Bruttoertrag | 10.569 10.569 |
13 %
13 %
57 %
|
|
| - Vertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten | 1.852 1.852 |
2 %
2 %
10 %
|
|
| - Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten | 2.076 2.076 |
4 %
4 %
11 %
|
|
| EBITDA | 8.758 8.758 |
22 %
22 %
47 %
|
|
| - Abschreibungen | 2.117 2.117 |
27 %
27 %
11 %
|
|
| EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis) EBIT | 6.641 6.641 |
21 %
21 %
36 %
|
|
| Nettogewinn | 5.336 5.336 |
10 %
10 %
29 %
|
|
Angaben in Millionen USD.
Nichts mehr verpassen! Wir senden Dir alle News zur Texas Instruments-Aktie direkt und kostenlos in Deine Mailbox.
Auf Wunsch erhältst Du jeden Morgen pünktlich zum Frühstück eine E-Mail, die alle für Dich relevanten Aktien-News enthält.
Texas Instruments Aktie News
Firmenprofil
Texas Instruments Incorporated beschäftigt sich mit dem Design und der Herstellung von Halbleiterlösungen für analoge und digitale Embedded- und Anwendungsverarbeitung. Das Unternehmen ist in den folgenden Segmenten tätig: Analoge und eingebettete Verarbeitung. Die Halbleiter des Analogsegments verändern reale Signale wie Schall, Temperatur, Druck oder Bilder, indem sie diese aufbereiten, verstärken und häufig in einen digitalen Datenstrom umwandeln, der von anderen Halbleitern, wie z.B. eingebetteten Prozessoren, verarbeitet werden kann. Das Segment der eingebetteten Verarbeitung ist für die Bewältigung spezifischer Aufgaben konzipiert und kann je nach Anwendung für verschiedene Kombinationen von Leistung, Leistung und Kosten optimiert werden. Das Unternehmen wurde 1930 von Cecil H. Green, Patrick Eugene Haggerty, John Erik Jonsson und Eugene McDermott gegründet und hat seinen Hauptsitz in Dallas, TX.
aktien.guide Basis
| Hauptsitz | USA |
| CEO | Mr. Ilan |
| Mitarbeiter | 33.000 |
| Gegründet | 1930 |
| Webseite | www.ti.com |


